JP7377097B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, this type of gaming machine has been used to determine whether or not a special game advantageous to the player can be executed, triggered by the entry of a game ball into a starting prize opening provided in the gaming area, and the results of a winning/falsifying lottery. At the same time, a special symbol is determined, a variable display of the special symbol is executed, and a stop display of the jackpot symbol indicating that the result of the above-mentioned winning lottery is to execute a special game (winning a jackpot) is executed. A special game is known in which a player can win a large number of prize balls by winning the ball. In such gaming machines, it is common to set the advantage of the gaming profit given to the player to be different depending on the type of the determined jackpot symbol. For example, the gaming states include a non-time-saving gaming state in which it is relatively difficult for a game ball to enter a predetermined starting prize opening, and a time-saving gaming state in which it is relatively easy for a gaming ball to enter a predetermined starting winning opening. There is known a gaming machine in which the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the time-saving gaming state when a specific jackpot symbol is determined (see Patent Documents 1 and 2).
In addition, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, a variable effect is executed to notify the result of a winning/failure lottery, and also to indicate the degree of expectation for the decision to execute a special game or the determination of the above-mentioned specific jackpot symbol. Various performances are performed. For example, a gaming machine has been devised in which a predetermined effect is executed such that the longer the execution period is, the higher the expectation of a decision to execute a special game is (see Patent Document 3).

JP 2015-107139 Publication Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2008-253554 Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2018-117751

However, although the above-mentioned predetermined performances can increase the player's interest, in recent years, with the increasing diversification of performances, it is possible to increase the player's interest even more based on the results of the above-mentioned win/fail lottery. It was hoped that a similar performance would appear.

Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase a player's interest in performance.

In order to achieve the above-mentioned object, the present invention is configured as follows.

(1) The present invention provides a first downstream area and a second downstream area that can be shot separately depending on the firing intensity of the game ball, and a first starting area that allows only game balls flowing down the first downstream area to enter; a second starting region in which only game balls flowing down the second downstream region can enter and can be displaced to a first state or a second state in which there is a higher possibility that game balls enter than the first state; A determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute an advantageous game advantageous to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting area or the second starting area, and determining a symbol associated with the result of the determination. Possible symbol determining means, performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance, and a non-time-saving gaming state in which the second starting area is relatively difficult to shift to the second state, or when the specific performance is executed. and setting means capable of setting any one of the time-saving gaming states in which the second start region is relatively easily displaced to the second state, and the first staying state is set as the time-saving gaming state. It has a first time-saving gaming state in which it is possible to stay in a period of time, and a second time-saving gaming state in which it is possible to stay in a second staying period that is longer than the first staying period, and the specific performance is a first time-saving gaming state. and a second specific performance that is executed during a second period that is longer than the first period, and during the non-time saving gaming state and the During the second time-saving game state, the game is mainly played in the first downstream area, and the performance execution means is associated with not executing the advantageous game during the non-time-saving game state. When a specific symbol is determined, the second specific performance can be executed, and the setting means sets the first time-saving gaming state when the first specific performance is executed. The gaming machine is characterized in that the second time-saving gaming state can be set when the second specific performance is executed.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first specific performance is executed during the first period, the first time-saving gaming state in which the user can stay during the first stay period is set, and the first time-saving gaming state is set. When the second specific performance is executed in a second period that is longer than the first period, a second time-saving game state that can be stayed in a second stay period that is longer than the first stay period is set. That is, the longer the period during which the specific performance is executed, the longer the period during which the player can stay in the time-saving gaming state. Therefore, the volume of gaming profit ( time-saving gaming state) given to the player changes depending on the period in which the specific performance is executed, so it is possible to increase the player's interest in such a performance. .

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can increase a player's interest in performance.

It is an external perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine with the front door opened. It is a front schematic view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a front schematic diagram of the inside of an attacker device of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram of a random number determination table of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram of a random number determination table of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram of a random number determination table of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram of a random number determination table of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram of a random number determination table of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram of a random number determination table of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram of a special symbol random number determination table of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory view of a special electric accessory operation table of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram of a game state setting table of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern table of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram of a winning determination random number determination table of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram of a normal symbol variation pattern determination table of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory view of the second starting prize opening control table of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of main processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of timer interrupt processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of processing at the time of sensor detection in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flow chart showing an outline of gate detection processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of the first starting winning hole detection process in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of the process at the time of second starting winning hole detection in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of preliminary determination processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flow chart showing an outline of processing when a specific area is detected in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of special figure related control processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of special symbol variation start processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the validity determination process in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of fluctuation pattern determination processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of special symbol fluctuation stop processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of post-stop processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of special game control processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of small winning game control processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of special game end processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the general pattern related control process in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of normal symbol fluctuation start processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of normal symbol fluctuation stop processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of the normal symbol stop processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flow chart showing an outline of movable piece control processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a state transition diagram showing transition to each gaming state of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the aspect of the variable performance of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the aspect of the variable performance of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the aspect of the variable performance of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the aspect of the variable performance of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the aspect of the variable performance of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram of a variable performance determination table of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution rate of the advance notice performance of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution rate of the pre-read effect of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the aspect of the special notification effect of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the aspect of the special notification effect of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the aspect of the special notification effect of a pachinko machine. It is a time chart showing the progress of variable performance and special notification performance of the pachinko machine. It is a time chart showing the progress of variable performance and special notification performance of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of main processing in the sub-control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of timer interrupt processing in the sub control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of variable pattern command reception processing in the sub control board of the pachinko machine. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of a win/fail random number determination table for a pachinko machine according to modification example (2). It is an explanatory view of the fluctuation pattern table of the pachinko machine concerning modification (36). It is an explanatory view of the fluctuation pattern table of the pachinko machine concerning modification (36). FIG. 7 is a state transition diagram showing transitions to each gaming state of the pachinko machine according to another application example 1. FIG. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of various setting contents of a pachinko machine according to another application example 3; 11 is a state transition diagram showing transitions to each gaming state of a pachinko machine according to another application example 3. FIG. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of various setting contents of a pachinko machine according to another application example 4; 12 is a state transition diagram showing transitions to each gaming state of a pachinko machine according to another application example 4. FIG. 12 is a schematic front view of a game board of a pachinko machine according to another application example 5. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram of various setting contents of a pachinko machine according to another application example 5. FIG. 11 is a state transition diagram showing transitions to each gaming state of a pachinko machine according to another application example 5. FIG.

(External configuration of pachinko machine P)
The game machine according to this embodiment is a pachinko machine P that uses game balls as game media. Although not particularly shown, in a game hall where pachinko machines P are installed, a plurality of pachinko machines P are arranged side by side in an area where the game machines are installed called an island, and a game machine for renting game balls is installed. A ball lending device is installed adjacent to each pachinko machine P. Further, each pachinko machine P is connected to a corresponding game ball lending device R.
The game ball lending device R is capable of inserting a storage medium (card) in which value information necessary for inserting banknotes and renting out game balls is stored. Then, by inserting banknotes (or inserting a card) into the game ball lending device R and performing a predetermined operation on the pachinko machine P, you can receive the lending of game balls from the game ball lending device R. It is now possible to do so.

As shown in FIG. 1 or 2, the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment includes a machine frame 1, which is a rectangular frame fixed to an island and has a hollow part (not particularly shown). A main body frame 2, which is a rectangular frame that is attached to the machine frame 1 so as to be openable and closable by a hinge mechanism (not particularly shown), and has a hollow part (not particularly shown); A front door 3 is attached to 2 so as to be openable and closable by a hinge mechanism (not particularly shown), and has an opening (not particularly shown) formed in the front.

As shown in FIG. 1, a speaker serving as an audio output device 10 is provided at the lower left portion of the machine frame 1. As shown in FIG. Furthermore, a game board 11 for forming a game area 12 is accommodated in the hollow portion of the main body frame 2. The front door 3 also includes a transparent plate 4 that covers the opening, an upper plate 6 and a saucer 7 that are located below the transparent plate 4 and can receive game balls, and a plate that is attached to the right side of the saucer 7 and that can hold game balls. An operating handle 5 for performing a firing operation and speakers serving as an audio output device 10 are provided, one each attached to the upper left and right sides of the transparent plate 4.

In this pachinko machine P, when the main body frame 2 is closed to the machine frame 1 and the front door 3 is closed, the transparent plate 4 is positioned in front of the game board 11 with a gap in between. Thereby, the game board 11 located at the rear can be visually recognized through the transparent plate 4.

Furthermore, game balls lent out by the game ball lending device R and prize balls paid out from the pachinko machine P are guided to the upper tray 6. The upper tray 6 is capable of receiving a predetermined amount of game balls, but when the upper tray 6 is full of game balls, game balls that are subsequently lent or paid out are guided to a receiving tray 7. It looks like this. Furthermore, although not particularly shown in the drawings, the bottom surface of the saucer 7 is provided with a discharge hole for discharging the stored game balls and an opening/closing plate that can open and close the discharge hole. In normal conditions, the discharge hole is closed by the opening/closing plate, but by moving the opening/closing lever 8 (see Fig. 1), which is attached integrally with the opening/closing plate, laterally, the opening/closing plate also moves in the same direction, and the discharge hole is closed. The hole is opened. Thereby, the game ball can be dropped from the discharge hole and discharged to the outside of the tray 7.

Further, the operating handle 5 is formed so that the player can rotate it in a predetermined direction. Then, when the player rotates the operating handle 5, the game ball received in the upper tray 6 is sent to a firing device (not particularly shown), and the game ball is sent with an intensity corresponding to the rotation angle of the operating handle 5. A game ball is fired toward the game area 12 by the firing device. The game ball launched in this way is guided by a pair of rails 13a, 13b fixed to the game board 11, rises, and reaches the game area 12.

Here, the game area 12 is defined as a space fixed to the game board 11 in a space formed between the game board 11 and the transparent plate 4 when the main body frame 2 and the front door 3 are closed with respect to the machine frame 1. This is an area partitioned into a substantially circular shape by a pair of rails 13a and 13b, and is an area where game balls can flow down.
As shown in FIG. 3, this gaming area 12 includes a first gaming area 12a, which is an area on the left when viewed from the player facing the pachinko machine P, and a right area when viewed from the player facing the pachinko machine P. and a second gaming area 12b. These two game areas 12 have different possibilities of entry of game balls depending on the firing strength of the firing device. Specifically, if the firing strength of the firing device is less than a predetermined strength (the strength is such that the game ball fired by the firing device does not reach the highest point of the game area 12), the game ball is sent to the first game area. Enter 12a. On the other hand, if the firing strength of the firing device is equal to or higher than the predetermined strength (strength that allows the game ball fired by the firing device to reach the highest point of the game area 12), the game ball is sent to the second game area 12b. enter.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, within this gaming area 12, there is a windmill and a large number of nails for making the flowing direction of gaming balls irregular, a general prize opening 14 into which gaming balls can enter, and a starting hole. A first starting prize opening 15 and a second starting winning opening 16 as areas, a gate 20 through which a game ball can pass, an attacker device 17 that operates when a predetermined condition is met, and a game ball guided outside the gaming area 12. An out port 19 and an effect display device 21 as an effect device that performs effects as the game progresses are provided. In addition, in FIG. 3, only some nails are shown, and other nails are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 3, the general winning hole 14 is provided at a position slightly to the left from the center of the lower part of the gaming area 12, and when a game ball enters the general winning hole 14, a predetermined number (5 in this embodiment) of the game ball enters the general winning hole 14. ) prize balls are paid out.
In addition, the number and installation position of the general prize winning holes 14 are not particularly limited.

As shown in FIG. 3, the first starting prize opening 15 is provided at a position slightly lower from the center of the gaming area 12, and the second starting winning opening 16 is provided in the gaming area 12, as shown in FIG. It is located slightly above the center on the right side of the screen. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, only the game balls flowing down the first game area 12a can enter the first starting prize opening 15, and the game balls flowing down the second game area 12b can enter the first starting prize opening 15. Balls cannot be entered. In addition, only game balls flowing down the second game area 12b can enter the second starting prize opening 16, and game balls flowing down the first game area 12a cannot enter.

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 3, the second starting prize opening 16 is provided with a movable piece 16b (normal electric accessory) that can be opened and closed. When the movable piece 16b is closed, the second starting prize opening 16 is in a closed state, and it is impossible for a game ball to enter the second starting winning opening 16. On the other hand, when the movable piece 16b opens, the second starting prize opening 16 becomes open, and this movable piece 16b functions as a guide member that guides the game ball toward the second starting winning opening 16. This allows the game ball to enter the second starting prize opening 16.
Further, the configuration of the movable piece 16b is not particularly limited, and may include, for example, a pair of blade members that rotate in the left and right directions around an axis perpendicular to the game board 11 to open and close the second starting prize opening 16. , it may be constituted by a lid member that opens and closes the second starting prize opening 16 by rotating back and forth around an axis parallel to the game board 11, or by sliding in the vertical direction to open and close the second starting winning opening 16. 16 may be configured by a shutter member that opens and closes.
Note that the installation positions of the first starting winning hole 15 and the second starting winning hole 16 are not particularly limited. For example, the first starting winning hole 15 and the second starting winning hole 16 can be installed in any of the gaming areas 12 ( The game balls flowing down the first game area 12a, second game area 12b) may also be placed at positions where the balls can easily enter.

Then, when a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 or the second starting winning hole 16, a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out, and whether or not a jackpot has been won (hereinafter also referred to as jackpot) is determined. , a lottery is held to determine whether or not a small win is won (hereinafter also referred to as a small win), and whether or not a time-saving gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as a time-saving grant) is granted. One special symbol is determined from among a plurality of predetermined special symbols according to the result of the lottery. There are multiple types of special symbols that can be determined, and depending on the type of special symbol determined, execution of special games that are advantageous to the player, execution of small winning games, and provision of time-saving gaming states (described later) The first time-saving gaming state setting) and other gaming profits are awarded.
In addition, the prize balls paid out based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15 or the second starting winning hole 16 are not particularly limited as long as they are one or more, and any number of balls may be paid out. good. In addition, the number of prize balls is the same in the starting winning hole (second starting winning hole 16) in which the movable piece 16b is provided and the starting winning hole (first starting winning hole 15) in which the movable piece 16b is not provided. It may be different, or it may be different. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting prize opening 15 is four, and the number of prize balls paid out based on the entering of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16 is four. The number of prize balls paid out is one.

The gate 20 is provided above the second starting prize opening 16, as shown in FIG. When a game ball passes through this gate 20, a lottery of normal symbols, which will be described later, is carried out. If the result of the drawing of the normal symbol is a win, the movable piece 16b provided in the second starting prize opening 16 is opened for a predetermined period of time.

As shown in FIG. 3, the attacker device 17 is provided at the lower right portion of the gaming area 12 (below the second starting prize opening 16). This attacker device 17 includes a grand prize opening 18 into which game balls can enter, and an opening/closing door 18b that opens and closes this grand prize opening 18. Under normal conditions, the opening/closing door 18b is closed and the big prize opening 18 is closed, so it is impossible to enter the game ball into the big winning opening 18, but the above-mentioned special game or small winning game When this is executed, the opening/closing door 18b opens and the grand prize opening 18 is opened, allowing the game ball to enter the grand prize opening 18. Specifically, during the above-mentioned special game, a round game in which the big winning hole 18 is opened is executed multiple times, and during the above-mentioned small winning game, the big winning hole 18 is opened only once. It is scheduled to be held twice. When one game ball enters the grand prize opening 18, a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of prize balls are paid out.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, game balls flowing down the second game area 12b can enter the big prize opening 18, and game balls flowing down the first game area 12a cannot enter. It looks like this. In addition, although not particularly shown, almost all of the game balls flowing down the second game area 12b, except for the ball that entered the second start winning hole 16, are nailed so that they can reach the big winning hole 18. There are windmills, etc. Therefore, if the game ball continues to be launched as long as the big winning hole 18 is in the open state, the game ball will enter the big winning hole 18.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 4(a) and 4(b), inside the attacker device 17, there is provided a rolling road 51 on which the game ball that enters the big prize opening 18 can roll toward the left. There is. This turning road 51 branches into an upper passage 52 and a lower passage 53 at a predetermined position in the rolling direction, and at the end of the upper passage 52, a general game ball that enters the big prize opening 18 can enter. A region 58 is provided, and a specific region 57 is provided at the end of the lower passage 53 into which a game ball that has entered the big prize opening 18 can enter (see FIGS. 4(a) and (b)).

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 4(a) and 4(b), at the position where the upper passage 52 and the lower passage 53 diverge, there is a distribution member that distributes the game balls to either the upper passage 52 or the lower passage 53. 59 are provided. This distribution member 59 is rotatable around an axis perpendicular to the game board 11, and has two positions: a first position where the path to the upper passage 52 is opened and a path to the lower passage 53 is blocked; It is possible to move between a second position where the passage to the lower passage 53 is closed and a passage to the lower passage 53 is opened. When the game ball enters the big prize opening 18, when the distribution member 59 is located at the first position, it advances to the upper passage 52 and enters the general area 58, and when the distribution member 59 is located at the second position, the game ball enters the general area 58. When there is, it advances to the lower passage 53 and enters the specific area 57.

Although not particularly shown, the attacker device 17 includes a specific area discharge port for discharging game balls that have entered the specific area 57 outside the grand prize opening 18 (to the back side of the game board 11), and a general area. A general area discharge port is provided for discharging the game balls that have entered the game ball 58 to the outside of the grand prize opening 18 (to the back side of the game board 11).

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the opening/closing mode (opening/closing pattern) of the opening/closing door 18b in the round game executed during the above-mentioned special game and the distribution are determined for each type of special symbol determined at the time of winning the jackpot. The mode of operation (operation pattern) of the member 59 is set.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls enters the specific area 57 during a specific round game, the gaming state after the end of the special game is changed to A gaming state is set that is a combination of a high probability gaming state and a time saving gaming state, which are advantageous for the players. On the other hand, if a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57 during a specific round game (that is, if all the game balls that entered the grand prize opening 18 enter the general area 58), The gaming state after the end of the special game is set to a gaming state (normal gaming state) that is a combination of a low probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state.
The opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing door 18b, the operation pattern of the sorting member 59, and the setting of the gaming state will be described in detail later.
In addition, as mentioned above, when a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57 in the round game during the special game, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability game state or the time-saving game state. Instead, the game state after the end of the special game may be set to a high-probability game state or a time-saving game state, depending on the type of special symbol determined when a jackpot is won. For example, when you win a jackpot and a specific special symbol is determined, the gaming state after the special game is set to a gaming state that is a combination of a high probability gaming state and a time saving gaming state (high probability time saving gaming state). However, if a special symbol other than a specific special symbol is determined, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to a gaming state (normal gaming state) that is a combination of a low probability gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state. It is also possible to do so. In this way, when the game state after the end of the special game is determined according to the type of special symbol, it is not necessary to provide the above-mentioned specific area 57.

As shown in FIG. 3, the out hole 19 is provided at the bottom of the gaming area 12, and can be placed in any of the general winning hole 14, the first starting winning hole 15, the second starting winning hole 16, and the big winning hole 18. It also accepts game balls that have not entered the ball. The game balls received at the out port 19 are guided to the back side of the game board 11 and collected.

The effect display device 21 is provided approximately at the center of the gaming area 12, as shown in FIG. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is used as the effect display device 21. In addition, this effect display device 21 is provided with a display section 21a for displaying images such as moving images and still images.In addition to displaying a background image, this display section 21a also displays effect patterns 50 ( Dummy symbols) are displayed in a variable manner, and a variable effect is performed in which the player is informed of the result of the lottery by changing the stop display mode of each effect pattern 50.
Note that the effect display device 21 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device; for example, a drum-type display device or the like that performs various displays using a plurality of drums with patterns on the outer periphery may be used.

The pachinko machine P according to this embodiment includes, as a production device, a production display device 21, a speaker as the above-mentioned audio output device 10, and a production lighting device 23 that performs production by emitting light in various colors and lighting patterns. lamp (see Figure 1).
Note that the performance device is not limited to these, and may include, for example, a performance accessory device that moves at various timings and modes.

Further, in a position in front of the upper tray 6, there is provided a production operation device 9 which can be operated by a player to advance or switch productions executed during a game or during standby. The production operation device 9 in this embodiment is composed of an operation dial 9a that is a circular ring-shaped frame and can be rotated, and an operation button 9b that is fitted into the operation dial 9a and can be pressed. . When a predetermined performance is being executed by the performance display device 21, if the operation dial 9a is rotated or the operation button 9b is pressed, various performances such as a variable performance will progress or a different display will be displayed. It is becoming more and more common.
Note that the production operation device 9 is not limited to the operation dial 9a, the operation buttons 9b, etc., and may be provided with a cross key or the like that allows input in the up, down, left, and right directions. Further, in addition to providing the production operation device 9 such as the operation dial 9a and the operation button 9b, the above-mentioned cross key may be provided separately.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, at the lower right side of the game board 11 and outside the game area 12, there is a first special symbol display device 30 as a device for displaying various situations regarding the game. , a second special symbol display device 31, a first special symbol retention display device 38, a second special symbol retention display device 39, a normal symbol display device 32, and a normal symbol retention display device 33 are provided.

Further, as described above, the game ball lending device R is electrically connected to the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, but operations on the game ball lending device R, such as lending out game balls and ejecting cards, It is designed to be accepted by pachinko machine P. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine P includes a value information display device 35 that displays value information (balance information) stored in the card, a ball lending button 36 that can be pressed, and a ball rental button 36 that can be pressed. A card return button 37 that allows the user to return the card is provided.

(Configuration of control means of pachinko machine P)
Next, a control means for controlling the games and performances of the pachinko machine P will be explained.
The above-mentioned control means is composed of various control boards, and specifically, as shown in FIG. It is equipped with a firing payout control board 200 that controls payout, a sub-control board 300 that controls various performances, and a game ball lending control board 400 that relays operations to the game ball lending device R.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, a firing payout control board 200 and a sub control board 300 are connected to the main control board 100, and a game ball lending control board 400 is connected to the firing payout control board 200. There is. Furthermore, an external information terminal board 500 is connected to the main control board 100 and the firing and payout control board 200 for outputting various information regarding game progress to the outside of the pachinko machine P (for example, a hall computer in a game hall, etc.). has been done.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as described above, the firing and payout control board 200 controls both the firing of game balls and the paying out of prize balls. A board) and a board for controlling the payout of prize balls (a payout control board) may be provided separately.

Further, although not particularly illustrated, a power supply board is connected to each board included in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment. This power supply board is provided with a backup power supply, and when the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the pachinko machine P falls below a predetermined value, it is determined that the power has been cut off, and a power cutoff signal is output to the main control board 100. .

The main control board 100 controls the game played in the pachinko machine P, and specifically, starts when a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 or the second starting winning hole 16. special pattern games (win/fail lottery, special pattern determination, special pattern fluctuation display (hereinafter also referred to as special pattern fluctuations)), regular pattern games that are started when the game ball passes through the gate 20 ( It controls lottery of normal symbols, variable display of normal symbols (hereinafter also referred to as variation of normal symbols), special games advantageous to the player, small winning games, etc.
As shown in FIG. 5, this main control board 100 includes a main CPU 101 that performs various calculation processes, a main ROM 102 that stores control programs for proceeding with the game, data and tables necessary for the game, and a main ROM 102 that stores data and tables necessary for the game. The main RAM 103 is used as a temporary storage area, etc.
Then, the main CPU 101 reads a control program stored in the main ROM 102 and performs calculation processing based on signals from each detection sensor and timer described later, and also controls and performs calculations on various devices connected to the main CPU 101. Sends commands to other boards based on the processing results.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 5, the main control board 100 includes a general winning hole detection sensor 14a that detects that a game ball has entered the general winning hole 14, and a general winning hole detection sensor 14a that detects that a game ball has entered the first starting winning hole 15. The first starting winning hole detection sensor 15a detects that the ball has hit the ball, the second starting winning hole detecting sensor 16a detects that the game ball has entered the second starting winning hole 16, and the game ball enters the big winning hole 18. A big prize opening detection sensor 18a that detects that a ball has entered the gate, a gate detection sensor 20a that detects that a game ball has passed through the gate 20, and a fraud detection sensor that detects magnetism, radio waves, etc. directed toward the game board 11. 35 and a specific area detection sensor 57a that detects that a game ball has entered the specific area 57 are connected. Detection signals output from each of these detection sensors are input to the main control board 100.
Note that the sensors connected to the main control board 100 are not limited to these, and for example, a general area detection sensor that detects that a game ball has entered the general area 58 may be provided.

Furthermore, the main control board 100 includes, as devices to be controlled, a starting winning opening solenoid 16c that drives the movable piece 16b of the second starting winning opening 16 to open and close, and a starting winning opening solenoid 16c that drives the opening and closing door 18b of the big winning opening 18 to open and close. The big prize opening solenoid 18c, the distribution member solenoid 59c that displaces the distribution member 59, the first special symbol display device 30, the second special symbol display device 31, the normal symbol display device 32, and the first special symbol pending display The device 38, the second special symbol reservation display device 39, and the normal symbol reservation display device 33 are connected.
By driving each solenoid by the main control board 100, opening/closing control of the second starting prize opening 16 and big prize opening 18 and displacement control of the distribution member 59 are performed, and display control of each display device is performed. It is about to be done.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, multiple stages from setting value 1 to setting value 6 are determined as settings regarding the ball output, and depending on the difference in these setting values, winning of the jackpot in the winning/failure lottery described below is determined. The probabilities of are now different. For example, setting value 6 is set so that the probability of winning the jackpot is higher than setting value 1, and if the probability of winning the jackpot is high, the possibility of winning the prize ball is also high. By changing the set value, the expected payout amount of prize balls in the pachinko machine P changes. In addition, a win/fail random number determination table 110 used in a win/fail lottery to be described later is provided corresponding to each of set values 1 to 6, and when a set value is changed, a win/fail random number determination table 110 is provided for each set value. The entire table 110 will be changed.
Although not particularly shown, the main control board 100 is provided with a RAM clear switch and a setting switch used to change the above-mentioned setting values. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the front door 3 is open and the power is turned on with both the RAM clear switch and the setting switch turned on, the machine shifts to a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed. . During this setting change state, the set value can be changed by operating the RAM clear switch.

Although not particularly shown, the firing and dispensing control board 200 is equipped with a CPU, ROM, and RAM similarly to the main control board 100, and is connected to the main control board 100 so as to be able to communicate bidirectionally. .

As shown in FIG. 5, the firing and payout control board 200 includes a touch sensor 5a that detects when a player touches the operating handle 5 as a device for controlling the firing of game balls, and a touch sensor 5a that detects when a player touches the operating handle 5. An operation volume 5b that detects the angle (rotation angle), a launch stop switch 5c that stops the launch of game balls, and a ball feeder that sends the game balls received in the upper tray 6 to a launcher (not shown). A solenoid 60 and a firing motor 61 that fires game balls are connected. Further, control signals output from the touch sensor 5a, the operation volume 5b, and the firing stop switch 5c are input to the firing and dispensing control board 200.

When control signals from the touch sensor 5a and the operation volume 5b are input to the firing and payout control board 200, control is performed to energize the ball feed solenoid 60 and the firing motor 61 to fire the game balls. Furthermore, while the ball feed solenoid 60 and the firing motor 61 are energized, game balls are continuously fired at 0.6 second intervals (that is, at a firing pace of 100 balls per minute). . On the other hand, when a control signal from the firing stop switch 5c is input to the firing payout control board 200, control is performed to stop the ball feeding solenoid 60 and the firing motor 61 from being energized to stop firing the game balls.
Note that a rotary solenoid may be used instead of the shooting motor 61 as a device for shooting game balls.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 5, the firing and payout control board 200 is used as a device for controlling the payout of game balls, and the game balls stored in the game ball storage section (not particularly shown) are stored in the firing and payout control board 200 as a device for controlling the payout of game balls. A payout motor 62 that pays out balls and a payout counting switch 63 that detects and counts the paid out game balls are connected. When the launch payout control board 200 receives the payout number command transmitted from the main control board 100, the launch payout control board 200 pays out a predetermined number of game balls (prize balls) based on this payout number command. The dispensing motor 62 is controlled as follows. At this time, the number of game balls that have been paid out is counted by the payout counting switch 63, making it possible to determine whether a predetermined number of game balls (prize balls) have been paid out.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5, the firing and dispensing control board 200 includes a front door open detection sensor 3a that detects the open state of the front door 3, and a saucer full detection sensor 7a that detects the full state of the saucer 7. , are connected.

When the front door open detection sensor 3a detects that the front door 3 is open, it outputs an open detection signal to the firing and dispensing control board 200, and while the front door 3 is open, the open detection signal is output. Continuous output. Then, the firing and dispensing control board 200 transmits a door opening command to the main control board 100 when the opening detection signal is input. On the other hand, when the front door open detection sensor 3a no longer detects that the front door 3 is open, it turns off and stops outputting the door open detection signal. Then, when the input of the door open detection signal stops, the firing and dispensing control board 200 determines that the front door 3 is closed, and stops transmitting the door open command to the main control board 100.

The saucer full detection sensor 7a is provided at a predetermined position on the saucer 7. When a predetermined amount or more of game balls to be paid out as prize balls are stored in the saucer 7 and the tray is full, the stored game balls will reach the above-mentioned predetermined position.
The saucer full detection sensor 7a is turned on when it detects that the game balls have reached the above-mentioned predetermined position, and outputs a saucer detection signal to the firing and payout control board 200, so that the stored game balls can reach the above-mentioned predetermined position. While the predetermined position is reached, the saucer detection signal is continuously output. Then, when the saucer detection signal is input, the firing and dispensing control board 200 transmits a saucer full command to the main control board 100. On the other hand, when the saucer full detection sensor 7a does not detect that the game ball has reached the above-mentioned predetermined position, it turns off and stops outputting the saucer detection signal. Then, when the input of the saucer detection signal stops, the firing and dispensing control board 200 determines that the saucer 7 is no longer full, and stops sending the saucer full command to the main control board 100.

Further, as described above, the game ball lending control board 400 that relays operations to the game ball lending device R is connected to the firing and payout control board 200. As shown in FIG. 5, the firing and payout control board 200 includes, via the game ball lending control board 400, a value information display device 35, a ball lending switch 36a that detects the pressing operation of the ball lending button 36, and a card return control board 200. A card return switch 37a that detects a pressing operation of the button 37 is connected.

When the ball lending button 36 is pressed, the detection signal output from the ball lending switch 36a is input to the firing and payout control board 200, and the firing and paying control board 200 instructs the game ball lending device R to supply game balls. A lending request signal requesting the lending of the information is transmitted. When the game ball lending device R receives the lending request signal, the game ball lending device R performs a process of subtracting predetermined value information from the stored value information, and responds to the subtracted value information. Control is performed to pay out the same number of game balls.
Further, when the card return button 37 is pressed, a detection signal output from the card return switch 37a is input to the firing payout control board 200, and the firing payout control board 200 sends a message to the game ball lending device R. Send a return request signal requesting return of the card. Then, when the game ball lending device R receives the return request signal, the game ball lending device R controls to eject the card.

The sub-control board 300 controls effects performed during gaming, standby, and the like.
As shown in FIG. 5, this sub-control board 300 includes a sub-CPU 301 that performs various calculation processes, a sub-ROM 302 that stores control programs for executing effects, data and tables necessary for executing effects, and a sub-ROM 302 for storing data and tables necessary for executing effects. A sub-RAM 303 used as a temporary storage area during processing, etc., and is connected to enable communication in one direction from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 300.
Based on commands sent from the main control board 100 and signals from the timer, the sub CPU 301 reads the control program stored in the sub ROM 302 and performs arithmetic processing, as well as performs image control for controlling image display. A board (not particularly shown), an audio control board (not particularly shown) for controlling audio output, and an illumination control board (not particularly shown) for controlling lighting. , sends a command to execute the performance.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as described above, the audio control board and the illumination control board are provided separately, but the functions of these boards are integrated into one board (the audio illumination control board). ), and both the audio output and the lighting of the lighting may be controlled by the board.

Furthermore, the effect display device 21 is connected to the sub-control board 300 via an image control board, and the audio output device 10 is connected to the sub-control board 300 via an audio control board. Furthermore, the sub-control board 300 includes, via an illumination control board, the production lighting device 23, a rotational operation detection sensor 9c that detects a rotational operation of the operation dial 9a, and a press operation that detects a press operation of the operation button 9b. A detection sensor 9d is connected.

Although not particularly shown, the image control board includes an image CPU, an image ROM, an image RAM, and the like. The image ROM of this image control board stores image data such as the effect design 50, background, etc. displayed on the effect display device 21. Then, based on the command transmitted from the sub-control board 300, the image CPU controls image display by the effect display device 21 by storing the image data read from the image ROM in the image RAM.

Although not particularly shown, the audio control board includes a sound chip (CPU), a sound ROM, a sound RAM, and the like. The sound ROM stores sound data such as audio and BGM output from the audio output device 10. Then, based on the command transmitted from the sub-control board 300, the sound data read from the sound ROM is stored in the sound RAM, thereby controlling the audio output from the audio output device 10.

The illumination control board controls the lighting of the lighting device 23 based on commands from the sub-control board 300. The illumination control board also receives a rotational operation detection signal outputted from the rotational operation detection sensor 9c based on the rotational operation of the operation dial 9a, or a pressdown outputted from the pressdown operation detection sensor 9d based on the pressed operation of the operation button 9b. When the operation detection signal is input, a predetermined command is sent to the sub control board 300.

(Summary of games on pachinko machine P)
Next, the game in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment will be explained based on various tables stored in the main ROM 102.
As described above, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, the special figure game and the regular figure game proceed in parallel. In addition, the gaming states when playing these two games are either a low probability gaming state (so-called non-probability variable state) or a high probability gaming state (so-called probability variable state), and a non-time-saving gaming state or time-saving gaming state. A gaming state that is a combination of one of the gaming states and the other gaming states is set. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, there are two time-saving gaming states, a first time-saving gaming state and a second time-saving gaming state, and either of the time-saving gaming states is set. There is.
Specifically, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, a gaming state that combines a low probability gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a normal gaming state), a combination of a low probability gaming state and a first time saving gaming state A gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a first low probability time saving gaming state), a gaming state that is a combination of a low probability gaming state and a second time saving gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a second low probability time saving gaming state), or a high probability gaming state and One of the game states (hereinafter referred to as high probability time-saving game state) that is a combination of the second time-saving game state is set.

Here, the low-probability gaming state and the high-probability gaming state are gaming states in which the probabilities of winning a jackpot are set to be different depending on the winning/failure drawing described later. The probability of doing so is set to a higher value than the low probability gaming state. In other words, it is easier to win a jackpot through the winning lottery in the high probability gaming state than in the low probability gaming state.

In addition, the non-time-saving gaming state and the time-saving gaming state are gaming states in which the difficulty level of entering the game ball into the second starting prize opening 16 is set to be different, and in the time-saving gaming state, the non-time-saving gaming state It is set so that the movable piece 16b is more likely to be maintained in the open state (that is, the second starting prize opening 16 is more likely to be in the open state) than the state. That is, it is easier for the game ball to enter the second starting prize opening 16 during the time-saving game state than during the non-time-saving game state.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, as described above, there are two time-saving game states, the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state. It is set so that the movable piece 16b is more easily maintained in the open state than in the one-hour saving game state. That is, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the game ball is most likely to enter the second starting winning hole 16 during the second time saving game state, and the second starting winning hole 16 is most likely to enter the second starting winning hole 16 during the first time saving gaming state. It is easy for the game ball to enter into the second starting prize opening 16, and it is most difficult for the game ball to enter into the second starting prize opening 16 during the non-time saving game state.
Note that the normal gaming state is set immediately after factory shipment or in the initial state after reset.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a game ball launched by a firing device (not shown) and flowing down the gaming area 12 enters the first starting prize opening 15 or the second starting winning opening 16, a lottery is drawn. is carried out, and a special symbol associated with a gaming profit based on the result of the lottery is determined. In the winning/failure lottery in this form, first, it is determined whether the jackpot is a jackpot, and if the judgment result is that the jackpot has not been won (hereinafter also referred to as "non-jackpot winning"), then the small jackpot is determined. If the judgment is made and the judgment result is that the small win has not been won (hereinafter also referred to as non-winning of the small win), then the next step is to decide whether to give the time-saving game (whether to give the time-saving gaming state or not). In other words, whether or not to set the time-saving gaming state) is made, and if the judgment result is that the time-saving gaming state will not be granted (hereinafter also referred to as non-winning of the time-saving granting), It will be a loss.
Then, when a judgment result of winning the jackpot is derived from this lottery (that is, when winning the jackpot), the jackpot 18 is opened and it is possible to enter the game ball into the jackpot 18. A special game is executed, and furthermore, the game state after the end of the special game is set to one of a normal game state, a second low probability time saving game state, or a high probability time saving game state. In other words, after the special game is finished, the game is configured to shift to either the normal game state, the second low probability time saving game state, or the high probability time saving game state.

In addition, when the above-mentioned winning/failure lottery determines that a small win has been won (that is, if a small win has been won), the big prize opening 18 is opened and the game ball can be entered into the big winning opening 18. A small winning game is executed. In this small winning game, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 18, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as described above. In addition, the gaming state after the end of the small winning game remains the gaming state before the start of the small winning game. That is, when a small winning game is executed, the game state does not change.

In addition, when a determination result indicating that the time-saving gaming state will be granted through the above-mentioned lottery is derived (hereinafter also referred to as winning of the time-saving granting), the first time-saving gaming state is set without changing the low probability gaming state. It has become. That is, when a time-saving award is won in the above-mentioned lottery, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the first low-probability time-saving gaming state. On the other hand, if the time-saving grant is not won in the above-mentioned lottery, the gaming state remains the normal gaming state.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the determination of the propriety of granting time savings is made only in the lottery during the normal gaming state, and the determination of the propriety of granting the time savings is not performed in the lottery in other gaming states. . Therefore, during other gaming states, the determination result of winning the time-saving grant will not be derived, so the gaming state will not change without going through the winning of the jackpot and the execution of special games. It is set.

Here, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the game ball flowing down the first game area 12a can enter the first starting prize opening 15. In addition, the game ball flowing down the second game area 12b can pass through the gate 20, enter the second starting prize opening 16, and enter the big prize opening 18.
During the normal game state and the first low probability time-saving game state, the player is instructed to launch the game ball toward the first game area 12a so that the game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15 ( During the second low-probability time-saving game state, high-probability time-saving game state, and special game, the game ball enters the big prize opening 18, or the game ball passes through the gate 20. The player is made to launch the game ball toward the second game area 12b (so-called right-handed hit) so that the ball enters the second starting prize opening 16.
Specifically, during the second low-probability time-saving game state, during the high-probability time-saving game state, and during the special game, a display instructing to launch a game ball toward the second game area 12b is displayed on the performance display device 21. During the normal game state and during the first low probability time-saving game state, a display is performed on the performance display device 21 instructing to launch a game ball toward the first game area 12a.

The lottery is based on various random numbers obtained when a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15 or the second starting winning opening 16, and the random numbers stored in the main ROM 102 for determining the random numbers. This is done based on various tables.
Here, the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment uses a random number, which is used to determine the result of the lottery (big hit, small win, provision of a time-saving gaming state, or loss), as a random number related to the lottery and the determination of special symbols; It has a special symbol random number used to determine the type of special symbol, and a variable pattern random number used to determine a variable pattern command to be described later.
In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, a hardware random number built into the main control board 100 is used as the above-mentioned win/fail random number. This random number is updated according to a certain rule, and the random number sequence is automatically changed each time the random number sequence goes around, and the start value is changed each time the system is reset.
Further, the variation pattern command is for determining a pattern (variation time, manner) of a variation performance that can notify the result of the winning lottery. The random numbers used to determine the fluctuation pattern command are not limited to those mentioned above, and for example, other random numbers may be used in addition to this random number.

Then, when a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 or the second starting winning hole 16, a random value is acquired for each of the above-mentioned random numbers, and each random value is stored in the reserved storage area of the main RAM 103. It looks like this.
This reserved storage area stores each random number value (hereinafter referred to as the first special pattern random number) of the random number related to the win/fail lottery and the determination of special symbols, which are obtained by entering the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15. and each random number (hereinafter referred to as the second special symbol) obtained by entering a game ball into the second starting winning hole 16 for determining the winning/losing lottery and special symbols. The second reserved storage area is for storing random numbers (referred to as random numbers). Each of these reserved storage areas is composed of a total of four storage sections, from the first storage section to the fourth storage section, and stores a total of 4 sets of first special pattern random numbers and a total of 4 sets of second special pattern random numbers. Sets can be stored.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15, the first special figure random number is stored in order from the first storage part of the first reservation storage area. It has become. For example, if a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15 in a state where the first special figure random number is not stored in any of the storage units of the first reservation storage area, the game ball is acquired using this as an opportunity. The first special figure random number is stored in the first storage section of the first reservation storage area. In addition, when a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15 in a state where the first special figure random number is stored in the first storage part of the first reservation storage area, the game ball is acquired using this as an opportunity. The first special figure random number is stored in the second storage section of the first reservation storage area. In addition, when a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15 in a state where the first special figure random number is stored in the first storage part and the second storage part of the first reservation storage area, this The first special figure random number acquired at this opportunity is stored in the third storage section of the first reservation storage area. In addition, when a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15 in a state where the first special figure random number is stored in the first storage part to the third storage part of the first reservation storage area, this The first special figure random number obtained at this moment is stored in the fourth storage section of the first reservation storage area. Then, when a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15 in a state where the first special figure random number is stored in the first to fourth storage parts of the first reservation storage area, this input The first special figure random number related to the ball is not stored.

Similarly, when a game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16, the second special figure random number is stored in order from the first storage part of the second reservation storage area. The specific storage process is the same as the storage of the first special figure random number described above, so the explanation will be omitted.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the number of sets of first special figure random numbers (hereinafter referred to as the first pending number) stored in the first pending storage area is determined by the first pending number counter (not particularly shown in the figure). The number of sets of second special drawing random numbers (hereinafter referred to as the second reservation number) stored in the second reservation storage area is stored in the second reservation number counter (not particularly shown). It is meant to be remembered.
In addition, in this specification, as mentioned above, the storage of the first special figure random number and the second special figure random number in the reservation storage area is also referred to as "retention" or "reservation storage", and also, the first reservation The number and the second pending number are also simply referred to as the "reserved number."

The pachinko machine P according to this embodiment includes a random number determination table 110 for determining the result of a lottery, a special symbol random number determination table 111 for determining the type of special symbol, and a random number determination table 111 for determining the type of special symbol. The special electric accessory operation table 112 is used to control the special game and the small win game that is executed when a small win is won. A game state setting table 113 for setting the game state after the end of the special game (after the time-saving symbol is determined to set the time-saving game state), and a fluctuation pattern command for determining the fluctuation pattern command. It has a pattern table 114.
Note that the tables related to the lottery, etc. are not limited to these, and if it is necessary to make judgments or decisions based on random numbers, other tables may be provided as appropriate.

The win/fail random number determination table 110 is for determining the result of the win/fail lottery (big win win, small win win, time saving grant win, or loss), and can be roughly divided into win/fail random numbers that are referred to in a low probability gaming state. It includes a random number determination table 110 (hereinafter referred to as table A) and a win/fail random number determination table 110 (hereinafter referred to as table B) that is referred to in the high probability gaming state. Further, as shown in FIGS. 6 to 11, Table A and Table B each have six types corresponding to the setting values being set.

Specifically, table A includes table A1 that is referenced when the set value is "1", table A2 that is referenced when the set value is "2", and table A2 that is referenced when the set value is "3". Table A3 is referenced when the setting value is "4", Table A5 is referenced when the setting value is "5", and Table A5 is referenced when the setting value is "6". A table A6 is provided which is referred to in case of the above.
Table B includes table B1 that is referenced when the setting value is "1", table B2 that is referenced when the setting value is "2", and table B2 that is referenced when the setting value is "3". B3, table B4 that is referenced when the set value is "4", table B5 that is referenced when the set value is "5", and table that is referenced when the set value is "6". B6 is provided.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 or the second starting winning hole 16, one win/fail random number within the numerical range of 0 to 65535 is obtained. Then, one of the above-mentioned winning/losing random number determination tables 110 is selected depending on the setting value set in the pachinko machine P and the gaming state at the time of performing the winning/losing lottery, and the obtained winning/losing random number is selected. The result of the lottery is determined based on the random number determination table 110.

As shown in FIG. 6(a), according to table A1, if the random numbers are between 1000 and 1373, it is determined that the jackpot has been won, and when the random numbers are between 2000 and 3309, it is determined that the small win has been won. If the random number is between 3310 and 3964, it will be determined that you have won the time saving award, and if the random number is any other number (0 to 999, 1374 to 1999, 3965 to 65535), it will be determined that you lost. . Therefore, in this table A1, the probability of winning a jackpot is about 1/175, the probability of winning a small win is about 1/50, and the probability of winning a time-saving award is about 1/100.

As shown in FIG. 7(a), according to table A2, when the random numbers are between 1000 and 1384, it is determined that a jackpot has been won, and when the random numbers are between 2000 and 3309, it is determined that a small win has been won. If the random number is between 3310 and 3964, it will be determined that you have won the time saving award, and if the random number is any other number (0 to 999, 1385 to 1999, 3965 to 65535), it will be determined that you lost. . Therefore, in this table A2, the probability of winning a jackpot is about 1/170, the probability of winning a small win is about 1/50, and the probability of winning a time-saving award is about 1/100.

As shown in FIG. 8(a), according to table A3, if the random numbers are between 1000 and 1396, it is determined that the jackpot has been won, and when the random numbers are between 2000 and 3309, it is determined that the small win has been won. If the random number is between 3310 and 3964, it will be determined that you have won the time saving award, and if the random number is any other number (0 to 999, 1397 to 1999, 3965 to 65535), it will be determined that you lost. . Therefore, in this table A3, the probability of winning a jackpot is about 1/165, the probability of winning a small win is about 1/50, and the probability of winning a time-saving award is about 1/100.

As shown in FIG. 9(a), according to table A4, if the random numbers are between 1000 and 1408, it is determined that the jackpot has been won, and when the random numbers are between 2000 and 3309, it is determined that the small win has been won. If the winning random number is between 3310 and 3964, it will be determined that you have won the time-saving award, and if the winning random number is any other random number (0-999, 1409-1999, 3965-65535), it will be determined that you lost. . Therefore, in this table A4, the probability of winning a jackpot is about 1/160, the probability of winning a small win is about 1/50, and the probability of winning a time saving award is about 1/100.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), according to table A5, when the random numbers are between 1000 and 1421, it is determined that a jackpot has been won, and when the random numbers are between 2000 and 3309, it is determined that a small win has been won. If the random number is between 3310 and 3964, it will be determined that you have won the time saving award, and if the random number is any other number (0 to 999, 1422 to 1999, 3965 to 65535), it will be determined that you lost. . Therefore, in this table A5, the probability of winning a jackpot is about 1/155, the probability of winning a small win is about 1/50, and the probability of winning a time-saving award is about 1/100.

As shown in FIG. 11(a), according to table A6, when the random numbers are between 1000 and 1434, it is determined that a jackpot has been won, and when the random numbers are between 2000 and 3309, it is determined that a small win has been won. If the random number is between 3310 and 3964, it will be determined that you have won the time saving award, and if the random number is any other number (0 to 999, 1435 to 1999, 3965 to 65535), it will be determined that you lost. . Therefore, in this table A6, the probability of winning a jackpot is about 1/150, the probability of winning a small win is about 1/50, and the probability of winning a time saving award is about 1/100.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 6(b), according to table B1, when the winning/losing random number is between 1000 and 1484, it is determined that a jackpot has been won, and when the winning/losing random number is between 2000 and 3309, it is determined that a small winning has been won. It is determined that the winner is a winner, and if it is a random number other than these (0 to 999, 1485 to 1999, 3310 to 65535), it is determined to be a loss. Therefore, in this table B1, the probability of winning a jackpot is approximately 1/135, and the probability of winning a small prize is approximately 1/50.

As shown in FIG. 7(b), according to table B2, if the random numbers are between 1000 and 1503, it is determined that a jackpot has been won, and when the random numbers are between 2000 and 3309, it is determined that a small win has been won. If it is a random number other than these (0 to 999, 1504 to 1999, 3310 to 65535), it is determined to be a loss. Therefore, in this table B2, the probability of winning a jackpot is approximately 1/130, and the probability of winning a small prize is approximately 1/50.

As shown in FIG. 8(b), according to table B3, when the random numbers are between 1000 and 1523, it is determined that a jackpot has been won, and when the random numbers are between 2000 and 3309, it is determined that a small win has been won. If it is a random number other than these (0 to 999, 1524 to 1999, 3310 to 65535), it is determined to be a loss. Therefore, in this table B3, the probability of winning a jackpot is approximately 1/125, and the probability of winning a small prize is approximately 1/50.

As shown in FIG. 9(b), according to table B4, if the random numbers are between 1000 and 1545, it is determined that the jackpot has been won, and when the random numbers are between 2000 and 3309, it is determined that the small win has been won. If it is a random number other than these (0 to 999, 1546 to 1999, 3310 to 65535), it is determined to be a loss. Therefore, in this table B4, the probability of winning the jackpot is approximately 1/120, and the probability of winning the small prize is approximately 1/50.

As shown in FIG. 10(b), according to table B5, if the random numbers are between 1000 and 1568, it is determined that a jackpot has been won, and when the random numbers are between 2000 and 3309, it is determined that a small win has been won. If it is a random number other than these (0 to 999, 1569 to 1999, 3310 to 65535), it is determined to be a loss. Therefore, the probability of winning a jackpot in this table B5 is approximately 1/115, and the probability of winning a small winning is approximately 1/50.

As shown in FIG. 11(b), according to table B6, if the random numbers are between 1000 and 1594, it is determined that the jackpot has been won, and when the random numbers are between 2000 and 3309, it is determined that the small win has been won. If it is a random number other than these (0 to 999, 1595 to 1999, 3310 to 65535), it is determined to be a loss. Therefore, the probability of winning a jackpot in this table B6 is approximately 1/110, and the probability of winning a small winning is approximately 1/50.

As described above, the win/fail random number determination table 110 referenced in the high probability gaming state and the win/fail random number determination table 110 referenced in the low probability gaming state (for example, table A1 and table B1) have the same associated setting values. etc.), the win/fail random number determination table 110 referenced in the high probability gaming state is set so that the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than the win/fail random number determination table 110 referenced in the low probability gaming state. ing.
In addition, the numerical range of the winning/losing random number that is determined to be a jackpot in the winning/losing random number determination table 110 that is referred to in the low probability game state is a high probability game that is associated with the same setting value as the winning/losing random number determining table 110. are included in the numerical range of the random numbers that are determined to be winning the jackpot in the random number determination table 110 referenced in the state (specifically, the lower limit values in the numerical range that are determined to be winning the jackpot are the same, and (the upper limit values are different). In other words, the random number that is determined to be a jackpot in the winning random number determination table 110 that is referenced in the low probability gaming state is the same as the winning random number determining table 110 that is referenced in the high probability gaming state and is associated with the same setting value. However, it was determined that he had won the jackpot.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, as described above, the lower limit value in the numerical range of the random number that is determined to be a jackpot winning is set to be the same, and the upper limit value is set to be different. However, the upper limit values may be the same and the lower limit values may be different.

In addition, in both tables, the numerical range of the random number that is determined to be a small win is outside the numerical range of the random number that is determined to be a jackpot, and the upper and lower limits of the numerical range are the same. Therefore, the probability of winning a small win is set to be the same. That is, regardless of the set value and the gaming state (high probability gaming state, low probability gaming state), it is determined that a small win is won with the same probability.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, it is possible to win a small win in the lottery based on either the first special figure random number or the second special figure random number, but it is not limited to this. It may be set so that it is possible to win a small hit only in the lottery based on the first special random number, or it may be set so that it is possible to win the small prize only in the lottery based on the second special random number. Good too.

In addition, the random number determination tables 110 (table A1, table A2, table A3, table A4, table A5, and table A6) referred to in the low probability gaming state all contain the numerical values of the random numbers that are determined to be the winning of the time-saving award. The range is set so that the upper and lower limits of the numerical range are the same, outside the numerical range of the random numbers that are determined to be winning the jackpot, and as a result, the probability of winning the time-saving award is the same. It is set so that Therefore, during the normal gaming state, regardless of the set value that has been set, it will be determined that the time saving award has been won with the same probability.
As mentioned above, since the determination of the validity of the time saving grant is not made in the lottery in game states other than the normal game state, the validity random number determination table 110 (table B1, table B2, table B2, Table B3, Table B4, Table B5, and Table B6) are not provided with a numerical value area in which winning of the time saving grant is determined. Therefore, during the high-probability gaming state, it is never determined that the time-saving award has been won.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the numerical range in which it is determined that a jackpot win, the numerical range that is determined as a small win, and the numerical range that is determined as a time saving award are all continuous. Although it is configured by a range of numerical values, it is not limited to this, and may be configured by a discontinuous range of numerical values that includes a numerical value that is a loss in between.

The special symbol random number determination table 111 is for determining the type of special symbol, and as shown in FIGS. It includes a first starting winning hole determination table 111a that is referred to, and a second starting winning hole determining table 111b that is referred to when a win/fail lottery is performed using a second special drawing random number.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 or the second starting winning hole 16, one special symbol random number within the numerical value range of 0 to 199 is acquired. Then, when the above-mentioned winning/failure lottery is performed, the special symbol random number determination table of either the first starting winning hole determination table 111a or the second starting winning hole determining table 111b is selected depending on the starting winning hole into which the game ball entered. 111 is selected, and the type of special symbol is determined based on the acquired special symbol random number and the selected special symbol random number determination table 111.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, four types of jackpot symbols (X1, X2, X3, X4) are provided as special symbols (hereinafter also referred to as jackpot symbols) that are determined when a jackpot is won. In addition, two types of small winning symbols (Y1, Y2) are provided as special symbols (hereinafter also referred to as small winning symbols) that are determined in the event of a small winning. Seven types of time-saving symbols (J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6, J7) are provided as special symbols (hereinafter also referred to as time-saving symbols) that are determined in the event of a loss. Two types of losing symbols (Z1, Z2) are provided as special symbols (hereinafter also referred to as losing symbols) determined by.

As shown in FIG. 12(a), according to the first starting winning hole determination table 111a, in the case of winning a jackpot, the jackpot symbol X1 is determined when the special symbol random number is between 0 and 1, A jackpot symbol X2 is determined when the special symbol random number is between 2 and 139, and a jackpot symbol X3 is determined when the special symbol random number is between 140 and 199. That is, in this first starting prize opening determination table 111a, when a jackpot is won, the probability that jackpot symbol X1 will be determined is 1%, the probability that jackpot symbol X2 will be determined is 69%, and the probability that jackpot symbol X3 will be determined. The probability of being determined is 30%.
In addition, in the case of winning a small hit, the small winning symbol Y1 is determined when the special symbol random number is between 0 and 99, and the small winning symbol Y2 is determined when the special symbol random number is between 100 and 199. be done. That is, in this first starting winning hole determination table 111a, when a small winning is won, the probability that the small winning symbol Y1 will be determined and the probability that the small winning symbol Y2 will be determined are both 50%. ing.
In addition, in the case of winning the time saving award, when the special symbol random number is 0 to 99, the time saving symbol J1 is determined, and when the special symbol random number is 100 to 149, the time saving symbol J2 is determined, Time-saving symbol J3 is determined when the special symbol random number is 150-183, time-saving symbol J4 is determined when the special symbol random number is 184-193, and when the special symbol random number is 194-197. The time saving symbol J5 is determined, and when the special symbol random number is 198 to 199, the time saving symbol J6 is determined. That is, in this first starting prize opening determination table 111a, in the case of winning the time-saving award, the probability that the time-saving symbol J1 will be determined is 50%, the probability that the time-saving symbol J2 will be determined is 25%, and the probability that the time-saving symbol J2 will be determined is 25%. The probability that J3 will be determined is 17%, the probability that time-saving symbol J4 will be determined is 5%, the probability that time-saving symbol J5 will be determined is 2%, and the probability that time-saving symbol J6 will be determined is 1%.
In addition, in the case of a loss, a loss pattern Z1 is determined when the special symbol random number is between 0 and 19, and a loss pattern Z2 is determined when the special symbol random number is between 20 and 199. That is, in this first starting winning hole determination table 111a, in the case of a loss, the probability that the losing symbol Z1 is determined is 10%, and the probability that the losing symbol Z2 is determined is 90%.

As shown in FIG. 12(b), according to the second starting winning hole determination table 111b, in the case of winning a jackpot, if the special symbol random number is between 0 and 139, the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, When the special symbol random number is between 140 and 199, jackpot symbol X4 is determined. That is, in this second starting prize opening determination table 111b, when a jackpot is won, the probability that jackpot symbol X1 will be determined is 70%, and the probability that jackpot symbol X4 will be determined is 30%. .
In addition, in the case where the time saving award is won, the time saving symbol J7 is determined when the special symbol random number is between 0 and 199 (that is, no matter what value the special symbol random number is). That is, in this second starting prize opening determination table 111b, when the time saving award is won, the probability that the time saving symbol J7 is determined is 100%.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 12(b), the type of small winning symbol determined in the case of a small winning and the determination probability of that type, and the type and determination probability of the losing symbol determined in the case of a loss. The determination probability of the type is set to the same content as the first starting winning hole determination table 111a.

The special electric accessory operation table 112 is for controlling a special game that is executed when a jackpot is won and a small win game that is executed when a small win is won. It is referred to in order to operate the large prize opening solenoid 18c and the distribution member solenoid 59c during execution of the small winning game. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13(a) to 13(d), the special electric accessory actuation table 112 is a first table that is referred to when a jackpot is won and a jackpot symbol X1 is determined. An operation table 112a, a second operation table 112b that is referred to when winning a jackpot and jackpot symbol X2 is determined, and a third operation table 112b that is referred to when winning a jackpot and determining jackpot symbol X3 or X4. 112c, and a fourth operation table 112d that is referred to when a small winning symbol is won and the small winning symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined.

Specifically, when a jackpot is won and jackpot symbol X1 is determined, a special game is executed with reference to the first operation table 112a shown in FIG. 13(a). According to the first operation table 112a, the game ends when either of the following conditions is met: the grand prize opening 18 is opened for 29.0 seconds or 10 game balls enter the grand prize opening 18. A round game is executed 10 times in total from the 1st round to the 10th round. Furthermore, during the execution of each round game, the opening/closing door 18b is displaced from the closed position to the open position, remains in the open position for 29.0 seconds, and then operates in a manner (opening/closing pattern) in which it is displaced from the open position to the closed position. As a result, the big winning hole 18 is opened only once, and the time during which the big winning hole 18 is closed between each round game (namely, the interval time) is set to 2.0 seconds.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 13(a), when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the distributing member 59 remains at the first position during each round game of the 1st round, 2nd round, 4th round to 10th round. It is designed to operate in a manner (operation pattern) in which it moves (positions). On the other hand, during the three rounds of the round game, the distribution member 59 operates in such a manner that it remains at the second position.

Further, when a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, a special game is executed with reference to the second operation table 112b shown in FIG. 13(b). According to this second operation table 112b, a total of 10 round games are executed from the 1st round to the 10th round, which ends under the same conditions as the above-mentioned first operation table 112a. The opening/closing pattern and interval time of the opening/closing door 18b are also set to the same contents as the first operation table 112a.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 13(b), when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, during each round game of the 1st round, 2nd round, 4th round to 10th round, it is different from the case where the jackpot symbol X1 is determined. Similarly, the distributing member 59 operates in such a manner that it remains at the first position, and furthermore, it operates in such a manner that the distributing member 59 remains at the first position during the three rounds of the round game. It has become.

Further, when a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X3 or X4 is determined, a special game is executed with reference to the third operation table 112c shown in FIG. 13(c). According to this third operation table 112c, a round game that ends under the same conditions as the first operation table 112a and the second operation table 112b described above is executed a total of four times from the 1st round to the 4th round. The opening/closing pattern and interval time of the opening/closing door 18b are set to the same contents as the first operation table 112a and the second operation table 112b.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 13(c), when jackpot symbol X3 or X4 is determined, jackpot symbol X1 and jackpot symbol X2 are determined during each round game of the 1st, 2nd, and 4th round. The distribution member 59 operates in such a manner that it stays at the first position as in the case where the distribution member 59 remains at the first position. It operates in such a manner that the member 59 remains in the first position.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the jackpot 18 is continuously opened for 29.0 seconds in three rounds of the round game (specific round game). Since it is released and the distribution member 59 remains at the second position, as long as the game balls are launched toward the second game area 12b, the game balls will enter the grand prize opening 18 and the predetermined number of balls will be reliably received. The game ball can be allowed to enter a specific area 57.
On the other hand, when jackpot symbol X2, X3 or Therefore, even if a game ball enters the big prize opening 18, all of the game balls enter the general area 58, and it is impossible for the game ball to enter the specific area 57.

Further, when the small winning is won and the small winning symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, the small winning game is executed with reference to the fourth operation table 112d shown in FIG. 13(d). According to this fourth operation table 112d, the grand prize opening 18 is opened once for 0.05 seconds, and when 10 game balls enter while the first grand prize opening 18 is open, the grand prize opening 18 will be closed.
Further, as shown in FIG. 13(d), during the small winning game, the distribution member 59 operates in a manner that it is first stopped.
In this way, in the small winning game, the big winning hole 18 is opened for only 0.05 seconds, so it is almost impossible to enter the game ball into the big winning hole 18. In addition, since the distribution member 50 stays at the first position during the small winning game, even if a game ball enters the big prize opening 18, the game ball will enter the general area 58 and the game ball will be transferred to the specific area. It is now impossible to enter 57.

The game state setting table 113 shows the game state after the end of the special game when the special game is executed, and the time-saving symbols J1, J2, J3, J4, which become the winning time-saving grant in the winning/fail lottery during the normal game state. This is for setting the gaming state after J5, J6 or J7 is determined.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a special game is executed, the type of the jackpot symbol determined at the time of the jackpot that triggered the execution of the special game, and the type of the jackpot symbol that is set in the specific area 57 during the special game. The game state after the end of the special game is set depending on whether or not a number of game balls (one in this embodiment) have entered the game ball. In addition, if a time-saving symbol J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6, or J7 is selected as a winning time-saving symbol in the lottery during the normal gaming state, the game state specified for each time-saving symbol will be set. It is now possible to do so. Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, whether or not the game ball can enter the specific area 57 is set in accordance with the type of the determined jackpot symbol, and in effect, it is determined whether or not the game ball can enter the specific area 57. Depending on the jackpot symbol, it is determined whether or not to shift to the high probability time saving game state after the special game based on the determination is completed.

Here, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, after winning a jackpot in the low probability time-saving gaming state and shifting to the high probability gaming state, the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment continues to play in the high probability gaming state without shifting to the low probability gaming state. The jackpot symbol associated with the setting is determined, and the number of times the jackpot symbol is determined consecutively (hereinafter referred to as the number of consecutive high accuracy settings) reaches a predetermined upper limit number (10,000 times in this embodiment). Sometimes, after the end of a special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol, a low probability game state is forcibly set. In other words, if the above-mentioned jackpot symbols are determined consecutively up to the upper limit number of times without transitioning to the low-probability game state while executing the special game, after the special game based on the determination ends, the high-probability game state will be entered. A low probability gaming state is forcibly set even when the conditions for setting are met.
Similarly, after winning a jackpot in the non-time-saving gaming state and transitioning to the time-saving gaming state (in this embodiment, the second time-saving gaming state), the time-saving gaming state is continuously set without shifting to the non-time-saving gaming state. When the jackpot symbol associated with is determined, and the number of times the jackpot symbol has been determined consecutively (hereinafter referred to as the consecutive time saving setting number) reaches a predetermined upper limit number (10,000 times in this embodiment), After the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol ends, a non-time-saving game state is forcibly set. That is, if the above-mentioned jackpot symbols are determined consecutively up to the upper limit number of times without transitioning to the non-time-saving game state through the execution of the special game, after the special game based on the determination ends, the time-saving game state will be changed. Even when the set conditions are met, a non-time-saving gaming state is forcibly set.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, considering the set probability of winning a jackpot and the probability of determining each jackpot symbol, it is unlikely that the number of consecutive high accuracy settings and the number of consecutive time shortening settings will reach 10,000. First, essentially, the high probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state will continue until the conditions for setting the low probability gaming state and the conditions for setting the non time saving gaming state are met.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 14(a) to (j), the jackpot symbol X1 is determined as the game state setting table 113, and a predetermined number of game balls are thrown into the specific area 57 during the special game. The first game state setting table 113a is referred to when entering the game, and the second game is referred to when the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined and a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57 during the special game. The state setting table 113b, the third game state setting table 113c that is referred to when the jackpot symbol X4 is determined and a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57 during the special game, and the win/fail status during the normal game state. The fourth game state setting table 113d is referred to when the time saving symbol J1 is determined due to the winning of the time saving grant in the lottery, and the fourth game state setting table 113d is referred to when the time saving grant is won and the time saving symbol J2 is determined in the win/fail lottery during the normal gaming state. The fifth gaming state setting table 113e that is referred to, the sixth gaming state setting table 113f that is referred to when the time saving symbol J3 is determined due to the winning of the time saving award in the lottery during the normal gaming state, and the sixth gaming state setting table 113f that is referred to when the time saving symbol J3 is determined in the lottery during the normal gaming state. The seventh game state setting table 113g is referred to when the time-saving symbol J4 is determined as a time-saving symbol J4 is determined in the winning lottery in the normal gaming state, and the time-saving symbol J5 is determined as the time-saving symbol J5 is determined in the winning lottery in the normal gaming state. 8th game state setting table 113h that is referred to when the normal game state is in the normal game state, the 9th game state setting table 113i that is referenced when the time saving symbol J6 is determined due to the winning of the time saving award in the lottery during the normal game state, A tenth game state setting table 113j is provided which is referred to when the time saving symbol J7 is determined as a time saving award is won in the winning/fail lottery during the state.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14(a), when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined and a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57 during the special game, the number of consecutive high accuracy settings is predetermined. When the upper limit number of times has not been reached, the game state after the end of the special game is set to a high probability game state, and the number of continuations of the high probability game state (hereinafter referred to as the high probability number of times) is set to 10,000 times. Along with this, when the number of consecutive time saving settings has not reached the predetermined upper limit number of times, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the second time saving game state, and the number of time saving times is set to 10,000 times. Ru.
In other words, in the above case, if the number of consecutive high accuracy settings and the number of consecutive time reduction settings have not reached the upper limit number of times, after the end of the special game, the results of the winning lottery will be derived 10,000 times without winning the jackpot. The high-probability game state and the second time-saving game state (that is, the high-probability time-saving game state) continue until. As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability gaming state is approximately 1/110 to 1/135, so in reality, it is possible to win the jackpot again. Until then, the high probability time saving gaming state will continue.

On the other hand, in the above case, when the number of consecutive high probability settings has reached the predetermined upper limit, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the low probability gaming state, and the continuous time is shortened. When the set number of times has reached the predetermined upper limit number of times, the game state after the end of the special game is set to a non-time-saving game state.

As mentioned above, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the sorting member 59 stays at the second position during three rounds in the special game, so as long as the game ball is launched into the second game area 12b. A predetermined number of game balls always enter the specific area 57. That is, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, as long as the game ball is launched into the second game area 12b, the high probability time-saving game state will be reliably set.
Although not particularly shown, if a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57 during the special game even though the jackpot symbol X1 has been determined, the game state after the end of the special game will change. , are set to a low probability time-saving gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state (that is, a normal gaming state).

As shown in FIG. 14(b), if the jackpot symbol X2 or The probability time saving game state is set. Along with this, when the number of consecutive time saving settings has not reached the predetermined upper limit number of times, and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot was the time saving gaming state (i.e., the first time saving gaming state), The game state after the end of the special game is set to the second time saving game state, and the number of time saving times is set to 10,000 times.
In other words, in the above case, if the number of consecutive time saving settings has not reached the upper limit and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time saving gaming state, the result of the lottery will be changed without winning the jackpot. The low probability gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state (that is, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state) continue until the game is derived 10,000 times. As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability gaming state is approximately 1/150 to 1/175, so in reality, it is possible to win the jackpot again. The second low-probability time-saving gaming state will continue until then.

On the other hand, in the above case, if the number of consecutive time-saving settings has not reached the predetermined upper limit and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot was a non-time-saving gaming state, the special game The gaming state after the end is set to a non-time saving gaming state. Similarly, even when the number of consecutive time saving settings has reached the predetermined upper limit number of times, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the non-time saving gaming state. That is, in any case, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to a low probability gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state (namely, a normal gaming state).

As mentioned above, when the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined, the sorting member 59 stays at the first position during three rounds in the special game, so a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57. Never. That is, when the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined, either the second low probability time saving gaming state or the normal gaming state will be set.

As shown in FIG. 14(c), if the jackpot symbol X4 is determined and a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57 during the special game, the game state after the special game ends is low probability time saving. Set to gaming state. Along with this, when the number of consecutive time saving settings has not reached the predetermined upper limit number of times, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the second time saving game state, and the number of time saving times is set to 100 times. Ru.
That is, in the above case, when the number of consecutive time saving settings has not reached the upper limit number of times, the low probability gaming state and the second time saving gaming state are maintained until the results of the winning lottery are derived 100 times without winning a jackpot. (That is, the second low probability time saving game state) continues.

On the other hand, in the above case, when the number of consecutive time saving settings has reached the predetermined upper limit number of times, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the non-time saving gaming state. That is, at this time, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to a low probability gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state (namely, a normal gaming state).

As mentioned above, when the jackpot symbol X4 is determined, the distribution member 59 stays at the first position during three rounds in the special game, so it is impossible for a predetermined number of game balls to enter the specific area 57. do not have. That is, when the jackpot symbol X4 is determined, either the second low probability time saving gaming state or the normal gaming state will be set.

As shown in FIG. 14(d), when the time-saving symbol J1 is determined as a time-saving award is won in the winning/fail lottery during the normal gaming state, the gaming state after the determination is changed to the low-probability gaming state without changing. The first time saving game state is set, and the number of time saving times is set to 10 times. That is, in this case, the low probability game state and the first time-saving game state (namely, the first low-probability time-saving game state) continue until the result of the winning lottery is derived 10 times without winning a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 14(e), when the time-saving symbol J2 is determined as a time-saving award is won in the lottery during the normal gaming state, the gaming state after the determination is changed to the low-probability gaming state without changing. The first time saving game state is set, and the number of time saving times is set to 20. That is, in this case, the low probability game state and the first time-saving game state (first low-probability time-saving game state) continue until the result of the winning lottery is derived 20 times without winning a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 14(f), when the time-saving symbol J3 is determined as a time-saving award is won in the win/fail lottery during the normal gaming state, the gaming state after the determination is changed to the low-probability gaming state without changing. The first time saving game state is set, and the number of time saving times is set to 30 times. That is, in this case, the low probability game state and the first time-saving game state (first low-probability time-saving game state) continue until the result of the winning lottery is derived 30 times without winning a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 14(g), when the time-saving symbol J4 is determined as a time-saving award is won in the winning/fail lottery during the normal gaming state, the gaming state after the determination is changed to the low-probability gaming state without changing. The first time saving game state is set, and the number of time saving times is set to 50. That is, in this case, the low probability gaming state and the first time saving gaming state (first low probability time saving gaming state) continue until the result of the winning lottery is derived 50 times without winning a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 14(h), if the time-saving symbol J5 is determined as a time-saving award is won in the winning/fail lottery during the normal gaming state, the gaming state after the determination is changed to the low-probability gaming state without changing. The first time saving game state is set, and the number of time saving times is set to 100 times. That is, in this case, the low probability game state and the first time-saving game state (first low-probability time-saving game state) continue until the result of the winning lottery is derived 100 times without winning a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 14(i), when the time-saving symbol J6 is determined as a time-saving award is won in the winning/fail lottery during the normal gaming state, the gaming state after the determination is changed to the low-probability gaming state without changing. The first time saving game state is set, and the number of time saving times is set to 1000 times. That is, in this case, the low probability gaming state and the first time saving gaming state (first low probability time saving gaming state) continue until the result of the winning lottery is derived 1000 times without winning a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 14(j), when the time-saving symbol J7 is determined as a time-saving award is won in the winning/fail lottery during the normal gaming state, the gaming state after the determination remains the low-probability gaming state. The first time saving game state is set, and the number of time saving times is set to one. That is, in this case, the low probability game state and the first time-saving game state (first low-probability time-saving game state) continue until the result of the winning lottery is derived once without winning the jackpot.

In addition, when time-saving symbols J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6, or J7 are determined as described above, after the variation of the special symbol (time-saving symbol) stops (the variation of the next special symbol starts) ), the above-mentioned first low probability time saving gaming state is set.

The variation pattern table 114 is for determining variation pattern commands, as described above.
In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when the special symbols are determined as described above, a variable pattern command is determined based on the result of the determination. As mentioned above, the variation pattern command is for determining the variation pattern of the variation performance, and the variation pattern command determines the mode of the variation performance and the variation time (the variation time of the variation display of the special symbol). In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the variable performance is divided into the first half and the second half, and the mode and variation time of the first half of the variable production, and the mode and variation time of the second half of the variable production, are different from each other. is also determined by the variation pattern command.
Specifically, the determined variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 300, and the sub-control board 300 determines the specific aspect of the variation performance (for example, based on the received variation pattern command). , an image, etc. to be displayed on the display section 21a).

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, a plurality of types of variable pattern commands are provided, and each variable pattern command is associated with the variable pattern table 114. For each variation pattern table 114, types and determination ratios of variation pattern commands to be determined are set.

The pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment has a variable pattern table 114 in which the game ball is placed in the first starting prize opening 15 during the normal gaming state or during the first low probability time-saving gaming state (that is, during left-handed hitting). Table A is referred to when the ball enters the second starting winning slot 16 when the game ball is in the second low probability time saving game state or the high probability time saving game state (that is, while hitting right hand). It includes a table B and a table C that are referred to when a ball enters the ball (see FIG. 15).

Here, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, after winning a jackpot in the normal gaming state or the first low probability time saving gaming state and shifting to at least one of the second time saving gaming state or the high probability gaming state, A jackpot that is won consecutively without transitioning to the normal gaming state or the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (from the so-called first win, while at least one of the second time-saving gaming state or the high-probability gaming state continues) If the consecutive jackpot number condition that the number of consecutive jackpot wins (hereinafter referred to as consecutive jackpots) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3 times, etc.) is not met, Table B is referred to and the consecutive jackpot number condition is determined. Table C is referenced when the following holds true.

Then, when a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 or the second starting winning hole 16, one fluctuating pattern random number within the numerical range of 0 to 249 is acquired, and this acquired fluctuating pattern random number and, The special symbol determined as described above, the current number of reservations (first number of reservations or second number of reservations), the current gaming state, and the number of consecutive jackpots conditions described above (the number of consecutive jackpots must reach a predetermined number) ) A variation pattern command is determined based on the variation pattern table 114 depending on the success or failure of the establishment of the variation pattern command.

Although not particularly shown, the fluctuation pattern table 114 includes cases where a game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16 during the normal gaming state or the first low probability time saving gaming state, It also includes a table that is referred to when a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 during a low probability time saving game state or a high probability time saving game state. However, as long as the instruction to launch the game ball is followed on the performance display device 21, the game ball will only enter the first starting prize opening 15 during the normal game state or the first low probability time saving game state. During the second low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state, the game ball enters only into the second starting prize opening 16. Therefore, the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning hole 16 during the normal gaming state or the first low probability time saving gaming state, or the first starting during the second low probability time saving gaming state or the high probability time saving gaming state. The entry of the game ball into the prize opening 15 is irregular, and in the following, such irregular entry will not be considered. The explanation will be given assuming that a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15, and a gaming ball enters the second starting winning hole 16 during the second low probability time saving game state or the high probability time saving gaming state.

Then, when determining the variable pattern command with reference to table A (when determining the variable pattern command based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15), the first pending number at the time is referenced. On the other hand, when determining the variable pattern command with reference to table B or table C (when determining the variable pattern command based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning hole 16), the relevant The second pending number at the time is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 15(a), according to table A, if the losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined (that is, the result of the lottery is a loss), and the current first pending number is 0 or 1. , when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 209, a fluctuation pattern called "13 seconds fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first half is set to 0 seconds and the fluctuation time of the second half is set to 13 seconds) is associated. When the fluctuation pattern command "00H" is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is between 210 and 229, a fluctuation pattern of "20 seconds fluctuation" (the first half fluctuation time is 13 seconds, the second half fluctuation time is 7 seconds) is determined. When the fluctuation pattern command "01H" associated with the fluctuation pattern set to "45 seconds fluctuation" is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is between 230 and 239, If the fluctuation pattern command "02H" is associated with a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time in the second half is set to 25 seconds, and the fluctuation pattern random number is between 240 and 249, it is called "60 seconds fluctuation". A variation pattern command "03H" associated with a variation pattern (a variation pattern in which the variation time in the first half is set to 20 seconds and the variation time in the second half is set to 40 seconds) is determined.

In addition, when losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined and the current first pending number is 2 or more, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 209, the fluctuation pattern "3 seconds fluctuation" (first half fluctuation When the fluctuation pattern command "04H" is associated with a fluctuation pattern in which the time is 0 seconds and the fluctuation time in the second half is set to 3 seconds, and the fluctuation pattern random number is between 210 and 229, the command "20 seconds" is determined. When the fluctuation pattern command "01H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "fluctuation" is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is between 230 and 239, the fluctuation pattern command "02H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "45 seconds fluctuation" is determined. " is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is between 240 and 249, the fluctuation pattern command "03H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds fluctuation" is determined.

In addition, when the time saving symbol J1 is determined, regardless of the current first pending number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 9, a fluctuation pattern of "18 seconds fluctuation" (the fluctuation time of the first half is 0 seconds) , a variation pattern in which the variation time in the second half is set to 18 seconds) is determined, and the variation pattern command "BAH" associated with the variation pattern command "BAH" is determined, and when the variation pattern random number is 10 to 249, the variation of "60 seconds variation" is determined. A variable pattern command "B3H" with which the pattern is associated is determined.
In addition, when the time saving symbol J2 is determined, regardless of the current first pending number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 9, a fluctuation pattern of "30 seconds fluctuation" (the fluctuation time of the first half is 0 seconds) , the fluctuation pattern with the latter half of the fluctuation time set to 30 seconds) is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern command "BBH" is associated, and the fluctuation pattern random number is between 10 and 249, the fluctuation of "60 seconds fluctuation" is determined. A variable pattern command "B4H" with which the pattern is associated is determined.
In addition, when the time saving symbol J3 is determined, regardless of the current first pending number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 9, a fluctuation pattern of "36 seconds fluctuation" (the fluctuation time of the first half is 0 seconds) , a variation pattern in which the variation time in the second half is set to 36 seconds) is determined, and when the variation pattern command "BCH" is associated with a variation pattern random number of 10 to 249, a variation of "60 seconds variation" is determined. A variable pattern command "B5H" with which the pattern is associated is determined.

In addition, when the time saving symbol J4 is determined, regardless of the current first pending number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 9, a fluctuation pattern of "46 seconds fluctuation" (the fluctuation time of the first half is 0 seconds) , a variation pattern in which the variation time in the second half is set to 46 seconds) is determined, and when the variation pattern command "BDH" is associated with a variation pattern random number of 10 to 249, a variation of "60 seconds variation" is determined. A variable pattern command "B6H" with which the pattern is associated is determined.
In addition, when the time saving symbol J5 is determined, regardless of the current first pending number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 9, a fluctuation pattern of "66 seconds fluctuation" (the fluctuation time of the first half is 0 seconds) , the fluctuation pattern with the latter half of the fluctuation time set to 66 seconds) is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern command "BEH" is associated with the fluctuation pattern random number is between 10 and 249, the fluctuation of "60 seconds fluctuation" is determined. A variable pattern command "B7H" with which the pattern is associated is determined.
In addition, when the time-saving symbol J6 is determined, regardless of the current first pending number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 9, a fluctuation pattern of "68 seconds fluctuation" (the fluctuation time of the first half is 0 seconds) , the fluctuation pattern with the latter half of the fluctuation time set to 68 seconds) is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern command "BFH" is associated with the fluctuation pattern random number between 10 and 249, the fluctuation of "60 seconds fluctuation" is determined. A variable pattern command "B8H" with which the pattern is associated is determined.
In addition, when the time saving symbol J7 is determined, regardless of the current first pending number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is between 0 and 249 (regardless of which value the fluctuation pattern random number is), the "60 seconds fluctuation" A variation pattern command "B9H" with which the variation pattern is associated is determined.

In addition, when the small winning symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined (that is, the result of the lottery is a small winning), the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 124, regardless of the current first reservation number. When the fluctuation pattern command "22H" was associated with the fluctuation pattern of "45 seconds fluctuation", the fluctuation pattern command "22H" was determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number was between 125 and 249, the fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds fluctuation" was associated. A variation pattern command "23H" is determined.

In addition, when the jackpot symbol X1, X2, or X3 is determined (that is, the result of the lottery is a jackpot win), the fluctuation pattern random number is between 0 and 124, regardless of the current first pending number. When the fluctuation pattern command "A2H" was associated with the fluctuation pattern of "45 seconds fluctuation", the fluctuation pattern command "A2H" was determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number was between 125 and 249, the fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds fluctuation" was associated with it. A variation pattern command "A3H" is determined.

As shown in FIG. 15(b), according to table B, when losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined and the current second pending number is 0 or 1, the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 209. When the fluctuation pattern command "00H" was associated with the fluctuation pattern of "13 seconds fluctuation", the fluctuation pattern command "00H" was determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number was between 210 and 239, the fluctuation pattern of "45 seconds fluctuation" was associated with it. The variation pattern command "02H" is determined, and when the variation pattern random number is between 240 and 249, the variation pattern command "03H" associated with the variation pattern of "60 seconds variation" is determined.

In addition, when the losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined and the current second pending number is 2 or more, the fluctuation pattern of "3 seconds fluctuation" is associated when the fluctuation pattern random number is between 0 and 209. When the fluctuation pattern command "04H" is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is 210 to 239, the fluctuation pattern command "02H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "45 seconds fluctuation" is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is 240. ˜249, a variation pattern command “03H” associated with a variation pattern of “60 seconds variation” is determined.

In addition, when the small winning symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, regardless of the current second pending number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 124, the fluctuation pattern of "45 seconds fluctuation" is associated with the fluctuation pattern. When the pattern command "22H" is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is between 125 and 249, the fluctuation pattern command "23H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds fluctuation" is determined.

Also, when jackpot symbol X1 or When the command "A2H" is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is between 125 and 249, the fluctuation pattern command "A3H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds fluctuation" is determined.

As shown in FIG. 15(c), according to table C, when losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined and the current second pending number is 0 or 1, the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 209. At this time, a variation pattern command "05H" associated with a variation pattern "26 seconds variation" (a variation pattern in which the variation time in the first half is set to 0 seconds and the variation time in the second half is set to 26 seconds) is determined, When the fluctuation pattern random number was between 210 and 239, a fluctuation pattern called "90 seconds fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first half was set to 30 seconds and the fluctuation time of the second half was set to 60 seconds) was associated. When the fluctuation pattern command "06H" is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is between 240 and 249, a fluctuation pattern of "120 seconds fluctuation" (the fluctuation time of the first half is set to 30 seconds and the fluctuation time of the second half is set to 90 seconds) The variation pattern command "07H" associated with the variation pattern) is determined.

In addition, when losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined and the current second pending number is 2 or more, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 209, the fluctuation pattern "6 seconds fluctuation" (first half fluctuation When the fluctuation pattern command "08H" is associated with a fluctuation pattern in which the time is 0 seconds and the fluctuation time in the latter half is set to 6 seconds, and the fluctuation pattern random number is between 210 and 239, the command "90 seconds" is determined. When the fluctuation pattern command "06H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "fluctuation" is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is between 240 and 249, the fluctuation pattern command "07H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "fluctuation of 120 seconds" is determined. ” is determined.

In addition, when the small winning symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, regardless of the current second pending number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 124, the fluctuation pattern of "90 seconds fluctuation" is associated with the fluctuation pattern. When the pattern command "26H" is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is 125 to 249, the fluctuation pattern command "27H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "120 seconds fluctuation" is determined.

In addition, when the jackpot symbol X1 or X4 is determined, regardless of the current second pending number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 124, the fluctuation pattern of "90 seconds fluctuation" is associated with the fluctuation pattern When the command "A6H" is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is 125 to 249, the fluctuation pattern command "A7H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "120 seconds fluctuation" is determined.

In this way, the variation time associated with the variation pattern determined in table C is set to be longer than the variation time associated with the variation pattern determined in table B. That is, in the second low-probability time-saving gaming state and the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the above-mentioned consecutive jackpot number-of-hits condition is satisfied more than before the above-mentioned consecutive jackpot number-of-hits condition is met (before the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number). After that (after the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number), the determination ratio of long fluctuation time is higher.
As a result, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, after the above-mentioned consecutive jackpot number condition is satisfied, the period from winning a jackpot to winning the next jackpot is longer than before the above-mentioned consecutive jackpot number condition is satisfied. This makes it possible to reduce the number of special games played per unit time (the number of jackpot wins per unit time). Therefore, it is necessary to properly prevent the occurrence of situations where the gambling nature becomes extremely high, such as when a large number of special games are executed in a short period of time, and the number of prize balls won by the player increases rapidly. be able to.

The variation pattern command determined as above is sent to the sub-control board 300, and based on the variation pattern command, a specific aspect of the first half of the variation effect and a specific aspect of the second half of the variation effect are determined. Ru. Then, the variation effect is executed according to the specific manner determined in this way, but the total of the first half variation time and the second half variation time set in the variation pattern command is the variation production (special symbol). This is the time from the start to the end of the variable display).
For example, if the determined variation pattern command is "02H" (the first half's variation time is 20 seconds and the second half's variation time is 25 seconds), the first half's variation time and the second half's variation time are The total value of 45 seconds (=20 seconds + 25 seconds) is the variable time of the entire variable performance (the entire variable display of special symbols).
In addition, the first half of the fluctuation pattern commands "00H", "04H", "05H", "08H", "1AH", "1BH", "1CH", "1DH", "1EH", "1FH" ``0 seconds'' is defined as the fluctuation time. When these variation pattern commands are determined, the entire variation effect is executed in a manner determined according to the variation pattern command during the corresponding latter half of the variation time.

Also, based on the above-mentioned variation time, the production display device 21 performs a variable production, and the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device 30 or second special symbol display device 31) displays a special symbol in a variable manner. It will be done.
Specifically, when the starting winning hole into which the game ball enters is the first starting winning hole 15, the first special symbol display device 30 blinks during the above-mentioned variable time, and the game ball enters the starting winning hole. When the starting winning hole is the second starting winning hole 16, the second special symbol display device 31 is displayed blinking during the above-mentioned variable time. Then, after the elapse of the variable time, the determined special symbol is stopped and displayed. Note that, as will be described later, the stop display of this special symbol is performed until a predetermined stop display time has elapsed.

Regarding the aspect of the fluctuating performance, neither the first half of the fluctuating performance nor the second half of the fluctuating performance is determined based on the fluctuating pattern command, but other commands are used in addition to the fluctuating pattern command. At the same time, the mode of the first half of the fluctuating performance may be determined based on one of the commands, and the mode of the second half of the fluctuating performance may be determined based on another command.
Further, instead of dividing the variable performance into a first half and a second half, the variable performance may be divided into more parts, and the mode of each part may be determined based on the corresponding command.

Next, processing related to the general figure game will be explained.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a game ball launched by a firing device (not shown) and flowing down the gaming area 12 passes through the gate 20, the movable piece 16b of the second starting prize opening 16 is actuated. A lottery of normal symbols is performed to determine whether or not to open the movable piece 16b. When a winning result is obtained by drawing this normal symbol, the movable piece 16b opens for a predetermined period of time, and the second starting prize opening 16 becomes open, so that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening 16. It becomes easier.
This normal symbol lottery is based on a winning random number obtained when the game ball passes through the gate 20 and a winning random number determination table 116 stored in the main ROM 102 and used to determine the random number. It will be held.

Then, when the game ball passes through the gate 20, the above-mentioned winning determination random number is obtained, and the random number is stored in the normal figure reservation storage area of the main RAM 103, with an upper limit of four. Specifically, this common map reservation storage area is made up of a total of four storage parts, from a first storage part to a fourth storage part, and the data are stored from the first storage part in the order of passage through the gate 20. It has become. In addition, if the random number that has been determined to be a hit has already been stored in several storage units, the random number that has been determined to be a hit is stored in the storage unit with the smallest number among the empty storage units. Then, even if the game ball passes through the gate 20 when four winning random numbers are already stored in the general pattern reservation storage area, the winning determination random numbers related to this passage will not be stored in the general pattern reservation storage area. .
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, a hardware random number built into the main control board 100 is used as the winning determination random number. This winning determination random number is updated according to a certain rule, and the random number sequence is automatically changed each time the random number sequence goes around, and the starting value is changed every time the system is reset.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the number of winning determination random numbers (hereinafter referred to as the number of reserved figures) stored in the reserved memory area of ordinary figures is determined by the number of reserved figures of ordinary figures (not particularly shown). is stored in the memory.

The winning determination random number determination table 116 is for determining whether or not there is a hit by drawing a normal symbol, and as shown in FIGS. The first determination table 116a is referred to during the normal game state), special game, and small winning game, and the second determination table 116a is referred to during the first time-saving game state (that is, during the first low-probability time-saving game state). It includes a table 116b and a third determination table 116c that is referred to during the second time-saving game state (that is, during the second low-probability time-saving game state or during the high-probability time-saving game state).
In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when a game ball passes through the gate 20, one winning determining random number within the numerical range of 0 to 65535 is obtained. Then, if the gaming state at the time when the normal symbols are drawn is a non-time saving gaming state, or when the normal symbol is drawn during the special game or the small winning game, the first determination table 116a selects Then, a normal symbol lottery is performed based on the acquired winning determination random number and the selected first determination table 116a. Further, if the gaming state at the time of drawing the normal symbol is the first time-saving gaming state, the second determination table 116b is selected, and based on the acquired winning determination random number and the selected second determination table 116b. A drawing of regular symbols will be held. Further, if the gaming state at the time of drawing the normal symbol is the second time-saving gaming state, the third determination table 116c is selected, and based on the acquired winning determination random number and the selected third determination table 116c. A drawing of regular symbols will be held.

As shown in FIG. 16(a), according to the first determination table 116a, a win is determined when the winning random number is 1, and when the winning random number is other than 1 (0, 2 to 65535). It is judged as a failure. Therefore, the probability of winning in this first determination table 116a is 1/65536.
Also, as shown in FIG. 16(b), according to the second determination table 116b, it is determined that it is a win when the winning random number is 1 to 5, and other winning random numbers (0, 6 to 65535) If it is, it is determined that it is a loss. Therefore, the probability of winning in this second determination table 116b is 5/65536.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 16(c), according to the third determination table 116c, it is determined that the winning random number is between 1 and 65500, and it is determined that the winning random number is between 1 and 65500. If it is, it is determined that it is a loss. Therefore, the probability of winning in this third determination table 116c is approximately 99/100.
In addition, if the drawing of normal symbols results in a win, the winning symbol is determined, and if the lottery results in a loss, the losing symbol is determined.

In addition, the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment has a normal symbol variation pattern determination table 117 and a second starting prize opening opening as tables for determining the variation pattern of the normal symbols and controlling the opening and closing of the movable piece 16b. A control table 118 is provided.

The normal symbol variation pattern determination table 117 is for determining the variation pattern of normal symbols. As described above, when a normal symbol is drawn by passing a game ball through the gate 20, the normal symbol variation pattern is determined based on the normal symbol variation pattern determination table 117.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, when the game state is a non-time saving game state, or during a special game or a small winning game, normal symbols with a variable time of 3 seconds are set. When the fluctuation pattern of is determined and the gaming state is the first time saving gaming state, a fluctuation pattern of normal symbols with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is determined, and when the gaming state is the second time saving gaming state , a fluctuation pattern of a normal symbol with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is determined. Then, when the normal symbol variation pattern is determined, the normal symbol display device 32 (see FIG. 3) is displayed blinking during the variation time set to this normal symbol variation pattern. If the drawing of normal symbols results in a win and a winning symbol is determined, the normal symbol display device 32 lights up, and if the lottery results in a loss and a losing symbol is determined, the normal symbol display device 32 lights up. Lights out.
In addition, in this specification, the blinking display of the normal symbol display device 32 is referred to as "normal symbol variation", and the lighting or extinguishing of the normal symbol display device 32 is referred to as "normal symbol stop display" and "stop of normal symbol fluctuation". , "normal symbol fluctuation stop", etc.

In addition, the second starting winning opening control table 118 is referred to in order to control the operation of the movable piece 16b provided in the second starting winning opening 16.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the normal symbol display device 32 lights up, the movable piece 16b of the second starting winning hole 16 opens and closes in a manner determined in the second starting winning hole opening control table 118. ing. Specifically, when the gaming state is a non-time saving gaming state, or during a special game or a small winning game, as shown in FIG. sec x 1 time), the movable piece 16b of the second starting prize opening 16 is opened for 0.05 seconds. In addition, when the gaming state is the first time saving gaming state, as shown in FIG. The movable piece 16b of the prize opening 16 is opened for 0.2 seconds. In addition, when the gaming state is the second time saving gaming state, as shown in FIG. The movable piece 16b of the prize opening 16 is opened for a total of 1.8 seconds.

As mentioned above, the conditions for opening and closing the second starting prize opening 16 are set in the non-time saving gaming state and the working time saving gaming state, respectively, and depending on the contents of these conditions, in the time saving gaming state, the Since the second starting prize opening 16 is easily maintained in the open state, the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 16 more easily than in the non-time saving gaming state.
In addition, in the first time-saving gaming state of the time-saving gaming states, the second starting prize opening 16 is more easily maintained in the open state than in the non-time-saving gaming state, but compared to the second time-saving gaming state of the time-saving gaming states. The second starting prize opening 16 is difficult to maintain in the open state. That is, during the first time-saving game state, it is easier to enter the second starting winning hole 16 than during the non-time-saving gaming state, and during the second time-saving gaming state, it is easier to enter the second starting winning hole 16 than during the first time-saving gaming state. It is now easier to hit the ball to 16. Therefore, during the second time-saving game state, the decrease in game balls as the game progresses is suppressed more than during the non-time-saving game state and the first time-saving game state, and during the first time-saving game state, more than in the non-time-saving game state. At the same time, you will have the opportunity to win a lottery.

In addition, when the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state, as described above, as a process for easily maintaining the second starting prize opening 16 in the open state, the second determination table 116b and the third determination table 116c are used. (The winning determination random number determination table 116 is set to have a higher probability of winning than the non-time-saving gaming state), the lottery of normal symbols, the variable time for the first time-saving gaming state and the variable time for the second time-saving gaming state (non-time-saving gaming state). Deciding on the variable time (shorter than the time-saving gaming state), and releasing using the opening pattern for the first time-saving gaming state or the opening pattern for the second time-saving gaming state (an opening pattern with a longer total opening time than the non-time-saving gaming state) Although all of the controls are performed, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, at least one of the above-mentioned processes may be performed.

(Summary of processing in pachinko machine P)
Next, an outline of the processing executed by the main control board 100 as the above-mentioned special figure game, regular figure game, and special game progress will be explained using a flowchart.
First, the main processing of the main control board 100 will be explained.
When power is supplied from the power supply board, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 101, and the main CPU 101 executes the main processing shown in the flowchart of FIG.

In step 100, as an initialization process, the main CPU 101 reads a startup program from the main ROM 102 in response to power-on, initializes flags stored in the main RAM 103, and performs various functions sent to the sub-control board 300. The command is stored in an effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. Then, the process advances to the next step 101.
In step 101, the main CPU 101 updates the initial value update random number for the special symbol random number that is referred to when updating the special symbol random number. This initial value update random number for special symbol random number is for determining the initial value of the special symbol random number. That is, the special symbol random number is updated using the initial value update random number for the special symbol random number at the time of starting the update as an initial value. When this random number range is rotated once, the update of the special symbol random number is continued using the initial value update random number for the special symbol random number at that time as the initial value. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 102.

In step 102, the main CPU 101 updates a fluctuation pattern random number for determining a fluctuation pattern. When the process of step 102 is completed, the processes of step 101 and step 102 are repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

Next, the timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100 will be explained.
The reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 100 generates clock pulses at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment), as shown in the flowchart of FIG. Timer interrupt processing is executed.

In step 200, the main CPU 101 executes timer update processing to update various timer counters. Then, the process advances to the next step 201.
Note that the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment employs a subtraction timer, and the timer counter is subtracted by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100 is executed, and when it reaches 0, the subtraction is stopped. It has become.
In step 201, the main CPU 101 updates the special symbol random number. Specifically, the random number counter is updated by adding "1", and if the result of the addition exceeds the maximum value of the random number range, the random number counter is returned to "0", and when the random number counter completes one round, updates the random number from the value of the initial value update random number for special symbol random number at that time. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 202.

In step 202, the main CPU 101 determines whether there is an input to the gate detection sensor 20a, the first starting winning opening detection sensor 15a, the second starting winning opening detection sensor 16a, and the specific area detection sensor 57a, and based on this, Executes sensor detection processing that performs predetermined processing. Then, the process advances to the next step 203.
In step 203, the main CPU 101 executes a special figure-related control process for controlling the special figure game, the special game, and the small winning game. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 204.

In step 204, the main CPU 101 executes a control process related to the standard game to control the standard game. Then, the process advances to the next step 205.
In step 205, the main CPU 101 executes error-related processing to control the occurrence and release of various errors. Specifically, when the main control board 100 receives a door open command based on the opening of the front door 3, a saucer full command based on the full status of the saucer 7, etc., the main CPU 101 executes the corresponding error designation. A command (for example, a door open command, a saucer full command, etc.) is generated and stored (set) in the production transmission data storage area. In addition, when the main control board 100 no longer receives the above-mentioned command, the main CPU 101 generates a corresponding error release designation command (for example, a door close command, a full tank release command, etc.) and stores the production transmission data. Store in area. Then, the process advances to the next step 206.

In step 206, when the detection signals from the general winning opening detection sensor 14a, the first starting winning opening detection sensor 15a, the second starting winning opening detection sensor 16a, and the big winning opening detection sensor 18a are input to the main CPU 101, the corresponding The main CPU 101 updates the prize ball counter provided corresponding to each detection signal, and transmits a payout number designation command corresponding to each detection signal to the firing payout control board 200. In addition, when the prize ball is paid out by the firing and payout control board 200, a payout command is transmitted to the main control board 100 for each payout, and when the main CPU 101 receives the payout command, it subtracts the prize ball counter. Then, the process advances to the next step 207.
In step 207, the main CPU 101 outputs external information data for outputting the gaming state of the pachinko machine P to the outside of the pachinko machine P, and starting winning opening solenoid data for opening and closing the movable piece 16b of the second starting winning opening 16. , big winning hole solenoid data for controlling the opening and closing of the big winning hole 18, various display devices (first special symbol display device 30, second special symbol display device 31, normal symbol display device 32, first special symbol pending display) Display data etc. for the device 38, the second special symbol retention display device 39, and the normal symbol retention display device 33) are created. Then, the process advances to the next step 208.

In step 208, the main CPU 101 performs an output control process that performs port output to output the signal of each data created in step 207 described above, and command transmission to transmit the command stored in the performance transmission data storage area. Execute. Then, the timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100 ends.

Next, the above-mentioned process at the time of sensor detection in step 202 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 21.
In step 300, the main CPU 101 executes gate detection processing for performing a lottery of normal symbols based on the game ball passing through the gate 20. Then, the process advances to the next step 301.
In step 301, the main CPU 101 executes a first starting winning hole detection process for performing a winning lottery based on the game ball entering the first starting winning hole 15. Then, the process advances to the next step 302.

In step 302, the main CPU 101 executes a second starting winning hole detection process for performing a winning lottery based on the game ball entering the second starting winning hole 16. Then, the process advances to the next step 303.
In step 303, the main CPU 101 executes a specific area detection process for performing a predetermined process based on the game ball entering the specific area 57. Then, the process at the time of sensor detection ends.

Next, the process at the time of gate detection in step 300 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 22.
In step 400, the main CPU 101 determines whether a detection signal from the gate detection sensor 20a has been input. If it is determined that the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 20a is not input, the gate detection process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 20a has been input, the process proceeds to the next step 401.
In step 401, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the reserved number of regular pictures counter (that is, the number of reserved regular pictures at the present time) is less than "4". If it is determined that the value is not less than "4" (that is, "4"), the gate detection process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is less than 4, the process proceeds to the next step 402.

In step 402, the main CPU 101 increments the value of the ordinary figure reservation counter by "1". Then, the process advances to the next step 403.
In step 403, the main CPU 101 acquires the winning determination random number, stores it in the normal pattern reservation storage area, and ends the gate detection process.

Next, the process at the time of first starting winning opening detection in step 301 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 23.
In step 500, the main CPU 101 determines whether a detection signal from the first starting winning opening detection sensor 15a has been input. Then, when it is determined that the detection signal from the first starting winning opening detection sensor 15a is not input, the first starting winning opening detection process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection signal from the first starting prize opening detection sensor 15a has been input, the process proceeds to the next step 501.
In step 501, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the first pending number counter (that is, the first pending number at the current time) is less than "4". Then, when it is determined that the value is not less than "4" (that is, "4"), the process at the time of first starting winning opening detection is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is less than "4", the process proceeds to the next step 502.

In step 502, the main CPU 101 increments the value of the first pending number counter by "1". Then, the process advances to the next step 503.
In step 503, the main CPU 101 acquires the random number and stores it in the storage section of the first reservation storage area. Then, the process advances to the next step 504.

In step 504, the main CPU 101 acquires the special symbol random number updated in step 201 described above, and stores it in the storage section of the first reservation storage area where the random number of success or failure was stored in step 503 described above. Then, the process advances to the next step 505.
In step 505, the main CPU 101 acquires the fluctuation pattern random number updated in step 102 described above, and stores it in the storage section of the first reservation storage area in which the random number of validity was stored in step 503 described above. As described above, the acquired random numbers, special symbol random numbers, and fluctuation pattern random numbers are all stored in the same storage section of the first reservation storage area. Then, the process advances to the next step 506.

In step 506, the main CPU 101 generates a start winning command indicating that the first special symbol random number and the first time-saving symbol random number have been stored, and stores it in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the process advances to the next step 507.
In step 507, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current gaming state is a non-time-saving gaming state or a first time-saving gaming state. Then, when it is determined that it is neither the non-time-saving gaming state nor the first time-saving gaming state (that is, the second time-saving gaming state), the first starting winning opening detection process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the state is the non-time-saving gaming state or the first time-saving gaming state, the process advances to the next step 508.

In step 508, the main CPU 101 determines the stored first special figure random number before the start of fluctuation based on the first special figure random number (at the time when the first special figure random number is acquired (stored as pending)) A preliminary determination process is executed to perform various determinations regarding the winning/failure lottery. Then, the process at the time of first starting winning hole detection is ended.

Next, the process at the time of detecting the second starting winning hole in step 302 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24.
In step 600, the main CPU 101 determines whether a detection signal from the second starting winning opening detection sensor 16a has been input. Then, when it is determined that the detection signal from the second starting winning opening detection sensor 16a is not input, the second starting winning opening detection process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection signal from the second starting winning opening detection sensor 16a has been input, the process proceeds to the next step 601.
In step 601, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the second pending number counter (that is, the current second pending number) is less than "4". Then, when it is determined that the value is not less than "4" (that is, "4"), the process at the time of second starting winning opening detection is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is less than "4", the process advances to the next step 602.

In step 602, the main CPU 101 increments the value of the second pending number counter by "1". Then, the process advances to the next step 603.
In step 603, the main CPU 101 acquires the random number and stores it in the storage section of the second reservation storage area. Then, the process advances to the next step 604.

In step 604, the main CPU 101 acquires the special symbol random number updated in step 201 described above and stores it in the storage section of the second reservation storage area where the random number of success or failure was stored in step 603 described above. Then, the process advances to the next step 605.
In step 605, the main CPU 101 acquires the fluctuation pattern random number updated in step 102 described above, and stores it in the storage section of the second reservation storage area in which the random number of validity was stored in step 603 described above. As described above, the acquired random numbers, special symbol random numbers, and variation pattern random numbers are all stored in the same storage section of the second reservation storage area. Then, the process advances to the next step 606.

In step 606, the main CPU 101 generates a start winning command indicating that the second special figure random number has been stored, and stores it in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the process advances to the next step 607.
In step 607, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current gaming state is the second time-saving gaming state. Then, when it is determined that it is not in the second time-saving gaming state (that is, in the non-time-saving gaming state or the first time-saving gaming state), the second starting winning opening detection process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the state is the second time-saving game state, the process advances to the next step 608.

In step 608, the main CPU 101 determines the stored second special figure random number before the start of fluctuation based on the second special figure random number (at the time the second special figure random number is acquired (stored as pending)) A preliminary determination process is executed to perform various determinations regarding the winning/failure lottery. Then, the process at the time of second starting winning hole detection is ended.

Next, the preliminary determination processing in steps 508 and 608 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 25. In addition, in the preliminary determination process of step 508 described above, the following process is executed based on the win/fail random number, special symbol random number, and fluctuation pattern random number stored in the storage unit of the first reservation storage area, and the first reservation number. In the preliminary determination process of step 608 described above, the following process is executed based on the win/fail random number, special symbol random number, and fluctuation pattern random number stored in the storage unit of the second reservation storage area, and the second reservation number. be done.
In step 650, the main CPU 101 determines the type of starting winning hole into which the game ball entered (first starting winning hole 15, second starting winning hole 16), the number of reservations (first number of reservations, second number of reservations), and , confirm the gaming state (normal gaming state, first low probability time saving gaming state, second low probability time saving gaming state, high probability time saving gaming state). Then, the process advances to the next step 651.

In step 651, the main CPU 101 selects one of the win/fail random number determination tables 110 that corresponds to the set value and the gaming state confirmed in step 650 described above (tables A1 to A6, tables B1 to B6). (either one) is acquired, and based on the acquired table and the stored random numbers, a win/fail determination process is executed to determine the result of the win/fail lottery. Thereafter, data related to the result of the determination (big win, small win, time saving award, or loss) is stored in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 103. In addition, in this preliminary determination process as well, the determination as to whether the time saving grant is appropriate or not is made only when the gaming state confirmed in step 650 (that is, the gaming state set at the time) is the normal gaming state, This is not performed if the game is in a game state other than the normal game state. Therefore, when the game is in a game state other than the normal game state, the result is either a jackpot win, a small win, or a loss. Then, the process advances to the next step 652.
In step 652, the main CPU 101 executes special symbol determination processing to determine the type of special symbol. Specifically, when the starting winning hole into which the game ball entered is the first starting winning hole 15 (first special figure random number), the first starting winning hole determination table 111a is acquired, and the table and the first starting winning hole determination table 111a are obtained. , the types of jackpot symbols (jackpot symbols X1, X2, X3), the types of small winning symbols (small winning symbols Y1, Y2), and the types of time-saving symbols (time-saving symbols J1, J2) based on the stored special symbol random numbers. , J3, J4, J5, J6) or the type of losing symbol (losing symbol Z1, Z2). In addition, if the starting winning hole into which the game ball entered is the second starting winning hole 16 (second special figure random number), the second starting winning hole determination table 111b is acquired, and the table and the stored information are obtained. Based on the special symbol random number, the type of jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol X1, X4), the type of small prize symbol (small prize symbol Y1, Y2), the type of time saving symbol (time saving symbol J7), or the type of losing symbol The type (losing symbols Z1, Z2) is determined. Then, data related to the result of the determination (type of special symbol) is stored in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 103. Then, the process advances to the next step 653.

In step 653, the main CPU 101 determines the gaming state confirmed in step 650 above, the type of starting winning hole into which the game ball entered, and the above-mentioned consecutive jackpot number condition (the number of consecutive jackpots must reach a predetermined number). A fluctuation pattern table 114 corresponding to whether or not is established is obtained. Then, the process advances to the next step 654.
In step 654, the main CPU 101 generates a variation pattern command based on the type of special symbol determined in step 652, the number of reservations, the variation pattern table 114 obtained in step 653, and the stored variation pattern random number. A variation pattern command determination process is executed to determine the change pattern command. Then, the process advances to the next step 655.

In step 655, the main CPU 101 generates a preliminary determination command including the result of the lottery determined in step 612 described above, the type of special symbol determined in step 652 described above, and the variation pattern command determined in step 654 described above. is stored in the production transmission data storage area. Then, the preliminary determination process ends.
Through the above processing, for the first special pattern random number or the second special pattern random number stored as pending, as a result of the winning/failure lottery determined at the start of the special pattern fluctuation, the special symbol type and fluctuation pattern command are changed to the pre-judgment command. This is transmitted to the sub-control board 300 in advance (that is, before the fluctuation starts) at the time when the random number is acquired.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, in the above-mentioned preliminary determination process, the game ball is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting prize opening 15 and is stored in the reserved storage area (first reserved storage area). Determine the first special figure random number or the second special figure random number acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning hole 16 and stored in the reservation storage area (second reservation storage area). However, it is not limited to this. For example, in the preliminary determination process, instead of directly determining the random numbers stored in the reserved storage area, random numbers stored in another storage area (for example, a register, etc.) may be determined.

Next, the specific area detection process in step 303 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 26.
In step 670, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a special game is being played. If it is determined that the special game is not in progress, the specific area detection process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special game is in progress, the process advances to the next step 671.
In step 671, the main CPU 101 determines whether the detection signal from the specific area detection sensor 57a has been input a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, once). If it is determined that the detection signal from the specific area detection sensor 57a has not been input a predetermined number of times, the specific area detection process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection signal from the specific area detection sensor 57a has been input a predetermined number of times, the process proceeds to the next step 672.
In step 672, the main CPU 101 turns on an entry flag indicating that a predetermined number of game balls have entered the specific area 57. Then, the specific area detection process ends.

Next, the above-mentioned special figure related control process of step 203 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27.
At step 700, main CPU 101 loads the value of execution phase data. This execution phase data indicates which of the plurality of functional modules (subroutines) configuring the special figure-related control process is to be executed. Specifically, this execution phase data includes data "00" indicating execution of special symbol fluctuation start processing described later, data "01" indicating execution of special symbol fluctuation stop processing described later, and post-stop processing described later. data "02" indicating the execution of the special game control process described later, data "03" indicating the execution of the special game control process described later, data "04" indicating the execution of the small winning game control process described later, and the special game end process described later. It has data "05" indicating execution.
Then, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol fluctuation start processing (step 701), special symbol fluctuation stop processing (step 702), post-stop processing (step 703), and special Either the game control process (step 704), the small winning game control process (step 705), or the special game end process (step 706) is executed. Then, the special figure related control process is ended.

Next, the above-mentioned special symbol variation start process of step 701 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28.
In step 800, the main CPU 101 determines whether the execution phase data is data "00" indicating execution of the special symbol variation start process. If it is determined that the execution phase data is "00", the process advances to the next step 801. On the other hand, when it is determined that the execution phase data is not "00", the special symbol variation start process is ended.
In step 801, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the second special figure random number is stored in the storage section of the second reservation storage area, that is, whether or not the second reservation number counter is equal to or greater than "1". . If it is determined that the second special figure random number is stored, the process proceeds to step 804. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special figure random number is not stored, the process proceeds to the next step 802.

In step 802, the main CPU 101 determines whether the first special figure random number is stored in the storage section of the first reservation storage area, that is, whether or not the first reservation number counter is greater than or equal to "1". . If it is determined that the first special figure random number is not stored, the process proceeds to step 812. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first special figure random number is stored, the process proceeds to the next step 803.
In step 803, the main CPU 101 decrements the value of the first pending number counter by "1" and executes a shift process of the first pending storage area. Specifically, each random number stored in the first storage section of the first reservation storage area is stored in a predetermined processing area provided in the main RAM 103, and the random numbers are stored in the second storage section of the first reservation storage area. - Shift each random number stored in the fourth storage unit to the storage unit with the next lower number. As a result, each random number stored in the first reservation storage area is used in a so-called first-in first-out (FIFO) process for determining validity, which will be described later. Then, the process advances to step 805.

In addition, in step 804, which is proceeded when it is determined in the above-mentioned step 801 that the second special figure random number is stored, the main CPU 101 decrements the value of the second reservation number counter by "1", and also decrements the value of the second reservation number counter. Executes area shift processing. Specifically, each random number stored in the first storage section of the second reservation storage area is stored in a predetermined processing area provided in the main RAM 103, and the random numbers are stored in the second storage section of the second reservation storage area. - Shift each random number stored in the fourth storage unit to the storage unit with the next lower number. As a result, each random number stored in the second reservation storage area is used in a so-called first-in first-out (FIFO) process for determining validity, which will be described later. Then, the process advances to step 805.
In step 805, the main CPU 101 increments by "1" the count value of a variation counter for counting the number of executions of the winning lottery (the number of variations of the special symbol). Further, the main CPU 101 stores a variation number command including the count value of the variation number counter in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the variation number command is sent to the sub control board 300, and the sub control board 300 is able to grasp the current count value of the variation number counter. Then, the process advances to the next step 806.

In step 806, the main CPU 101 executes a success/failure determination process to derive the result of the win/fail lottery. Then, the process advances to the next step 807.
In step 807, the main CPU 101 executes special symbol determination processing to determine the type of special symbol. Specifically, when the starting winning hole into which the game ball entered is the first starting winning hole 15 (first special figure random number), the first starting winning hole determination table 111a is acquired, and the table and the first starting winning hole determination table 111a are obtained. , the result of the lottery determined in step 806 described above (big hit winning, small winning winning, time saving grant winning, loss) and the special symbol stored in a predetermined processing area in step 803 or step 804 described above. Based on the random numbers, the type of jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol X1, X2, X3), the type of small prize symbol (small prize symbol Y1, Y2), and the type of time-saving symbol (time-saving symbol J1, J2, J3, J4, J5) , J6) or the type of losing symbol (losing symbol Z1, Z2). In addition, if the starting winning hole into which the game ball entered is the second starting winning hole 16 (second special figure random number), the second starting winning hole determination table 111b is acquired, and the table and the above-mentioned The result of the lottery determined in step 806 (big win, small win, time saving award, loss) and the special symbol random number stored in the predetermined processing area in step 803 or step 804 described above. Based on the jackpot symbol type (jackpot symbol X1, Z2) is determined. Then, data corresponding to the determined special symbol is stored in a predetermined temporary storage area of the main RAM 103. In addition, in this special symbol determination process, the current gaming state, that is, the gaming state at the time when the special symbol was determined, is stored in the gaming state buffer. Then, the process advances to the next step 808.
In addition, in the fluctuation start process of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, if both the first special figure random number and the second special figure random number are stored, the second special figure random number is given priority to the first special figure random number. Although random numbers are processed, the process is not limited to this, and may be processed in the order in which they are stored in the reserved storage area.

In step 808, the main CPU 101 stores a symbol determination command indicating the type of special symbol determined in step 807 described above in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, information regarding the determined type of special symbol will be transmitted to the sub-control board 300 at the start of variation. Then, the process advances to the next step 809.
In step 809, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern determination process for determining a variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number stored in the processing area in step 803 or step 804 described above. Then, the process advances to the next step 810.

In step 810, the main CPU 101 sets variable display data for starting variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31. As a result, when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner based on the first special symbol random number, the first special symbol display device 30 starts blinking display, and the special symbol is displayed based on the second special symbol random number. When a variable display is performed, the second special symbol display device 31 starts a blinking display. Here, the blinking display means that "-" blinks at predetermined intervals on each display device.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when the first special figure random number is stored in the first reservation storage area, the first special figure reservation display device 38 displays the first reservation number in a manner that allows the first reservation number to be recognized. When the second special figure random number is stored in the second reservation storage area, the second special figure reservation display device 39 is displayed in such a manner that the second reservation number can be recognized. Then, when the above-mentioned special symbol is displayed in a variable manner based on the first special symbol random number, the first special symbol is When the display device 38 is display-controlled and the above-mentioned special symbol is displayed in a variable manner based on the second special symbol random number, at the same time as the variable display starts, a display is displayed to indicate that the second pending number is reduced by one. , the display of the second special figure reservation display device 39 is controlled.
Then, the process advances to the next step 811.

In step 811, the main CPU 101 sets the execution phase data to "01" so that the special symbol fluctuation stop processing is executed in the special symbol related control processing, and ends the special symbol fluctuation start processing.
In addition, in step 812, which is proceeded when it is determined in the above-mentioned step 802 that the first special figure random number is not stored in the first reservation storage area, the main CPU 101 displays the effect based on the fact that the variable display is not performed. The device 21 executes a customer waiting determination process for displaying a customer waiting display. Specifically, the main CPU 101 measures the time during which the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, and when a predetermined customer waiting time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed without the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner. Assuming that the system is in a customer waiting state, a customer waiting command for displaying a customer waiting screen on the performance display device 21 is stored in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the special symbol variation start process ends.

Next, the validity determination process of step 806 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 29.
In step 850, the main CPU 101 selects and selects one of the win/fail random number determination tables 110 that corresponds to the set value and the current gaming state (low probability gaming state, high probability gaming state). Based on the table and the random number stored in the predetermined processing area in step 803 or step 804 described above, it is determined whether or not the jackpot will be won (that is, the jackpot is determined). Execute judgment processing. Specifically, the main CPU 101 acquires information on the numerical range that will result in a jackpot from the above-mentioned table, and determines whether or not the above-mentioned win/fail random number falls within the acquired numerical range. Then, if the above-mentioned random number is within the above-mentioned numerical range, it is determined that the jackpot has been won, and when the above-mentioned random number is not within the above-mentioned numerical range, it is determined that the jackpot has not been won. Then, the process advances to the next step 851.
In step 851, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination process executed in step 850 described above is a jackpot (that is, whether or not the jackpot has been won). If it is determined that the jackpot has not been won (the jackpot has not been won), the process proceeds to step 853. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the process proceeds to the next step 852.

In step 852, the main 101 stores the fact that the jackpot has been won in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, the validity determination process ends.
Further, in step 853, which is proceeded when it is determined in the above-mentioned step 851 that the jackpot has not been won, the main CPU 101 stores the table selected in the above-mentioned step 850 and the table stored in the predetermined processing area in the above-mentioned step 803 or step 804. Based on the winning random number (that is, the same winning random number as the winning random number that was the subject of determination in step 850 described above), it is determined whether or not a small win will be won (i.e., determining whether the small winning is correct or not). ) Execute the small hit determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 101 acquires information on the numerical range that will result in a small win from the above-mentioned table, and determines whether the above-mentioned win/fail random number falls within the acquired numerical range. If the above-mentioned random number falls within the above-mentioned numerical range, it is determined that a small hit has been won, and when the above-mentioned random number does not fall within the above-mentioned numerical range, it is determined that a small hit has not been won. Then, the process advances to the next step 854.

In step 854, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the small win determination process executed in step 853 described above is a small win (that is, whether or not a small win has been won). If it is determined that the small winning is not won (the small winning is not won), the process proceeds to step 856. On the other hand, if it is determined that the small win has been won, the process proceeds to the next step 855.
In step 855, the main 101 stores in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103 that the small win has been won. Then, the validity determination process ends.

Further, in step 856, which is proceeded when it is determined in the above-mentioned step 854 that the small win has not been won, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the currently set gaming state is the normal gaming state. If it is determined that the game state is not the normal game state (that is, the first low probability time saving game state, the second low probability time saving game state or the high probability time saving game state), the process proceeds to step 860. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is in the normal gaming state, the process advances to the next step 857.
In step 857, the main CPU 101 uses the table selected in step 850 described above and the random number stored in the predetermined processing area in step 803 or step 804 (that is, the target of determination in step 850 and step 853 described above). A time-saving grant determination process is executed to determine whether or not the time-saving grant is a win (that is, to determine whether the time-saving grant is appropriate) based on the winning random number and the same winning/fail random number. Specifically, the main CPU 101 acquires information on the numerical range in which the time-saving award is won from the above-mentioned table, and determines whether or not the above-mentioned random number falls within the acquired numerical range. Then, if the above-mentioned right/fail random number falls within the above-mentioned numerical range, it is determined that the time-saving grant is won, and if the above-mentioned right-fail random number does not fall within the above-mentioned numerical range, it is determined that the time-saving grant is not won. Then, the process advances to the next step 858.

In step 858, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the time-saving grant determination process executed in step 857 described above is a winning of the time-saving grant (that is, whether or not the time-saving grant has been won). If it is determined that the time saving award is not won (the small winning is not won), the process proceeds to step 860. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving award has been won, the process proceeds to the next step 859.
In step 859, the main 101 stores in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103 the fact that the time saving award has been won. Then, the validity determination process ends.

Further, in step 860, which is proceeded to when it is determined that the normal gaming state is not in the above-mentioned step 856, or when it is determined that the time saving award has not been won in the above-mentioned step 858, the main CPU 101 stores a predetermined memory in the main RAM 103. Memorize the fact that you lost in the area. Then, the validity determination process ends.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the jackpot propriety determination process, the small win propriety determination process, and the time saving grant propriety determination process are all performed using the win/fail random number determination table 110 corresponding to the set setting value and gaming state. is executed by a common processing program (same module) to select the numerical value, obtain information on the numerical range to be determined, and determine whether a valid random number belongs to the numerical range. It looks like this.

Next, the variation pattern determination process in step 809 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 30.
In step 900, the main CPU 101 determines the type of starting winning hole into which the game ball entered (first starting winning hole 15, second starting winning hole 16), the number of reservations (first number of reservations, second number of reservations), the number of games Check the state (normal game state, first low probability time saving game state, second low probability time saving game state, high probability time saving game state). Then, the process advances to the next step 901.
In step 901, the main CPU 101 determines the gaming state confirmed in step 900 above, the type of starting winning hole into which the game ball entered, and the above-mentioned consecutive jackpot number condition (the number of consecutive jackpots must reach a predetermined number). A variation pattern table 114 corresponding to whether or not is established is obtained. Then, the process advances to the next step 902.

In step 902, the main CPU 101 uses the fluctuation pattern table 114 acquired in step 901 described above, the type of special symbol determined in step 807 described above, the number of reservations confirmed in step 900 described above, and the number of reservations confirmed in step 803 described above. Alternatively, in step 804, a variation pattern command is determined based on the variation pattern random number stored in the processing area, and the determined variation pattern command is stored in a predetermined processing area. Then, the process advances to the next step 903.
In step 903, the main CPU 101 stores the variation pattern command determined in step 902 described above in the presentation transmission data storage area. Then, the process advances to the next step 904.

In step 904, the main CPU 101 determines the variation time associated with the variation pattern command based on the variation pattern table 114. Then, the determined variable time is set in the variable time timer counter. Then, the variation pattern determination process ends.

Next, the above-mentioned special symbol fluctuation stop processing in step 702 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31.
In step 1000, the main CPU 101 determines whether the execution phase data is data "01" indicating execution of the special symbol variation stop processing. Then, when it is determined that the execution phase data is not "01", the special symbol variation stop processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution phase data is "01", the process advances to the next step 1001.

In step 1001, the main CPU 101 determines whether the variable time set in the variable time timer counter in step 904 has elapsed. Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed, the special symbol fluctuation stop processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable time has elapsed, the process advances to the next step 1002.
In step 1002, the main CPU 101 sets stop display data for stopping and displaying the special symbol determined in step 807 above on the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31, and Executes the stop display. Then, the process advances to the next step 1003.

In step 1003, the main CPU 101 stores a symbol confirmation command indicating that the special symbol has been confirmed in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the process advances to the next step 1004.
In step 1004, the main CPU 101 sets a stop display time for stopping and displaying the special symbol in a stop display time timer counter. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the determined special symbol is a time-saving symbol (J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6, J7), the stop display time is set to 3 seconds, and otherwise, it is set to 0. A stop display time of 5 seconds is set. Then, the process advances to the next step 1005.

In step 1005, the main CPU 101 sets "02" to the execution phase data so that the post-stop process is executed in the special figure-related control process. Then, the special symbol variation stop processing ends.

Next, the post-stop processing in step 703 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 32.
In step 1100, the main CPU 101 determines whether the execution phase data is data "02" indicating execution of post-stop processing. If it is determined that the execution phase data is not "02", the post-stop processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution phase data is "02", the process advances to the next step 1101.
In step 1101, the main CPU 101 determines whether the stop display time set in the stop display time timer counter in step 1004 described above has elapsed. If it is determined that the stop display time has not elapsed, the post-stop processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop display time has elapsed, the process advances to the next step 1102.

In step 1102, the main CPU 101 stores a stop display end command indicating that the stop display time has elapsed in the performance transmission data storage area. Thereby, the fact that the stop display time has elapsed is transmitted to the sub control board 300. Further, the main CPU 101 stores the current gaming state in a gaming state buffer. Then, the process advances to the next step 1103.
In step 1103, the main CPU 101 executes time saving number update processing. Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets a first time saving game flag indicating that the current gaming state is a first time saving gaming state, or a second time saving game flag indicating that the current gaming state is a second time saving gaming state. It is determined whether any of the game flags is on. Then, when it is determined that the first time saving game flag or the second time saving game flag is on, the time saving number storage area provided in the main RAM 103 is updated. This time saving number storage area stores the remaining number of fluctuations until the time saving game state ends. Then, the stored remaining number of fluctuations is decremented by "1". In addition, when the remaining number of fluctuations becomes "0" by updating the remaining number of fluctuations, processing is also executed to turn off the first time-saving game flag or the second time-saving game flag that was on. Further, when it is determined that both the first time saving game flag and the second time saving game flag are not turned on, the main CPU 101 does not perform any processing. Then, the process advances to the next step 1104.

In step 1104, the main CPU 101 performs high-accuracy frequency update processing. Here, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a high probability gaming flag indicating that the current gaming state is a high probability gaming state is on. Then, when it is determined that the high probability game flag is on, the high probability number storage area provided in the main RAM 103 is updated. This high probability number storage area stores the remaining number of fluctuations until the high probability game state ends. Then, the stored remaining number of fluctuations is decremented by "1". Further, when the remaining number of fluctuations becomes "0" by updating the remaining number of fluctuations, a process of turning off the high certainty game flag is also executed. Further, if it is determined that the high-precision game flag is not turned on, the main CPU 101 does not perform any processing. Then, the process advances to the next step 1105.

In step 1105, the main CPU 101 determines whether the special symbol that is being stopped and displayed is a jackpot symbol. Then, when it is determined that the special symbol that is being stopped and displayed is not a jackpot symbol (that is, a small winning symbol, a time saving symbol, or a losing symbol), the process proceeds to step 1111. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol that is being stopped and displayed is a jackpot symbol, the process proceeds to the next step 1106.
In step 1106, the main CPU 101 sets a jackpot winning command for transmitting the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning and the type of the stopped displayed jackpot symbols (jackpot symbols X1, X2, X3, X4) to the sub control board 300. do. Then, the process advances to the next step 1107.

In step 1107, the main CPU 101 resets the current gaming state. Then, the process advances to the next step 1108.
In step 1108, the main CPU 101 sets the opening time, which is the waiting time set at the start of the special game, in the opening time timer counter, and sends an opening command indicating that the opening process is started to the effect transmission data storage area. to be memorized. Then, the process advances to the next step 1109.

In step 1109, the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds in the main RAM 103 based on the type of the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets "10" as the number of rounds if the stopped and displayed jackpot symbol is X1 or X2, and sets "10" as the round number if the stopped and displayed jackpot symbol is X3 or X4. Set "4" as the number. Then, the process advances to the next step 1110.
In step 1110, the main CPU 101 sets "03" to the execution phase data so that the special game control process is executed in the special figure related control process. Then, the post-stop processing ends.

Further, in step 1111, which is proceeded when it is determined in the above-mentioned step 1105 that the special symbol that is stopped and displayed is not a jackpot symbol, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol that is stopped and displayed is a small winning symbol. do. If it is determined that the special symbol that is being stopped and displayed is not a small winning symbol (that is, it is a time saving symbol or a losing symbol), the process proceeds to step 1114. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol that is being stopped and displayed is a small winning symbol, the process proceeds to the next step 1112.
In step 1112, the main CPU 101 sets the opening time, which is the waiting time set at the start of the small winning game, in the opening time timer counter, and stores the opening command indicating that the opening process is started in the production transmission data. Store in area. Then, the process advances to the next step 1113.

In step 1113, the main CPU 101 sets "04" to the execution phase data so that the small winning game control process is executed in the special figure related control process. Then, the post-stop processing ends.

Further, in step 1114, which is proceeded when it is determined in step 1111 that the special symbol that is being stopped and displayed is not a small winning symbol, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol that is being stopped and displayed is a time-saving symbol. do. If it is determined that the special symbol that is being stopped and displayed is not a time-saving symbol (that is, it is a losing symbol), the process proceeds to step 1116. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol that is being stopped and displayed is a time-saving symbol, the process proceeds to the next step 1115.
In step 1115, the main CPU 101 executes a first low-probability time-saving gaming state setting process that sets the gaming state to the first low-probability time-saving gaming state. Specifically, in addition to turning on the first time-saving game flag, if the stopped-displayed time-saving symbol is J1, the number of time-savings is set to "10", and if the stopped-displayed time-saving symbol is J2. If the time saving symbol is stopped, set the time saving number to “20”, if the time saving symbol that is stopped and displayed is J3, set the time saving number to “30”, and if the time saving symbol that is stopped and displayed is J4. , set the number of time savers to "50", if the time saver symbol that was stopped and displayed was J5, set the number of time saver to "100", and if the time saver symbol that was stopped and displayed was J6 The number of times of time saving is set to "1000", and when the stopped and displayed time saving symbol is J7, the number of times of time saving is set to "1". Then, the process advances to the next step 1116.

In step 1116, the main CPU 101 confirms the set gaming state and stores a gaming state command indicating the gaming state in the production transmission data storage area. Then, the process advances to the next step 1117.
In step 1117, the main CPU 101 sets "00" to the execution phase data so that the special symbol fluctuation start process is executed in the special symbol related control process. Then, the post-stop processing ends.

Next, the special game control process of step 704 mentioned above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 33.
In step 1200, the main CPU 101 determines whether the execution phase data is data "03" indicating execution of the special game control process. Then, when it is determined that the execution phase data is not "03", the special game control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution phase data is "03", the process advances to the next step 1201.
In step 1201, the main CPU 101 determines whether the opening time set in the opening time timer counter in step 1108 described above has elapsed. Then, if it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed, the special game control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening time has elapsed, the process advances to the next step 1202.

In step 1202, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not an ending process is in progress, which is a standby process performed after all rounds of games are completed in this special game control process. If it is determined that the ending process is in progress, the process advances to step 1210. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending process is not in progress, the process advances to the next step 1203.
In step 1203, the main CPU 101 performs a jackpot opening/closing control process for opening/closing the jackpot 18 and operating the distribution member 59 based on the special electric accessory actuation table 112 corresponding to the type of the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed. Execute. Then, the process advances to the next step 1204.

In step 1204, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the time when the round game has started based on the big winning opening opening/closing control in step 1203 described above. If it is determined that it is not the time when the round game has started, the process advances to step 1206. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round game has started, the process advances to the next step 1205.
In step 1205, the main CPU 101 stores a round game start command indicating the start of a round game in the production transmission data storage area. Then, the process advances to the next step 1206.
Note that the round game start command is provided for each number of round games, so that it is possible to transmit to the sub control board 300 how many times the round game has been started.

In step 1206, the main CPU 101 determines whether the round game has ended based on the big winning opening opening/closing control in step 1203 described above. Then, when it is determined that the round game has not ended, the special game control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round game has ended, the process advances to the next step 1207.
In step 1207, the main CPU 101 decrements the number of rounds stored in the main RAM 103 by "1". Then, the process advances to the next step 1208.

In step 1208, the main CPU 101 determines whether the number of rounds decremented in step 1207 described above is "0". Then, when it is determined that the number of rounds is not "0", the special game control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of rounds is "0", the process advances to the next step 1209.
In step 1209, the main CPU 101 sets the ending time, which is the waiting time set at the end of the special game, in the ending time timer counter, and sends an ending command indicating that the ending process is started to the effect transmission data storage area. Remember. Then, the special game control process ends.

Further, in step 1210, which is proceeded when it is determined in step 1202 described above that the ending process is in progress, the main CPU 101 determines whether the ending time set in the ending time timer counter in step 1209 described above has elapsed. Then, when it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed, the special game control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, the process advances to the next step 1211.
In step 1211, the main CPU 101 stores a special game end command indicating that the special game has ended in the effect transmission data storage area. Then, the process advances to the next step 1212.

In step 1212, the main CPU 101 sets "05" to the execution phase data so that the special game end process is executed in the special figure related control process. Then, the special game control process ends.

Next, the small winning game control process of step 705 mentioned above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34.
In step 1250, the main CPU 101 determines whether the execution phase data is data "04" indicating execution of the small winning game control process. Then, when it is determined that the execution phase data is not "04", the small winning game control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution phase data is "04", the process advances to the next step 1251.
In step 1251, the main CPU 101 determines whether the opening time set in the opening time timer counter in step 1112 described above has elapsed. Then, if it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed, the small winning game control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening time has elapsed, the process advances to the next step 1252.

In step 1252, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not an ending process is in progress, which is a standby process performed after the opening and closing of the big prize opening 18 is completed in this small winning game control process. If it is determined that the ending process is in progress, the process advances to step 1256. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending process is not in progress, the process advances to the next step 1253.
In step 1253, the main CPU 101 performs a small winning game execution process of opening and closing the big prize opening 18 based on the fourth operation table 112d in the special electric accessory operation table 112. Then, the process advances to the next step 1254.

In step 1254, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the opening and closing of the big prize opening 18 has been completed. Then, when it is determined that the opening and closing of the big prize opening 18 has not been completed, the small winning game control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening and closing of the big prize opening 18 has been completed, the process proceeds to the next step 1255.
In step 1255, the main CPU 101 sets the ending time, which is the waiting time set at the end of the small winning game, in the ending time timer counter, and sends the ending command indicating that the ending process is started to the performance transmission data storage area. to be memorized. Then, the small winning game control process ends.

Further, in step 1256, which is proceeded when it is determined that the ending process is in progress in step 1252 described above, the main CPU 101 determines whether the ending time set in the ending time timer counter in step 1255 described above has elapsed. Then, when it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed, the small winning game control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, the process advances to the next step 1257.
In step 1257, the main CPU 101 stores a small winning game end command indicating that the small winning game has ended in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1258.

In step 1258, the main CPU 101 confirms the set gaming state and stores a gaming state command indicating the gaming state in the production transmission data storage area. Moreover, the main CPU 101 sets "00" to the execution phase data so that the special symbol variation process is executed in the special symbol related control process. Then, the small winning game control process ends.

Next, the above-mentioned special game ending process of step 705 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 35.
In step 1300, the main CPU 101 determines whether the execution phase data is data "05" indicating execution of the special game end process. Then, when it is determined that the execution phase data is not "05", the special game ending process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution phase data is "05", the process advances to the next step 1301.
In step 1301, the main CPU 101 determines whether the entry flag is on. If it is determined that the entry flag is not on (that is, off), the process advances to step 1309. On the other hand, if it is determined that the entry flag is on, the process advances to the next step 1302.

In step 1302, the main CPU 101 decrements by 1 the value of the continuous probability change setting counter for counting the number of consecutive probability change settings described above, and the value of the continuous time reduction setting counter for counting the number of continuous time reduction settings described above. Decrement by 1. Then, the process advances to the next step 1303.
In step 1303, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the continuous probability variation setting number counter has reached 0, that is, whether the number of continuous probability variation settings has reached a predetermined upper limit number of times. If it is determined that the value of the continuous probability variation setting counter has not reached 0, the process advances to step 1305. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the continuous probability variation setting number counter has reached 0, the process advances to the next step 1304.

In step 1304, the main CPU 101 executes a low probability gaming state setting process to set the gaming state to a low probability gaming state. Specifically, the high certainty game flag is turned off. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a predetermined upper limit number of times "10000" in a continuous probability change setting number counter. Then, the process advances to step 1306.
Further, in step 1305, which is proceeded to when it is determined in the above-mentioned step 1303 that the value of the continuous probability change setting counter has not reached 0, a high probability gaming state setting process is executed to set the gaming state to a high probability gaming state. . Specifically, the high probability game flag is turned on and the high probability number of games is set to "10000". Then, the process advances to the next step 1306.

In step 1306, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the continuous time saving setting counter has reached 0, that is, whether the number of continuous working time saving settings has reached a predetermined upper limit. If it is determined that the value of the continuous time reduction setting counter has not reached 0, the process advances to step 1308. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the continuous time reduction setting counter has reached 0, the process advances to the next step 1307.
In step 1307, the main CPU 101 executes a non-time-saving gaming state setting process that sets the gaming state to a non-time-saving gaming state. Specifically, the first time-saving game flag and the second time-saving game flag are turned off. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a predetermined upper limit number of times "10000" in the continuous time saving setting number counter. Then, the process advances to step 1311.

Further, in step 1308, which is proceeded when it is determined in step 1306 that the value of the continuous time saving setting counter has not reached 0, the main CPU 101 executes a second time saving game that sets the gaming state to the second time saving gaming state. Execute status setting processing. Specifically, the second time saving game flag is turned on and the number of time saving times is set to "10000". Then, the process advances to step 1311.
Further, in step 1309, which is proceeded when it is determined that the entry flag is not on in step 1301 described above, the main CPU 101 executes the low probability time saving game state setting process similar to step 1304 described above, and also sets the continuous probability change setting number counter. A predetermined upper limit number of times "10000" is set to "10000". Then, the process advances to the next step 1310.

In step 1310, the main CPU 101 executes a time-saving/non-time-saving gaming state setting process that sets the gaming state to a non-time-saving gaming state or a second time-saving gaming state. Specifically, when the jackpot symbol determined at the time of winning the jackpot is X2 or To set it, turn on the second time saving game flag and set the number of time saving times to "10000". On the other hand, when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a non-time-saving game state, the first time-saving game flag and the second time-saving game flag are turned off in order to set the non-time-saving game state. Further, when the jackpot symbol determined at the time of jackpot winning is X4, a second time-saving game flag is turned on and the number of time-savings is set to ``100'' in order to set a second time-saving game state. Then, the process advances to step 1311.
In step 1311, the main CPU 101 determines whether the set gaming state is a high probability time saving gaming state (a high probability gaming state and a second time saving gaming state) or a second low probability time saving gaming state (a low probability gaming state and a second time saving gaming state). ). If it is determined that neither is the case, the process advances to step 1313. On the other hand, if it is determined that either is the case, the process advances to the next step 1312.

In step 1312, the main CPU 101 increments by 1 the value of a continuous jackpot number counter for counting the number of consecutive jackpots. Note that when the value of the continuous jackpot number counter reaches a value corresponding to a predetermined number of times (three times in this embodiment), the above-mentioned continuous jackpot number condition is satisfied. Then, the process advances to step 1314.
Further, in step 1313, which is proceeded to when it is determined that the gaming state set in step 1311 described above is neither the high probability time saving gaming state nor the second low probability time saving gaming state, the main CPU 101 calculates the value of the continuous jackpot number counter. Reset (zero clear). Then, the process advances to the next step 1314.

In step 1314, the main CPU 101 turns off the entry flag. Then, the process advances to the next step 1315.
In step 1315, the main CPU 101 sets a gaming state designation command in the performance transmission data storage area according to the gaming state set as described above. This gaming state designation command includes information on whether the high-precision game flag is on or off, information on whether the first time-saving game flag is on or off, and information on whether the second time-saving game flag is on or off, which are set as described above. Contains information on , high accuracy count, and time saving count. Then, the process advances to the next step 1316.

In step 1316, the main CPU 101 sets "00" to the execution phase data so that the fluctuation start process is executed in the special figure related control process. Then, the special game ending process is ended.

Next, the ordinary map related control process in step 204 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 36.
In step 1400, the main CPU 101 loads the value of the general figure execution phase data. This ordinary figure execution phase data indicates which of the plurality of functional modules (subroutines) configuring the ordinary figure related control processing is to be executed. Specifically, this normal symbol execution phase data includes data "10" indicating the execution of the normal symbol fluctuation start process described later, data "11" indicating the execution of the normal symbol fluctuation stop process described later, and the data "11" indicating the execution of the normal symbol fluctuation stop process described later. It has data "12" indicating the execution of the post-symbol stop process and data "13" indicating the execution of the movable piece control process described later.
Then, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol fluctuation start processing (step 1401), normal symbol fluctuation stop processing (step 1402), and normal symbol stop post processing (step 1403) or the movable piece control process (step 1404). Then, the general map related control process is ended.

Next, the normal symbol variation start process of step 1401 mentioned above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37.
In step 1500, the main CPU 101 determines whether the normal symbol execution phase data is "10" indicating the execution of the normal symbol variation start process. Then, when it is determined that the ordinary symbol execution phase data is not "10", the ordinary symbol variation start process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ordinary pattern execution phase data is "10", the process advances to the next step 1501.
In step 1501, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determined random number is stored in the ordinary figure reservation storage area, that is, whether or not the ordinary figure reservation number counter is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the ordinary symbol reservation number counter is not greater than "1" (that is, "0"), the ordinary symbol variation start process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the general figure reservation number counter is "1" or more, the process advances to the next step 1502.

In step 1502, the main CPU 101 decrements the value of the ordinary figure reservation counter by "1". Then, the process advances to the next step 1503.
In step 1503, the main CPU 101 executes a shift process of the general drawing reservation storage area. Specifically, the winning determination random numbers stored in the first storage section are stored in a predetermined processing area provided in the main RAM 103, and the winning determination random numbers stored in the second to fourth storage sections are stored in a predetermined processing area provided in the main RAM 103. Shift the determined random number to the storage section with the next lower number. As a result, the winning determination random numbers stored in the general pattern reservation storage area are used in the winning determination process described later in a so-called first-in, first-out (FIFO) manner. Then, the process advances to step 1504.

In step 1504, the main CPU 101 selects the winning determination random number determination table 116 (first Judgment table 116a, second judgment table 116b, or third judgment table 116c) is selected, and a normal symbol is selected based on the selected table and the winning determination random number stored in the processing area in step 1503 described above. A winning determination process is executed to derive the lottery result. Specifically, the main CPU 101 refers to the first determination table 116a when in a non-time-saving game state, a special game, or a small winning game, and when in a first time-saving game state, The second determination table 116b is referred to, and if the second time-saving game state is in progress, the third determination table 116c is referred to determine the winning determination random number stored in the processing area. Then, the process advances to the next step 1505.
In step 1505, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the winning determination process in step 1504 described above is a win. If it is determined that the game is a hit, the process advances to the next step 1506. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a win (that is, a loss), the process advances to step 1507.

In step 1506, the main CPU 101 stores the winning symbol data in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 103. Then, the process advances to step 1508.
Further, in step 1507, which is proceeded to when it is determined that the result of the winning determination process is not a win (that is, a loss) in the above-mentioned step 1505, the main CPU 101 stores the loss symbol data in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 103. Then, the process advances to the next step 1508.

In step 1508, the main CPU 101 confirms whether the current state of the pachinko machine P is a non-time-saving game state, a first time-saving game state, a second time-saving game state, a special game, or a small winning game. , with reference to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table 117, the normal symbol fluctuation time corresponding to the current state of the pachinko machine P is set in the regular symbol fluctuation time timer counter. Specifically, when the main CPU 101 is in a non-time-saving game state, a special game, or a small winning game, the main CPU 101 sets the regular figure fluctuation time counter to "3 seconds", and when it is in the first time-saving game state. In one case, the normal figure fluctuation time counter is set to ``2 seconds'', and when the second time saving game state is in progress, the normal figure fluctuation time counter is set to ``0.6 seconds''. Then, the process advances to the next step 1509.
In step 1509, the main CPU 101 sets variable display data for starting variable display of normal symbols. As a result, when a variable display of normal symbols is performed, the normal symbol display device 32 starts blinking display. In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the winning determination random number is stored in the normal pattern holding storage area, the normal pattern holding display device 33 is displayed in such a manner that the number of holding normal drawings can be recognized. It has become. When a variable display of normal symbols is performed, at the same time as the start of the variable display, the display of the normal symbol reservation display device 33 is controlled so as to indicate that the number of reserved symbols decreases by one. Then, the process advances to the next step 1510.

In step 1510, the main CPU 101 stores the current state of the pachinko machine P in the gaming machine state buffer as the state of the pachinko machine P at the start of the change. Then, the process advances to the next step 1511.
In step 1511, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol execution phase data to "11" so that the normal symbol fluctuation stop process is executed in the common symbol related control process. Then, the normal symbol variation start process ends.

Next, the normal symbol fluctuation stop processing in step 1402 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38.
In step 1600, the main CPU 101 determines whether the normal symbol execution phase data is data "11" indicating execution of the normal symbol fluctuation stop process. Then, when it is determined that the ordinary symbol execution phase data is not "11", the ordinary symbol variation stop processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ordinary figure execution phase data is "11", the process advances to the next step 1601.
In step 1601, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the normal symbol fluctuation time set in the normal symbol fluctuation time timer counter in step 1508 has elapsed. Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed, the normal symbol fluctuation stop processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation time has elapsed, the process advances to the next step 1602.

In step 1602, the main CPU 101 sets stop display data for stop displaying the normal symbols on the normal symbol display device 32, and executes the stop display of the normal symbols. Then, the process advances to the next step 1603.
In step 1603, the main CPU 101 sets the variable stop display time for stopping and displaying the normal symbols in the normal symbol stop display time timer counter. Then, the process advances to the next step 1604.

In step 1604, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol execution phase data to "12" so that the normal symbol stop post-processing is executed in the normal symbol related control process. Then, the normal symbol fluctuation stop processing ends.

Next, the above-described normal symbol stop processing in step 1403 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 39.
In step 1700, the main CPU 101 determines whether the normal symbol execution phase data is data "12" indicating execution of the normal symbol stop post-processing. Then, when it is determined that the ordinary symbol execution phase data is not "12", the ordinary symbol stop post-processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ordinary figure execution phase data is "12", the process advances to the next step 1701.
In step 1701, the main CPU 101 determines whether the variable stop display time set in the general figure stop display time timer counter in step 1603 described above has elapsed. Then, when it is determined that the variable stop display time has not elapsed, the normal symbol stop post-processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation stop display time has elapsed, the process advances to the next step 1702.

In step 1702, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the stopped and displayed normal symbol is a winning symbol. If it is determined that the stopped and displayed normal symbol is not a winning symbol (that is, it is a losing symbol), the process advances to step 1704. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stopped and displayed normal symbol is a winning symbol, the process advances to the next step 1703.
In step 1703, the main CPU 101 sets the ordinary figure execution phase data to "13" so that the movable piece control process is executed in the ordinary figure related control process. Then, the normal symbol stop post-processing is completed.

In addition, in step 1704, which is proceeded to when it is determined that the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed in step 1702 is not a winning symbol (that is, it is a losing symbol), the main CPU 101 starts the normal symbol fluctuation in the common symbol related control process. Set the general figure execution phase data to "10" so that the process is executed. Then, the normal symbol stop post-processing is completed.

Next, the movable piece control process in step 1404 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 40.
In step 1800, the main CPU 101 determines whether the general pattern execution phase data is data "13" indicating execution of the movable piece control process. Then, if it is determined that the ordinary pattern execution phase data is not "13", the movable piece control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ordinary pattern execution phase data is "13", the process advances to the next step 1801.
In step 1801, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the movable piece 16b is under operation control, that is, whether or not the starting prize opening solenoid 16c is energized. If it is determined that the movable piece 16b is under operational control, the process advances to step 1804. On the other hand, if it is determined that the movable piece 16b is not under operational control, the process advances to the next step 1802.

In step 1802, the main CPU 101 determines whether the state of the pachinko machine P at the time when the normal symbols start changing is in a non-time-saving game state, in a first time-saving game state, in a second time-saving game state, in a special game, or in a small winning game. Check to see which one. Then, the process advances to the next step 1803.
In step 1803, the main CPU 101 refers to the second starting winning hole opening control table 118, and generates energization control data (opening data) for the starting winning hole solenoid 16c according to the state of the pachinko machine P confirmed in step 1802 described above. , set the number of times of energization (number of times of opening) and the number of times of energization (opening time). Then, the movable piece control process ends.

Further, in step 1804, which is proceeded when it is determined in the above-mentioned step 1801 that the movable piece 16b is under operation control, the main CPU 101 determines whether the energization time (opening time) set in the above-mentioned step 1803 has elapsed. Determine. Then, if it is determined that the energization time (opening time) has not elapsed, the movable piece control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the energization time (opening time) has elapsed, the process advances to the next step 1805.
In step 1805, the main CPU 101 stops the operation of the movable piece 16b, that is, stops the energization of the starting prize opening solenoid 16c. Then, the process advances to the next step 1806.

In step 1806, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol execution phase data to "10" so that the normal symbol fluctuation start process is executed in the common symbol related control process. Then, the movable piece control process ends.

(Playability of Pachinko machine P according to this embodiment)
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as described above, the normal gaming state (a gaming state that combines a low probability gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state), the first low probability playing time saving gaming state (a low probability gaming state and a first time saving gaming state), A second low probability time saving gaming state (a gaming state combining a low probability gaming state and a second time saving gaming state), or a high probability time saving gaming state (a high probability gaming state and a second time saving gaming state) The game progresses by setting one of the game states (a combination of game states).

When a player starts playing a game, the normal gaming state is often set. During this normal game state, as mentioned above, the game ball is directed to be launched toward the first game area 12a (so-called left-handed hitting), and as long as the game ball is launched in accordance with this instruction, the game ball will , there is a possibility that the ball will enter the first starting winning hole 15, and the ball will not enter the second starting winning hole 16. Then, a lottery is conducted based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15, and if a jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X1, X2, or X3 is determined (see FIG. 12(a)). . Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to a high probability time-saving gaming state, and the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined. In this case, the predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57 and the game state after the special game ends is set to the normal game state (see FIG. 14(a) and FIG. 41). That is, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, if the player plays left-handed as instructed during the normal gaming state, the player wins the jackpot and shifts to the normal gaming state or the high probability time-saving gaming state (Fig. 41). However, since the jackpot symbol It is extremely difficult to transition to the gaming state.

Here, if a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15 during the normal gaming state, a judgment is made as to whether or not the time-saving award is given in a lottery, and the winning of the time-saving award is determined with a probability of approximately 1/100. (See FIG. 6(a), FIG. 7(a), FIG. 8(a), FIG. 9(a), FIG. 10(a), and FIG. 11(a)). Then, when the time-saving symbols J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6, or J7 are determined, the game state is set to the first low-probability time-saving game state without going through the jackpot or special game. At the same time, when the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the first low probability time-saving gaming state continues until the result of the winning lottery is derived 10 times without winning a jackpot, and when the time-saving symbol J2 is determined. In this case, the first low-probability time-saving game state continues until the result of the winning lottery is derived 20 times without winning a jackpot, and when the time-saving symbol J3 is determined, the first low-probability time-saving game state continues. However, if the result of the lottery is drawn 30 times without winning the jackpot, and the time-saving symbol J4 is determined, the first low probability time-saving gaming state is the result of the lottery without winning the jackpot. If the time-saving symbol J5 is determined, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state continues until the result of the lottery is derived 100 times without winning a jackpot. However, when the time-saving symbol J6 is determined, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state continues until the result of the winning lottery is derived 1000 times without winning a jackpot, and when the time-saving symbol J7 is determined. In this case, the first low-probability time-saving game state continues until the result of the winning lottery is derived once without winning a jackpot.

In addition, during this first low probability time saving game state, as mentioned above, the instruction is to launch the game ball toward the first game area 12a (left-handed hit), and as long as the game ball is launched in accordance with this instruction, Similar to the normal gaming state, a lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15. Then, if a jackpot is won during this first low probability time-saving gaming state, jackpot symbols X1, X2, or X3 are determined in the same way as during the normal gaming state, and the determination probability of each jackpot symbol (determination of jackpot symbol Since the probability is 1% and the probability of determining the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined (see FIG. 12(a)). If jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined during the first low probability time-saving game state, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time-saving game state, so the game state after the end of the special game is the second A low probability time saving game state is set, and the number of time saving times is set to 10,000 (see FIG. 14(b) and FIG. 41). That is, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the time-saving symbol J2 is determined during the first low-probability time-saving game state (if the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, until the result of the winning lottery is derived 10 times). If the time-saving symbol J3 is determined, the time-saving symbol J4 is determined until the result of the winning lottery is derived 20 times, and if the time-saving symbol J3 is determined, the time-saving symbol J4 is determined until the result of the winning lottery is derived 30 times. In this case, until the result of the winning lottery is drawn 50 times, if the time saving symbol J5 is determined, until the result of the winning lottery is derived 100 times, if the time saving symbol J6 is determined. If you win the jackpot until the result of the winning lottery is drawn 1000 times, or until the result of the winning lottery is drawn once if the time saving symbol J7 is decided), it will be almost the second lowest. This will lead to a transition to the probability time saving game state (see FIG. 41).

During the second low-probability time-saving game state, as described above, the game ball is directed to be launched (right-handed) toward the second game area 12b, and as long as the game ball is launched in accordance with this instruction, the game will not be played. There is a possibility that the ball will enter the second starting winning hole 16, but it will not enter the first starting winning hole 15. Then, a lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning hole 16, and if the jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X1 or X4 is determined (see FIG. 12(b)). Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, as described above, a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57, and the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability time saving game state, and the number of time saving times is set to 10,000 times. In addition, when the jackpot symbol X4 is determined, the game state after the end of the special game due to the predetermined number of game balls not entering the specific area 57 is again set to the second low probability time-saving game state, and the time-saving game state is set again. The number of times is set to 100 (see FIG. 14(c) and FIG. 41). That is, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, if the player plays right as instructed during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state is reset by winning the jackpot. Or, it will shift to a high probability time saving gaming state (see FIG. 41). Here, when transitioning from the first low probability time saving game state to the second low probability time saving game state, the number of time saving times is set to 10,000 times, and during the second low probability time saving game state, during the normal game state or during the first low probability time saving game state. Since the second starting prize opening 16 is kept in the open state much more easily than during the time-saving game state, the next jackpot can almost certainly be won while suppressing the decrease in game balls as the game progresses. Since the jackpot symbol X1 is determined 70% of the time when a jackpot is won (see Figure 12(b)), during the second low probability time-saving game state, when a jackpot is won, It is easy to shift to a high probability time saving gaming state.

During the high-probability time-saving game state, as in the second low-probability time-saving game state, you are instructed to launch the game ball toward the second game area 12b (right-handed hit), and follow this instruction to launch the game ball. As long as the game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16, a lottery will be held based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning hole 16, and if the jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X1 or X4 will be determined (see FIG. 12(b)). ). Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57 and the gaming state after the end of the special game is again set to the high probability time saving game state, and the number of time saving times is 10000. set to times. In addition, when the jackpot symbol X4 is determined, the game state after the end of the special game without a predetermined number of game balls entering the specific area 57 is set to the second low probability time-saving game state, and the number of time-savings is 100. (see FIG. 12(c) and FIG. 41).
During the high-probability time-saving game state, as in the second low-probability time-saving game state, the player can almost certainly win the next jackpot while suppressing the decrease in game balls.

In addition, when the jackpot symbol X4 is determined in the second low probability time saving game state or the high probability time saving game state, the second low probability time saving game state with 100 time saving times is set (FIG. 12(c)) , see FIG. 41), if the player wins a jackpot before the winning lottery is performed 100 times, he can expect to transition to the high probability time-saving gaming state again.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, during the normal gaming state, the first prize is determined by the time-saving award winning (time-saving symbols J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6, or J7) based on the lottery. Aiming to transition to the probability time-saving gaming state, during the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (until the results of the winning lottery are derived 10 times, 20 times, 30 times, 50 times, 100 times, 1000 times, or 1 time) ) by winning the jackpot, the player aims to move to the second low-probability time-saving game state, and then aims to acquire many game balls by continuing the second low-probability time-saving game state and the high-probability time-saving game state. Provides novel gameplay. That is, the first low-probability time-saving game state, which can be transitioned from the normal game state without going through jackpot winning and special games, shifts to the second low-probability time-saving game state or high-probability time-saving game state that is advantageous for the player. This provides a gaming experience that creates a chance zone for players to play, increasing the player's interest.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, a determination is made as to whether or not the time-saving award is given in the lottery during the normal gaming state, and the time-saving award is won by the winning/falsifying lottery, and the time-saving symbols J1, J2, J3 , J4, J5, J6, or J7, it is possible to shift to the time-saving gaming state without winning the jackpot and executing the special game, so there is no need to play the game regarding the transition to the time-saving gaming state. Not only can this give a novel impression to the player, but also there can be a wide variety of transitions to the time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to provide an unprecedented gaming experience.
Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, in the lottery, if the jackpot is determined based on the random numbers and it is determined that the jackpot has not been won, during the normal gaming state, the same jackpot Since the determination of whether or not to grant time savings is made based on random numbers, it is possible to limit the types of random numbers used to make various determinations, reducing the load on hardware resources such as the main CPU 101 and main RAM 103. can do.
Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the probability of winning the time-saving grant is the same regardless of the setting value, so the setting value is determined by setting the time-saving gaming state that does not involve winning the jackpot. It is possible to prevent a situation where the gambling nature becomes too high when the advantage of each game changes and a predetermined set value is set.

(Summary of performance in pachinko machine P)
As mentioned above, by executing various processes in the main control board 100, the special figure game, the regular figure game, the special game, and the small winning game will proceed. During the progress of these games, the main control board 100 transmits various commands to the sub-control board 300, and the sub-control board 300 receives these commands, thereby causing the sub-control board 300 to control the progress of the game. Execute control of the production associated with the event.
In the following, a variable performance that is executed while a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and can notify the result of a win/fail lottery, and a fluctuate performance when the result of a win/fail lottery is a winning of a time-saving grant, which can be executed and A special notification effect that can notify the winning of the game and the number of time saving times in the first low probability time saving game state based on the winning will be explained.

(Summary of variable performance)
In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, as described above, during the variable display of the special symbols, a variable performance that can notify the result of the winning lottery is executed by the display mode of the performance symbol 50. In this variable performance, a variable display of performance symbols 50 (dummy symbols) is performed overlapping the background image displayed on the display section 21a of the performance display device 21. The result of the lottery can be notified to the player by the combination of performance symbols 50 that are displayed in a variable manner and then displayed in a static manner (static display mode).

Specifically, after the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the variable display of all the effect symbols 50 is started from the state in which all the effect symbols 50 are stopped and displayed (FIGS. 42(a) and (b), (See FIGS. 43(a) and (b)). Note that the downward arrow in the figure indicates that the performance pattern 50 is displayed scrolling from the top to the bottom.
After that, the effect pattern 50 located on the left side (hereinafter referred to as the first stop pattern), the effect pattern 50 located on the right side (hereinafter referred to as the second stop pattern), and the effect pattern 50 located in the center (hereinafter referred to as the third stop pattern) ) (see FIGS. 42(c) to (e) and FIGS. 43(c) to (e)).

If the result of the lottery is a jackpot, all the performance symbols 50 are stopped and displayed as the same symbol (see FIG. 43(e)). That is, by stopping and displaying all the performance symbols 50 as the same symbol, it is announced that the result of the lottery is a jackpot.

Further, if the result of the lottery is a loss, all the performance symbols 50 will not be stopped and displayed as the same symbol (see FIG. 42(e)). That is, by stopping and displaying at least one effect pattern 50 as a pattern different from the other effect patterns 50, it is shown that the result of the winning lottery is a loss. The above-mentioned stop display mode does not actively notify the player that the result of the lottery is a loss, but simply makes the player aware that the result is a loss (not a jackpot or small win). It is.
In addition, although not particularly shown, if the result of the lottery is a small win, a specific form indicating that (for example, the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol are the same symbol, The production pattern 50 is stopped and displayed in combinations such as a combination in which the third stopped pattern is a special pattern indicating winning of a small hit. That is, by stopping and displaying the effect pattern 50 in a specific manner, it is announced that the result of the winning lottery is a small winning.
In addition, the manner in which the performance symbols 50 are stopped and displayed in the case of winning a small hit is not limited to the above content, but is similar to the manner in which the result of the lottery is a loss (that is, at least one of the performance symbols 50 may be stopped and displayed in a pattern different from other effect patterns 50). Thereby, the player may not be able to grasp whether the result of the win/fail lottery is a loss or a small win based on the stop display mode of the performance symbols 50.

In addition, if the result of the winning/failure lottery is a winning of the time-saving award, a special mode indicating that (for example, the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol are the same odd number symbol other than "7", The production pattern 50 is stopped and displayed in a combination where the 3-stop pattern is "7", etc.), and a setting image indicating that the first low probability time-saving game state is set (for example, "CHANCE ZONE ENTER!!") (character images, etc.) are displayed (see FIGS. 44(g) to (h)), and the number of times saved is notified (see FIG. 44(i)). That is, by stopping and displaying the production pattern 50 in a special manner and displaying the above-mentioned setting image, it is announced that the result of the lottery is a win for time saving, and the number of time savings is announced. , the type of time-saving symbol determined is notified.

Further, the third stop symbol is stopped and displayed almost simultaneously with the stop display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31. As a result, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31 prior to the stop display of the performance symbol 50, and the result of the lottery is grasped based on the type of the special symbol. This is prevented.

(Aspects of the first half of the variable performance)
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the first half of the variable performance (from when the variable performance starts until the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol are stopped and displayed) includes the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol. There is a no-reach pattern in which symbols are stopped and displayed with different symbols, and a reach variation pattern in which the first and second stop symbols are stopped and displayed as the same symbol (a so-called reach display is performed). There is.

There are multiple types of reach-free patterns and reach variation patterns, and various ways of variation are set.
Specifically, as a no-reach pattern, there is a no-reach pattern A in which the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol are stopped and displayed as different symbols without any particular change in the way of variation or the display content of the production symbol 50. , all the performance symbols 50 temporarily stop in a predetermined stop display mode (for example, the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol are symbols with numbers different by 1 and temporarily stop, and the third stop symbol suggests a temporary stop). After a pseudo-continuous performance is executed in which the display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, once) in which the variable display is restarted (temporarily stopping at the stop symbol), the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol are different symbols. There is a no-reach pattern B that is displayed in a stopped state.
In addition, as a reach variation pattern, there is a reach variation pattern A in which the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol are stopped and displayed as the same symbol without any particular change in the way of variation or the display content of the performance symbol 50, as described above. A reach variation pattern B is provided in which the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol are stopped and displayed as different symbols after the pseudo-continuous performance is executed.

Note that various times and various times may be set for the number of temporary stops and the timing for temporary stopping in the pseudo-continuous performance. In addition, it is set so that the above-mentioned temporary stop is performed a specific number of times (for example, 4 times) to execute a pseudo continuous effect only when winning a jackpot or winning a time saving award, and the pseudo continuous effect is When executed, it may be possible to understand that the winning of the jackpot or the winning of the time saving grant is confirmed. In addition, we have set up a pseudo continuous effect in which after the reach display is performed, the third stop symbol is temporarily stopped, and then the fluctuating display is resumed. The execution rate of consecutive performances may be set to be high.
Further, the no-reach pattern and the variable reach pattern are not limited to the above-mentioned embodiments. For example, as a reach variation pattern, a reach display in which the first stop symbol and a second stop symbol are the same and are stopped and displayed is not performed, and instead of performing the reach display, a predetermined image is displayed to indicate that a reach has occurred. A mode of notifying by displaying the information may also be provided.

(Aspects of the second half of the fluctuating performance)
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the first half of the variable performance is a no-reach pattern, the second half of the variable performance (the second stop symbol is stopped and displayed, then the third stop symbol is stopped and displayed) As an aspect of (up to)), a normal loss pattern is provided in which the third stop symbol is stopped and displayed as it is to notify that the result of the lottery is a loss (see FIG. 42).
As the second half of the variable performance when the first half of the variable performance is a reach variation pattern, after the reach is displayed, a predetermined developed performance image is displayed on the performance display device 21 along with the variable display of the third stop symbol. A pattern with development (see Figure 44) that informs that the reach development effect is executed and the result of the lottery is a jackpot win, a small win, a time saving win, or a loss, and the above-mentioned reach after the reach display is displayed. A no-development pattern (see FIG. 43) is provided to notify that the result of the lottery is a jackpot win, a small win, a time-saving grant win, or a loss without executing the development effect.

A plurality of types of patterns with development are provided, and various types of development effect images are set. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, a developed pattern A and a developed pattern B are provided as patterns with development.
In development pattern A, a moving image (hereinafter referred to as development effect image A) is displayed in which the effect patterns 50 are sequentially destroyed and the finally displayed effect pattern 50 is determined as the third stop pattern. Yes (see FIGS. 44(e) to (g)), and as described later, it can be executed in any case of winning a jackpot, winning a small winning, winning a time saving grant, or losing. .
When development pattern A is executed and the result of the lottery is a jackpot, a display is displayed to the effect that the effect pattern 50 that constitutes a stop display mode that ultimately results in a jackpot is reached. When the result of the win/fail lottery is a small win, a display indicating that the performance pattern 50 that constitutes the stop display mode that ultimately results in a small win is reached is displayed, and the result of the win/fail lottery is shortened. When it is a winning of the grant, a display indicating that the production pattern 50 that constitutes the stop display mode that ultimately becomes the winning of the time saving grant is displayed (see FIGS. 44(e) to (g)), and a lottery is held. When the result is a loss, it is set so that a display indicating that the performance symbol 50 constituting the stop display mode that ultimately results in a loss is reached is displayed. This makes it possible to notify whether the result of the lottery is a jackpot, a small win, a time-saving award, or a loss.

Although not particularly illustrated, the development pattern B is one in which a moving image is displayed in which a predetermined character challenges a mission and the result of the challenge is shown.
This development pattern B has four types of patterns: development pattern B1, development pattern B2, development pattern B3, and development pattern B4. For each pattern, the content of the mission to be challenged is displayed as a moving image. A developed effect image B1, a developed effect image B2, a developed effect image B3, or a developed effect image B4, each having a different value, are associated with each other. Specifically, in the developed pattern B1, the developed effect image B1 is displayed, in the developed pattern B2, the developed effect image B2 is displayed, in the developed pattern B3, the developed effect image B3 is displayed, and in the developed pattern B4, the developed effect image B4 is displayed. is set to be displayed.

Further, as will be described later, this development pattern B can only be executed in the case of winning a jackpot or winning a time saving award.
When the development pattern B1, development pattern B2, development pattern B3, or development pattern B4 is executed, if the result of the lottery is a jackpot, it will be announced that the above-mentioned mission was finally successful. After this is displayed, a stop display mode that indicates a jackpot is displayed (see Figures 46(b) to (d)), and if the result of the lottery is a winning of the time saving award, the above-mentioned final result will be displayed. After the mission failure is displayed, the setting image indicating that the first low probability time saving game state is set and the number of time saving times are displayed (see FIGS. 45(e) to (h)). has been done. Thereby, it is announced whether the result of the lottery is a jackpot win or a time-saving prize win.
In this way, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when the variable performance according to the development pattern B is executed, it is determined that the result of the winning lottery is either a jackpot winning or a time saving award winning. , it is possible to increase the player's interest in executing the variable performance based on the development pattern B.

Note that the pattern with development is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiment. For example, as a pattern with development, after a predetermined development effect image is displayed, another development effect image whose expectation level of winning a jackpot or winning a time-saving award is set higher than that of the development effect image concerned is displayed. A mode may be provided in which the display changes, or a mode in which the winning of a jackpot or the winning of a time-saving award is notified after being notified of a loss.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, as a mode of variable production, apart from the above-mentioned various modes, from a state in which all the production symbols 50 are displayed in a variable manner, these production symbols 50 are changed after a lapse of a variation time. A special fluctuation pattern is provided in which all the characters are stopped and displayed all at once.

Furthermore, in each of the above effects, in addition to displaying images, predetermined sounds may be output, and the effect lighting device 23 (lamp) may be made to emit light in a predetermined lighting pattern or color.

(Determination of the mode of variable production)
Next, the determination of the execution mode of the above-mentioned variable effect will be explained.
The main ROM 302 of the sub-control board 300 stores a variable effect determination table 119 that defines the mode of variable effects for each variable pattern command that can be determined by the main control board 100. When the sub CPU 301 of the sub control board 300 receives the variation pattern command from the main control board 100 at the start of variation, it refers to the variation effect determination table 119 and determines the mode of the variation effect based on the received variation pattern command. do.

In the variable effect determination table 119, modes of variable effects are defined in association with variable pattern commands and variable effect random numbers obtained within a predetermined numerical range (0 to 249 in this embodiment). When the sub CPU 301 of the sub control board 300 receives the variation pattern command from the main control board 100, it obtains a variation effect random number of 1 from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 249). Then, the sub CPU 301 determines the mode of the variable effect based on the variable effect determination table 119, the received variation pattern command, and the obtained variable effect random number. As a result, a variable performance based on the determined mode is executed on the performance display device 21.

As shown in FIG. 47, according to the variation effect determination table 119, if the received variation pattern command is "00H", "04H", "05H", or "08H" (that is, the result of the lottery is a loss). ), the first half is a no-reach pattern A and the second half is a normal losing pattern (hereinafter referred to as Aspect 1), or the first half is a no-reach pattern B and the second half is a normal losing pattern. (hereinafter referred to as aspect 2) is determined.

In addition, if the received variation pattern command is "01H" (that is, if the result of the lottery is a loss), the first half is a reach variation pattern A and the second half is a no-development pattern (hereinafter referred to as , Aspect 3) or an aspect in which the first half is the reach variation pattern B and the second half is the no-development pattern (hereinafter referred to as Aspect 9) is determined.

In addition, if the received variation pattern command is "02H", "03H", "06H", or "07H" (that is, if the result of the lottery is a loss), the first half is the reach variation pattern. Either an aspect in which A and the latter half are development pattern A (hereinafter referred to as aspect 4), or an aspect in which the first half is reach variation pattern B and the latter part is development pattern A (hereinafter referred to as aspect 10) is determined. .

In addition, if the received fluctuation pattern command is "22H", "23H", "26H" or "27H" (that is, if the result of the lottery is a small win), mode 4 or Either aspect 10 is determined.

In addition, if the received fluctuation pattern command is "A2H", "A3H", "A6H" or "A7H" (that is, if the result of the lottery is a jackpot), mode 4, the first half The first half is reach variation pattern A and the second half is development pattern B1 (hereinafter referred to as Aspect 5), the first half is reach variation pattern A and the second half is development pattern B2 (hereinafter referred to as Aspect 6), and the first half is Reach variation pattern A and the latter half are developed pattern B3 (hereinafter referred to as aspect 7), first half is reach fluctuation pattern A and the latter half is developed pattern B4 (hereinafter referred to as aspect 8), aspect 10, first half is the reach variation pattern B and the latter half is the form of the developed pattern B1 (hereinafter referred to as Aspect 11), the first half is the reach variation pattern B and the latter half is the form of the developed pattern B2 (hereinafter referred to as Aspect 12), and the first half is the reach Either the variation pattern B and the latter half are developed pattern B3 (hereinafter referred to as Aspect 13), or the first half is reach variation pattern B and the latter half is developed pattern B4 (hereinafter referred to as Aspect 14). be done.

In addition, when the received variation pattern command is "B3H" (that is, when the result of the lottery is the winning of time saving and the time saving symbol J1 (10 times of time saving) is determined, mode 4 , aspect 5, aspect 10, or aspect 11 is determined.

In addition, if the received variation pattern command is "B4H" (that is, if the result of the winning lottery is a time saving award and the time saving symbol J2 (20 time saving times) is determined) or "B5H" (In other words, when the result of the winning lottery is the winning of the time saving grant and the time saving symbol J3 (30 times of time saving) is determined), aspect 4, aspect 5, aspect 6, aspect 10, aspect 11 Alternatively, either aspect 12 is determined.

In addition, if the received variation pattern command is "B6H" (that is, if the result of the lottery is a time saving award and the time saving symbol J4 (50 time saving times) is determined) or "B7H" (In other words, when the result of the lottery is the winning of the time saving award and the time saving symbol J5 (100 times of time saving) is determined), aspect 4, aspect 5, aspect 6, aspect 7, aspect 10 , aspect 11, aspect 12, or aspect 13 is determined.

In addition, when the received variation pattern command is "B8H" (that is, when the result of the lottery is the winning of time saving and the time saving symbol J6 (1000 times of time saving) is determined, mode 4 , aspect 5, aspect 6, aspect 7, aspect 8, aspect 10, aspect 11, aspect 12, aspect 13, or aspect 14 is determined.

In addition, when the received variation pattern command is "B9H" (that is, when the result of the lottery is a time-saving award and the time-saving symbol J7 (one time-saving number) is determined, mode 4 Alternatively, either aspect 10 is determined.

In addition, if the received fluctuation pattern command is "BAH", "BBH", "BCH", "BDH", "BEH", or "BFH" (in other words, the result of the lottery is the winning of the time-saving grant) case), a special fluctuation pattern (hereinafter referred to as aspect 15) is determined.

In addition, in FIG. 47, the numbers shown in each area in which a variation pattern command and a variation effect mode are associated are the range of the variation effect random number assigned to the area, that is, the selection ratio (determined) of the area. percentage).
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, regarding the aspect of the variable performance, if the result of the lottery is a loss, in the case of a jackpot win, in the case of a small win win, or in the case of a time-saving award win, a predetermined time-saving symbol is determined. The selection ratio for each case is set separately.

For example, if the result of the lottery is a jackpot win or a time-saving prize win, compared to a loss or a small win, the determination rate of reach variation pattern A is lower, but the reach variation pattern The decision rate for B is high. Therefore, when the reach variation pattern B is executed, the level of expectation for winning a jackpot or winning a time-saving award is higher than when the reach variation pattern A is executed.

In addition, regarding development pattern A, the result of the lottery can be determined regardless of whether it is a loss, a small win, a jackpot, or a time saving award, but development pattern B ( Regarding B1, B2, B3, and B4), the result of the lottery can be determined only in the case of winning a jackpot or winning a time-saving award. Therefore, when the development pattern B is executed, the winning of the jackpot or the winning of the time saving grant is confirmed, and it is possible to grasp that either of these wins has been won.

In addition, regarding development pattern B1, the result of the lottery is the winning of time saving, and the time saving symbols J1 (number of time reductions: 10 times), J2 (number of time reductions: 20 times), J3 (number of time reductions: 30 times), J4 (number of time reductions: 50 times). ), J5 (number of time reductions: 100 times), or J6 (number of time reductions: 1000 times) is determined. Regarding the development pattern B2, the result of the lottery is a time-saving award and can be determined when the time-saving symbols J2, J3, J4, J5, or J6 are determined. Regarding the development pattern B3, the result of the lottery is a time-saving award, and it can be determined when the time-saving symbols J4, J5, or J6 are determined. Regarding the development pattern B4, the result of the lottery is a time-saving award and can be determined when the time-saving symbol J6 is determined.
That is, in the case where the result of the lottery is a time-saving award, when the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, only the developed pattern B1 of the developed patterns B can be determined, and the time-saving symbol J2 or J3 When is determined, development pattern B1 and development pattern B2 of development pattern B can be determined, and when time saving symbol J4 or J5 is determined, development pattern B1 and development pattern of development pattern B can be determined. B2, developed pattern B3 can be determined, and when time-saving pattern J6 is determined, all of developed pattern B1, developed pattern B2, developed pattern B3, and developed pattern B4 of developed pattern B can be determined. It looks like this.

In other words, when the time-saving pattern J1 with a set time-saving number of 10 times is determined and the developed pattern B is executed, the execution rate of the developed pattern B1 is 100%, and the execution rate of the developed patterns B2, B3, and B4 is 100%. The percentages are all 0%, and the development pattern B is executed when the time saving symbol J2 in which the number of time savings is determined is 20 times or the time saving symbol J3 in which the number of time savings is determined is 30 times is determined. Sometimes, the execution rate of the developed patterns B1 and B2 is both 50%, and the execution rate of the developed patterns B3 and B4 is both 0%, and the time saving pattern J4 with a set number of time saving times of 50 is determined or the time saving pattern is When developed pattern B is executed when the time-saving pattern J5 with a predetermined number of times of 100 times is determined, the execution ratio of developed patterns B1, B2, and B3 is all about 33%, and the execution ratio of developed pattern B4 is 0. %, and when the development pattern B is executed when the time-saving pattern J6 with a set time-saving number of 1000 times is determined, the execution ratio of the development patterns B1, B2, B3, and B4 is all 25%. That is, the execution ratios of the development patterns B1, B2, B3, and B4 vary depending on the set number of time reductions.

When development pattern B1 is executed, a jackpot is won, or a time saving grant is made in which the number of time saving times is set to 10 times or more (10 times, 20 times, 30 times, 50 times, 100 times or 1000 times). The election is confirmed. In addition, if development pattern B2 is executed, a jackpot win or a time-saving award where the number of time-savings is set to 20 or more (20, 30, 50, 100, or 1000 times) is won. Determine. Furthermore, when the development pattern B3 is executed, the winning of a jackpot or the winning of a time saving grant where the number of time saving times is set to 50 times or more (50 times, 100 times, or 1000 times) is confirmed. Further, when the development pattern B4 is executed, the winning of the jackpot or the winning of the time saving award where the number of time saving times is set to 1000 is confirmed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the execution ratio of the developed patterns B1, B2, B3, and B4 differs depending on the number of time reductions when the time reduction grant is won, and the executed development patterns Since it is possible to give the player a different sense of expectation regarding the number of time reductions that can be set for each type of B, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the variable effects based on the development patterns B1, B2, B3, and B4. .

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the result of the lottery is a jackpot, and when the result of the lottery is a time-saving award, the development patterns B1, B2, B3 , B4 can be executed, but if the result of the lottery is a small win or a loss, the variable effects based on the development patterns B1, B2, B3, and B4 are not executed. In other words, the development patterns B1, B2, B3, and B4 are better when the result of the lottery is a jackpot or a time-saving award than when the result is a small win or a loss. The execution rate of variable effects is high. Therefore, by executing the fluctuating performance based on the development patterns B1, B2, B3, and B4, it is possible to improve expectations for winning a jackpot or winning a time-saving award. It is possible to increase the player's interest in the variable performance.

Note that the fluctuating effects based on development patterns B1, B2, B3, and B4 are not executed when the result of the lottery is a small win or a loss, but rather when the result of the lottery is a big win or a loss. It may be configured to be executed at a lower rate than in the case of winning the time saving grant.

In addition, during the fluctuating performance, in addition to the fluctuating display of the performance symbols 50, various preview images are displayed that indicate the level of expectation of winning a jackpot or winning a time-saving award. ing.

In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the above-mentioned preview performance is individually set to have a high or low probability of being executed when winning a jackpot or winning a time-saving award. This makes it possible to change the player's expectations for winning a jackpot or winning a time-saving award in accordance with the preview performance that is executed. Specifically, certain preview performances are set to have a high probability of being executed when winning a jackpot or winning a time-saving grant, so players may This will increase expectations.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, it is set that the possibility that a specific preview effect will be executed is higher when the player wins a time-saving award than when the player wins a jackpot.

For example, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, it is possible to execute a line preview in which a predetermined character's line is displayed as a preview performance that is executed before the reach display during a variable performance. There is. There are three patterns of dialogue announcements: dialogue announcement A, dialogue announcement B, and dialogue announcement C.
Further, as a preview performance executed after the reach display during the variable performance, a cut-in preview in which a predetermined cut-in image is displayed can be executed. Cut-in notices include a blue cut-in notice that displays a blue cut-in image, a red cut-in notice that displays a red cut-in image, and a purple cut-in notice that displays a purple cut-in image. Three patterns are provided.

Then, if the winner of the time saving grant is selected by the lottery, it is possible to execute dialogue announcement A and dialogue announcement B as dialogue announcements, and in the above case, the rate at which dialogue announcement A is executed is 15%. The rate at which dialogue announcement B is executed is 10%. In addition, as cut-in notices, blue cut-in notices, red cut-in notices, and purple cut-in notices can be executed, and in the above cases, the rate of execution of blue cut-in notices is 10%, and the rate of execution of red cut-in notices is 10%. The execution rate is 40%, and the execution rate of purple cut-in notices is 55%.

In addition, if a jackpot is won in the lottery, dialogue announcements A, B, and C can be executed as dialogue announcements, and in this case, the rate at which dialogue announcement A is executed is is 15%, the rate at which line preview B is executed is 20%, and the rate at which line preview C is executed is 25%. In addition, blue cut-in notices and red cut-in notices can be executed as cut-in notices, and in the above case, the rate at which blue cut-in notices are executed is 10%, and the rate at which red cut-in notices are executed is It is 25%.

In addition, in the event of a loss or a small win in the lottery, it is possible to execute dialogue announcement A and dialogue announcement B as dialogue announcements, and in this case, the rate at which dialogue announcement A is executed is 3%, and the rate at which dialogue preview B is executed is 5%. In addition, blue cut-in notices and red cut-in notices can be executed as cut-in notices, and in the above case, the rate at which blue cut-in notices are executed is 5%, and the rate at which red cut-in notices are executed is It is 10%.

In other words, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when a time saving award is won, the rate at which the line preview A is executed is the same, and the rate at which the line preview B is executed is the same, compared to when the jackpot is won. Since the proportion of dialogue announcements that occur and the ratio of dialogue announcements C that are executed are both small, when dialogue announcements B and dialogue announcements C are executed, it is possible to create a feeling of anticipation in the player for winning the jackpot. ing. Note that the line preview C can only be executed if the jackpot is won, so if the line preview C is executed, the jackpot win is confirmed and the player's interest can be increased. ing.

On the other hand, when winning a time-saving award, compared to winning a jackpot, the percentage of blue cut-in notices executed is the same, the percentage of red cut-in notices executed, and the percentage of purple cut-in notices executed are the same. Since the percentage of cut-in notices executed is high, when a red cut-in notice or a purple cut-in notice is executed, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation among players for winning the time-saving award. ing. Note that the purple cut-in notice can only be executed if the time-saving grant is won, so if the purple cut-in notice is executed, the time-saving grant is confirmed and increases the player's interest. It is now possible to do so.
As a result, it is possible to raise players' expectations for winning a time-saving grant that has a high possibility of transitioning to a high-probability time-saving gaming state, rather than winning a jackpot where it is extremely difficult to transition to a high-probability time-saving gaming state. It has become.

Note that the performances that can be executed by the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment are not limited to the above-mentioned variable performances, but, for example, the performances that can be executed from before the execution of the variable performances related to the hold stored in the hold storage area. A look-ahead effect may be provided that gives suggestions regarding suspension.
Specifically, as a look-ahead effect, when a new reservation is memorized, multiple modes including a normal mode and a special mode in which the expectation of winning a jackpot or winning a time-saving grant are higher than the normal mode, etc. A pending look-ahead effect that displays a pending display in one of the following modes, a pending display that is displayed in a predetermined mode at any timing from the time when the pending is stored until the fluctuating effect based on the pending ends. When a new hold is memorized, a change effect that changes the hold change to a state in which the expectation level of winning a jackpot or winning a time-saving award is high, and when a new hold is memorized, a change effect based on the hold is in progress, or from the hold. A high expectation level suggestion that suggests that there is a high expectation of winning a jackpot or winning a time-saving award, spanning multiple variable performances from a previously stored variable performance based on the hold to a variable performance based on the hold. A look-ahead zone effect or the like that displays an image (for example, a background image, etc.) may be provided.

In addition, in the case of winning the time-saving award, it is more likely that the above-mentioned pending look-ahead effect where the hold display is displayed in the special mode, the hold change look-ahead effect, the look-ahead zone effect, etc. will be performed if you win the time saving award than if you win the jackpot. It may also be set to increase the performance.

For example, as shown in FIG. 49, as a pending change look-ahead effect, there is a blue pending change in which a white pending display changes to a blue pending display, a red pending change in which a white pending display changes to a red pending display, and a white pending display. There are three patterns of purple pending change, in which the pending display changes to a purple pending display, and as a look-ahead zone effect, a zone A where a first high expectation level suggestion image is displayed, and a second high expectation level suggestion image. It is assumed that three patterns are provided: zone B where is displayed, and zone C where a third high expectation suggestion image is displayed.

If any of the stored reservations is determined to be a winner of the time saving grant by lottery, the reservation change pre-reading effect for the above-mentioned reservations will be a blue reservation change, a red reservation change, and a purple reservation change. In the above case, the rate at which blue pending changes are executed may be 10%, the rate at which red pending changes are executed may be 40%, and the rate at which purple pending changes are executed may be 55%. . In addition, Zone A and Zone B can be executed as a look-ahead zone effect targeting the above-mentioned hold, and in the above case, the rate at which Zone A is executed is 15%, and the rate at which Zone B is executed is 10%. It may also be expressed as a percentage.

In addition, if any of the stored reservations is determined to have won a jackpot by lottery, it is possible to execute the blue reservation change and red reservation change as a reservation change look-ahead performance targeting the reservations mentioned above. In the above case, the rate at which the blue hold change is executed may be 10%, and the rate at which the red hold change is executed may be 25%. In addition, Zone A, Zone B, and Zone C can be executed as pre-read zone effects for the above-mentioned hold, and in this case, the rate at which Zone A is executed is 15%, and the rate at which Zone B is executed is 15%. The rate at which zone C is executed may be 20%, and the rate at which zone C is executed may be 25%.

In addition, if any of the stored reservations is determined to be a loss or a small win by lottery, a blue reservation change and a red reservation change will be displayed as a reservation change look-ahead effect for the reservation mentioned above. In the case described above, the rate at which the blue pending change is executed may be 5%, and the rate at which the red pending change is executed may be 10%. In addition, Zone A and Zone B can be executed as a look-ahead zone effect for the above-mentioned hold, and in this case, the rate at which Zone A is executed is 3%, and the rate at which Zone B is executed is 3%. It may be set to 5%.

In other words, when the settings are made as described above, when it is determined that the time-saving award is won, the rate at which the blue pending change is executed is the same as when it is determined that the jackpot is won, and the rate at which the red pending change is executed is the same. Since both the percentage of execution and the percentage of execution of the purple pending change are high, when the red pending change and the purple pending change are executed, it is possible to make the player have expectations for winning the time saving award. In addition, the purple pending change can only be executed when it is determined that the time saving award has been won, so if the purple pending change is executed, the decision to award the time saving is confirmed and the player's interest is increased. is now possible.
Even when set in this way, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for winning the time-saving award rather than winning the jackpot.

In addition, when the settings are made as described above, when it is determined that the time-saving award has been won, the rate at which Zone A is executed is the same, and when Zone B is executed, compared to when it is determined that the jackpot has been won. Since both the percentage and the percentage at which Zone C is executed are small, when Zone B or Zone C is executed, it is possible to make the player feel hopeful of winning the jackpot. Note that Zone C can only be executed when it is determined that a jackpot has been won, so if Zone C is executed, the jackpot is confirmed and the player's interest can be increased. It has become.

(Summary of special announcement performance)
The special notification performance is when the result of the lottery is a time-saving award and a fluctuation performance based on a special fluctuation pattern is performed (i.e., the determined fluctuation pattern command is "BAH", "BBH", "BCH", "``BDH'',``BEH'' or ``BFH'') is a performance that can be executed in conjunction with the relevant variable performance, and the winning of time saving grant and the number of time saving times of the first low probability time saving gaming state based on the winning. It is something that can be reported.

This special notification performance starts after the fluctuation performance is started, after the fluctuation time predetermined for each fluctuation pattern command has passed, and after the fluctuation performance ends, the stop display time predetermined for each special symbol (time-saving symbol are configured to continue to be executed until 3 seconds have passed.
Specifically, in the special notification performance, after a predetermined period of time (2 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, all images (performance patterns 50 . 50(a)-(c)). Then, when a predetermined blackout performance execution time (4 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed, a variable display of a performance pattern 50 smaller in size than the performance pattern 50 before the start of the blackout performance starts in the upper right corner of the display section 21a. As a result, the variable effect is restarted, and a window is displayed in the center of the display section 21a, and the count-up display of numbers is started within this window (see FIG. 50(d)). The count-up display is executed until the variation time specified in the variation pattern command has elapsed (see FIGS. 50(e) to 50(h)). Then, when the variable time has elapsed, the numbers in the window mentioned above will reach the number of time savers corresponding to the time saver symbol determined based on the time saver winning, and will count up as the variable effect ends. The display ends (see FIG. 50(h)). After that, until the stop display time elapses, a setting image indicating that the first low probability time saving game state is set and the number of time saving times are displayed (see FIGS. 50(i) to (j)), The special notification effect ends as the stop display time elapses.

In the count-up display described above, until the number in the window reaches a predetermined value (20 in this embodiment), the number in the window increases by a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 20) every predetermined count time (1 second in this embodiment). In this case, the display increases by 1) (see FIGS. 50(d) to (e)).
Also, when the number in the window reaches ``10'' or ``20'' (i.e., the value of the number of time reductions that can be set), the display moves back and forth between the currently displayed number and the next number. An inciting effect that arouses the anticipation of counting up to the next number is executed (see FIGS. 50(f) to (g), FIGS. 51(a) to (d), and FIG. 52(a)). Here, if a time saving symbol corresponding to a greater number of time saving times than the number being displayed has been determined, it will count up to the next number through the above-mentioned inciting effect, and then the count up display will continue. (See FIGS. 51(a)-(b)). On the other hand, if a time saving symbol corresponding to the same time saving number as the number being displayed has been determined, the count-up display ends at the number being displayed without counting up to the next number at the end of the inciting effect. (In other words, at this point, the variable time has elapsed and the variable effect ends), and then the above-mentioned setting image and the number of time reductions are displayed (Fig. 50 (h) to (j), Fig. 51 (e) to (see (g)).

Also, if a time saving symbol corresponding to a time saving number exceeding 20 times (30 times, 50 times, 100 times, 1000 times) has been determined, the number in the window will exceed "20" and the count-up display will be displayed. However, after the number in the window exceeds "20" after the above-mentioned inciting effect, the number in the window will be covered by a predetermined shielding image (for example, an image saying "???"). A shielding effect in which the image is hidden is executed (see FIG. 52(b)). Then, when the time corresponding to the determined number of time reductions has elapsed, the shielding image is erased, and a number indicating the determined number of time reductions is suddenly displayed in the window, and the count-up display ends (i.e., At this point, the variable time has elapsed and the variable effect ends), and then the above-mentioned setting image and the number of time reductions are displayed (see FIGS. 52(c) to 52(e)). By obscuring the numbers in the window with the occlusion image in this way, the player is given a sense of anticipation for the numbers that will eventually be displayed in the window (i.e., the number of time-savings corresponding to the determined time-saving symbol). can be improved.

The progress of the special notification effect will be explained in more detail below.
(1) When the time saving symbol J1 (time saving number of 10 times) is determined and the variation pattern command "BAH" (variation time 18 seconds) is determined In this case, as shown in FIG. 53(a), the special variation A blackout effect is started two seconds after the start of the variable effect based on the pattern, and the blackout effect is ended and a count-up display is started six seconds after the start of the variable effect. Then, 16 seconds after the start of the fluctuation effect, the number in the window reaches "10" and the excitement effect is executed, and 18 seconds after the start of the change effect, the excitement effect ends and the number in the window reaches "10". It will stop as it is. Additionally, at this point, the variable performance ends. Thereafter, the above-mentioned setting image and the number of times of time saving are displayed until the stop display time of 3 seconds has elapsed, and the special notification effect ends.
That is, when the number of time reductions is set to 10 times, the execution time of the special notification effect is 21 seconds from the start of the variable effect until the end of the variable effect and the elapse of the stop display time.

(2) When time saving symbol J2 (time saving number of times 20 times) is determined and variation pattern command “BBH” (variation time 30 seconds) is determined In this case, as shown in FIG. 53(b), special variation Until 18 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variable effect based on the pattern, the special notification effect will proceed in the same way as in (1), but after 18 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variable effect and the excitement effect has ended, the numbers in the window will exceeds "10" and the count-up display continues. Then, 28 seconds after the start of the fluctuation effect, the number in the window reaches "20" and the excitement effect is executed, and 30 seconds after the start of the change effect, the excitement effect ends and the number in the window reaches "20". It will stop as it is. Additionally, at this point, the variable performance ends. Thereafter, the above-mentioned setting image and the number of times of time saving are displayed until the stop display time of 3 seconds has elapsed, and the special notification effect ends.
In other words, when the number of time reductions is set to 20, the execution time of the special notification effect is 33 seconds from the start of the variable effect to the end of the variable effect and the elapse of the stop display time, and the number of time reductions is 10. It is longer than the execution time of the special notification effect when it is set.

(3) When the time saving symbol J3 (30 time saving times) is determined and the variation pattern command "BCH" (variation time 36 seconds) is determined. In this case, as shown in FIG. 53(c), the special variation Until 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuating performance based on the pattern, the special notification performance will proceed in the same way as in (2), but after 30 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuating performance and the inciting performance has ended, the shielding performance will be executed. be done. Then, 36 seconds after the start of the variable effect, the shielding effect ends, the shielding image is erased, and the number "30" is displayed in the window. At the same time, the variable performance ends at this point. Thereafter, the above-mentioned setting image and the number of time saving times are displayed until the stop display time of 3 seconds has elapsed, and the special notification effect ends.
In other words, when the number of time reductions is set to 30, the execution time of the special notification effect is 39 seconds from the start of the variable effect to the end of the variable effect and the elapse of the stop display time, and the number of time reductions is 10, This is longer than the execution time of the special notification effect when 20 times is set.

(4) When the time saving symbol J4 (time saving number of times 50 times) is determined and the variation pattern command "BDH" (variation time 46 seconds) is determined In this case, as shown in FIG. 54(a), the variation effect The special notification effect proceeds in the same manner as in (3) until 30 seconds have elapsed from the start and the shielding effect is executed. Thereafter, 46 seconds after the start of the variable effect, the occlusion effect ends, the occlusion image is erased, and the number "50" is displayed in the window. At the same time, the variable performance ends at this point. Thereafter, the above-mentioned setting image and the number of times of time saving are displayed until the stop display time of 3 seconds has elapsed, and the special notification effect ends.
That is, when the number of time reductions is set to 50, the execution time of the special notification effect is 49 seconds from when the variable effect starts until the time when the variable effect ends and the stop display time elapses, and the number of time reductions is 10, This is longer than the execution time of the special notification effect when 20 or 30 times are set.

(5) When the time saving symbol J5 (100 times of time saving) is determined and the fluctuation pattern command "BEH" (66 seconds of fluctuation time) is determined. In this case, as shown in FIG. 54(b), the fluctuation effect The special notification effect proceeds in the same manner as in (3) and (4) until 30 seconds have elapsed from the start and the shielding effect is executed. Thereafter, 66 seconds after the start of the variable effect, the occlusion effect ends, the occlusion image is erased, and the number "100" is displayed in the window. At the same time, the variable performance ends at this point. Thereafter, the above-mentioned setting image and the number of times of time saving are displayed until the stop display time of 3 seconds has elapsed, and the special notification effect ends.
In other words, when the number of time reductions is set to 100, the execution time of the special notification effect is 49 seconds from when the variable effect starts until the time when the variable effect ends and the stop display time elapses, and the number of time reductions is 10, This is longer than the execution time of the special notification effect when 20, 30, or 50 times are set.

(6) When time saving symbol J6 (time saving number of 1000 times) is determined and variation pattern command “BFH” (variation time 68 seconds) is determined In this case, as shown in FIG. 54(c), variation effect The special notification effect proceeds in the same manner as in (3) to (5) until 30 seconds have elapsed from the start and the shielding effect is executed. Thereafter, 68 seconds after the start of the variable effect, the occlusion effect ends, the occlusion image is erased, and the number "1000" is displayed in the window. At the same time, the variable performance ends at this point. Thereafter, the above-mentioned setting image and the number of time saving times are displayed until the stop display time of 3 seconds has elapsed, and the special notification effect ends.
That is, when the number of time reductions is set to 1000 times, the execution time of the special notification effect is 49 seconds from the start of the variable effect to the end of the variable effect and the elapse of the stop display time, and the number of time reductions is 10 times, This is longer than the execution time of the special notification effect when 20 times, 30 times, 50 times, and 100 times are set.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the time saving symbol J7 (one time saving number) is determined, the variation performance based on the special variation pattern is not performed, and the special notification performance is also not performed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when a time saving award is won, the greater the number of time reductions set corresponding to the determined time saving symbol, the more the special notification The execution time of the performance becomes longer. In other words, after the special notification performance is executed, the game shifts to the first low probability time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state) which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, but if the execution period of the special notification performance becomes longer, The period during which the first low-probability time-saving game state that transitions to after the execution of the performance is executed becomes longer.
Therefore, as the execution period of the special notification performance becomes longer, the gaming profit given to the player (grant of time-saving gaming state) increases, so that the player's interest in the special notification performance can be increased.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the time saving award is won and the special notification effect is executed, the game ball is sent to the second starting prize opening 16 without going through the jackpot winning and the special game. Since the first low-probability time-saving game state in which it is easy to enter the ball is set, the opening of the big prize opening 18 is carried out during the period after the special notification effect is executed until the first low-probability time-saving game state is set. You won't be hit. Therefore, the operation control of the structure (big prize opening 18) during the above-mentioned period is reduced, and the burden on hardware resources such as the main CPU 101 can be reduced.

Next, control processing in the sub-control board 300 for executing various processing as described above will be explained.
First, the main processing of the sub-control board 300 will be explained with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 55.
In step 2000, when the power is turned on, the main processing program is read from the sub-ROM 302, and initialization and setting processing of flags and the like stored in the sub-RAM 303 is executed. Then, the process advances to the next step 2001.
In step 2001, the sub CPU 301 performs a process of updating each performance random number (variable performance random number), and thereafter repeatedly executes the process of step 2001 until an interrupt process is performed. Here, each performance random number is updated asynchronously.

Next, the timer interrupt processing of the sub control board 300 will be explained with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.
The sub-control board 300 is provided with a reset clock pulse generation circuit (not particularly shown) that generates clock pulses at a predetermined period (4 milliseconds). Then, upon generation of a clock pulse by this reset clock pulse generation circuit, the sub CPU 301 reads the timer interrupt processing program and starts the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 56.

In step 2100, the sub CPU 301 executes updating processing of various timer counters used in the sub control board 300. Then, the process advances to the next step 2101.
Note that the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment employs a subtraction timer, and the timer counter is subtracted by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing of the sub-control board 300 is executed, and when it reaches 0, the subtraction is stopped. It has become.
In step 2101, the sub CPU 301 analyzes the command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 303, and executes various processes according to the received command. Specifically, in the sub control board 300, when a command is transmitted from the main control board 100, a command reception interrupt process is performed, and the command transmitted from the main control board 100 is stored in the reception buffer. Then, the sub CPU 301 analyzes the command stored in the reception buffer by command reception interrupt processing. Then, the process advances to the next step 2102.

In step 2102, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the operation of the effect operation device 9 can be accepted according to the progress status of the variable effect being executed, etc., and receives operation signals from the rotation operation detection sensor 9c and the press operation detection sensor 9d. Determine whether or not has been input. If the production operation device 9 is accepting an operation when an operation signal is input from the rotation operation detection sensor 9c or the press operation detection sensor 9d, an image indicating that the production operation device 9 has been operated is displayed. Commands are sent to the transmission buffer to be sent to various control boards such as a control board (not particularly shown), an audio control board (not shown), and an illumination control board (not shown). Store. Then, the process advances to the next step 2103.
In step 2103, the sub CPU 301 transmits the command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 303 to various control boards such as an image control board, an audio control board, and an illumination control board. Then, the timer interrupt processing of the sub control board 300 ends.

Next, of the command analysis process in step 2101 described above, the variable pattern command reception process that is executed when a variable pattern command is received will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 57. As described above, the variation pattern command is stored in step 903 of the variation pattern determination process in the main control board 100, and then transmitted to the sub control board 300 in the output control process of step 208.
In step 2200, the sub CPU 301 obtains the variable effect random number updated in step 2001 described above. Then, the process advances to the next step 2201.
In step 2201, the sub CPU 301 determines the mode of the variable effect based on the variable effect determination table 119, the variable effect random number obtained in step 2200 described above, and the received variation pattern command. Then, the process advances to the next step 2202.

In step 2202, the sub CPU 301 sets a variable effect execution command in the transmission buffer according to the determined variable effect mode. The variable effect execution command set here is transmitted to the various control boards in step 2103 described above, and these control boards control the execution of the variable effect based on the received variable effect execution command. . Then, the variable pattern command reception process ends.

In addition, the special notification performance in the above-described embodiment is started at the same time as the variable performance related to the winning of the time-saving award is started, and ends when the variable performance ends and the stop display time of the special symbol has elapsed. It was set so that the execution time of the special notification effect for each time-saving symbol (set number of time-saving symbols) would change by varying the variation time set in the variation pattern command corresponding to the time-saving symbol. It is not limited to this.
For example, although the fluctuation time set in the corresponding fluctuation pattern command is the same for all time-saving symbols, by making the stop display time different for each time-saving symbol, the time-saving symbol (the set number of time-saving symbols) The execution time of each special notification effect may be set to vary. Moreover, by varying both the above-mentioned variable time and stop display time, it may be set so that the execution time of the special notification effect for each time-saving symbol (set number of time-savings) changes.
Even when set in this way, the same effects as in the above-described embodiment can be achieved.

In addition, the special notification performance is not executed during the period from the start of the variable performance related to the winning of the time saving award until the stop display time of the special symbol after the end of the variable performance has elapsed, but rather at the start of the above-mentioned variable performance. It may also be executed during the period from to the end. Specifically, starting from a predetermined start point in the above-mentioned fluctuating performance (for example, the start time of the fluctuating performance, a point after a predetermined period of time has passed since the fluctuating performance started, etc.), and a predetermined end point in the fluctuating performance. (For example, it may be made to end at a point in time after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuating performance, at the end of the fluctuating performance, etc.).
In addition, the special notification effect is to be executed during the period from when the special figure random number (first special figure random number) that resulted in the winning of the time saving award is obtained until the end of the variable effect related to the winning of the time saving award. Good too. Specifically, for example, it is executed during a period of one variable performance (hereinafter referred to as a look-ahead variable performance) that is executed before a variable performance related to winning a time-saving grant (hereinafter referred to as the variable performance). Alternatively, it may be executed in a period that spans a plurality of look-ahead variation performances, or it may be executed in a period that spans from a look-ahead variation performance to the relevant variation performance.
When set in this way, the execution timing of the special notification effect can be varied, and the player's interest can be increased.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, it is possible to derive the winning of the time-saving grant as a result of the determination in the lottery, and when the winning of the time-saving grant is achieved, the time-saving gaming state (first time-saving gaming state) is set. However, the winning of the time-saving award is not determined as a result of the judgment in the winning/failure drawing, and may be determined based on the judgment result other than the jackpot winning (i.e., small winning winning or losing) in the winning drawing. Even if a special symbol (that is, a small winning symbol or a losing symbol) is substituted as a time-saving symbol, the propriety of setting a time-saving gaming state (appropriateness of granting time-saving) is determined according to the determined type of the above-mentioned special symbol. good.

For example, a losing symbol ZA1, a losing symbol ZA2, a losing symbol ZA3, etc. are provided as losing symbols that are determined when a winner is determined by a lottery based on a winning or failing random number, and when the losing symbol ZA1 is determined, the number of time reductions is 10 times. A first time-saving gaming state is set in which the number of time-savings is determined, and when the losing symbol ZA2 is determined, the first time-saving gaming state is set in which the number of time-savings is determined to be 20 times, and when the losing symbol ZA3 is determined, the first time-saving gaming state is set. A first time saving game state in which the number of time saving times is determined may be set. Also in this case, a variation effect based on variation pattern B similar to that of the above-described embodiment may be executed, or a special notification effect similar to that of the above-described embodiment may be executed. Good too.

Similarly, small winning symbols YA1, small winning symbol YA2, small winning symbol YA3, etc. are provided as small winning symbols to be determined when a small winning is won by a lottery based on a winning or failing random number. When YA1 is determined, a first time saving gaming state is set in which the number of time saving times is determined to be 10 times, and when the small winning symbol YA2 is determined, a first time saving gaming state is set in which the number of time saving times is determined to be 20 times. When the small winning symbol YA3 is determined, the first time saving game state in which the number of time saving times is determined to be 30 may be set. Also in this case, a variation effect based on variation pattern B similar to that of the above-described embodiment may be executed, or a special notification effect similar to that of the above-described embodiment may be executed. Good too.
In addition, as mentioned above, in the case where the time-saving gaming state is set based on the small winning symbol, the special notification performance starts after the variable performance based on the winning of the small winning starts. It may be set to be executed during the period until the winning game ends. When set in this way, the variable time of the above-mentioned variable performance, the stop display time of the special symbol, the opening time of the small winning game, the opening time of the big prize opening 18 during the small winning game, and the opening time of the small winning game. By varying one or more of the ending times, the execution time of the special notification effect for each small winning symbol may be set to vary.
In addition, the above-mentioned special notification performance is similar to the above, from the time when the special figure random number (first special figure random number) that won the small hit is acquired until the variable effect related to the winning of the small hit ends. It may also be executed during the period.
When set in this way, there will be a wide variety of time-saving award winnings, and the player's interest can be increased.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the execution time of the special notification effect is set to become longer as the number of time reductions set corresponding to the determined time reduction symbol increases. The object to be controlled is not limited to the special notification effect that can be executed when winning the time saving award. For example, if one of the jackpot symbols is determined based on the winning of the jackpot, and the number of round games to be played during the special game is determined for each jackpot symbol, It may be set so that the greater the number of round games executed in response to the jackpot symbols, the longer the variable time of the variable performance executed based on the winning of the jackpot. In other words, it may be set so that the longer the variable time of the variable performance executed based on the winning of the jackpot, the greater the number of round games during the special game executed thereafter.
In addition, the greater the number of round games that are executed in response to jackpot symbols, the longer the execution period of the predetermined look-ahead effect that can be executed before the variable effect that is executed based on the winning of the jackpot. You can also set it as follows. In other words, it may be set so that the longer the execution period of the predetermined look-ahead effect, the greater the number of round games during the special game to be executed thereafter.
When set in this way, it is possible to increase the player's interest in a variable performance based on winning a jackpot or a pre-reading performance that can be executed before the variable performance.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the big prize opening 18 is not opened during the period from when the special notification effect is executed until the first low probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state) is set. However, other winning openings (for example, the second starting winning opening 16) are opened during the period from the execution of the variable performance based on the winning of the jackpot until the start of the special game advantageous to the player. You may choose not to have one.

In addition, the fluctuating performance and special notification performance according to the development pattern B in the above-described embodiment are not only executed when a time-saving grant is won through a lottery, but also when a jackpot is won and a time-saving gaming state is set. It may also be executed when a predetermined jackpot symbol is determined.

(Modified example)
(1) In the above-described embodiment, a low-probability gaming state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively low and a non-time-saving gaming state in which the second starting prize opening 16 is relatively difficult to maintain in an open state are combined. Only in the winning/failure lottery during the normal gaming state, the judgment of the propriety of the time saving grant is made, and during other gaming states (during the high probability gaming state where the probability of winning the jackpot is relatively high or when the second starting prize opening 16 is relatively In the lottery during the time-saving gaming state that is likely to be maintained in the open state (i.e., during the first low-probability time-saving gaming state, during the second low-probability time-saving gaming state, during the high-probability time-saving gaming state), it is possible to determine whether the time-saving grant is appropriate or not. By not making a determination, it was possible to win the time-saving grant only during the normal gaming state, and not to win the time-saving grant during other gaming states. The control for this is not limited to this.

For example, as the win/fail random number determination table 110 that is referred to during the high probability game state or the time-saving game state, a table (FIG. 6 (b), FIG. 7 ( b), FIG. 8(b), FIG. 9(b), FIG. 10(b), and FIG. 11(b)), and in the winning/losing lottery during the high-probability gaming state or the time-saving gaming state, the lottery is based on the above-mentioned table. It may also be possible to determine whether or not the time saving grant is appropriate. In this case, during the high-probability game state or the time-saving game state, the time-saving award is determined based on the win/fail random number determination table 110, which does not determine that the time-saving award has been won. Similar to the embodiment, it is impossible to win the time saving grant during a gaming state other than the normal gaming state.
In addition, for example, the numerical range of the winning/losing random numbers that result in winning the time-saving award is set in the winning/losing random number determination table 110 that is referred to during the high-probability gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. In the lottery, it is determined whether or not the time-saving grant is granted based on the table, but if the winning time-saving grant is won, the determination result of the winning of the time-saving grant is forcibly rewritten to the non-winning of the time-saving grant. Alternatively, the determination result of winning the time-saving grant may be discarded. Even in this case, similarly to the above-described embodiment, it becomes impossible to win the time saving grant during a gaming state other than the normal gaming state.
In this case, the same effects as those of the above-mentioned embodiments can be achieved, and the determination in the lottery can be carried out in the same way as in the normal gaming state even in a gaming state other than the normal gaming state. Judgments in the lottery can be made common, and the processing load on hardware resources such as the main CPU 101 can be reduced.
Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the probability of winning the time-saving grant is set to be the same no matter which setting value is set, but the invention is not limited to this. , the probability of winning the time-saving grant may be set to differ depending on the set value. In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the probability of winning a time-saving award when a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15, and the probability of winning a time-saving award when a gaming ball enters the second starting winning opening 16 are determined. The probability of winning the award was set to be the same in both cases, but it is not limited to this, and there is a case where the game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 and a case where the game ball enters the second starting winning hole 16. The probability of winning the time-saving award may be set to be different depending on the case where the game ball enters the game ball. Further, the number of time saving times may be set to differ depending on the set gaming state and the type of time saving symbol determined when the time saving award is won.
When set in this way, the same effects as those of the above-mentioned embodiments are achieved, and there is a wide variety of performance variations in the time-saving gaming state, which increases the player's interest.

(2) In the above-described embodiment, when a time-saving grant is won as a result of determining whether the time-saving grant is appropriate in a lottery using a winning random number, it is different from a winning lottery using a special symbol random number that is different from the winning random number. The time saving symbol is determined by the process of determining the special symbol, and the number of time saving symbols is determined according to the type (J1, J2, J3) of the determined time reducing symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, it may be set so that both the winning of the time saving award and the determination of the number of time saving times can be determined by a winning/failure lottery using a winning/losing random number. That is, the winning of the time saving grant and the determination of the number of time saving times may be performed using the same random number and the same process instead of using separate random numbers and separate processes.
Specifically, in the win/fail random number determination table 110, a numerical range is set in which it is determined that the time-saving grant is won and a predetermined time-saving symbol is associated, and when the acquired win/fail random number belongs to the numerical range, It can be set so that the winning of time saving award and the number of time saving times defined in the time saving symbol corresponding to the numerical range are determined. For example, if the set value is 1, and the winning/losing random number determination table 110 is referred to in the winning/losing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting prize opening 15 during the low probability gaming state, the winning/losing random number is 3310 to 3637, it is determined that the time saving symbol J1 (time saving number 10 times) is associated with the winning of the time saving award, and when the winning/wrong random number is 3638 to 3964, the time saving symbol J2 (time saving number 20 times) is determined to have been won. ) can be provided (see FIG. 58). According to this table A1a, if the winning/losing random number is between 3310 and 3637, it is determined that the time saving award has been won, and the number of time saving times is determined to be 10 by determining the time saving symbol J1. Become. Further, when the winning/failing random number is between 3638 and 3964, it is determined that the time saving award has been won, and the time saving symbol J2 is determined, so that the number of time saving times is determined to be 20.
In this case, the same effects as those of the above-mentioned embodiment are achieved, and the winning of the time saving grant and the number of working hours are determined only by the process of determining the propriety of the time saving grant in the lottery. , the processing load in the lottery will be reduced.

(3) In the above-mentioned embodiment, after determining whether or not the time-saving grant is appropriate in the win/fail lottery during the normal gaming state, if the result of the determination is a winning of the time-saving grant, the number of time-saving grants is associated. Although the time-saving symbols are determined, the order of processing is not limited to this.
For example, after determining the time-saving symbol, a lottery may be performed to determine whether the time-saving award is appropriate or not. Then, when the winning of the time saving award is determined, the time saving game state (first time saving gaming state) is set, and the number of time saving times associated with the previously determined time saving symbol is set. good.
Even in this case, the same effects as in the above-described embodiment can be achieved.

(4) In the above-described embodiment, all of the judgments as to whether the jackpot is appropriate, the judgment as to whether the small win is appropriate, and the judgment as to whether the time saving grant is appropriate are executed with reference to the same random number determination table 110. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, the determination of the propriety of time-saving granting is performed using a table different from the random number determination table 110 used for determining the propriety of jackpots and the propriety of small wins, and a specific table used only for determining the propriety of time-saving granting. It may also be executed by referring to the table.
Even in this case, the same effects as in the above-described embodiment can be achieved.

(5) In the above-described embodiment, multiple types of time-saving symbols are provided that are associated with the number of time-saving symbols, and the number of time-saving symbols is determined according to the determined time-saving symbol. It is not limited to. For example, one type of time-saving symbol J is provided that is associated only with the winning of the time-saving grant, but not with the number of time-saving grants, and when the winning of the time-saving grant is determined by lottery, the relevant time-saving symbol J is determined. In addition, the number of time reductions may be determined by a specific lottery that is separate from the winning lottery.
In this case, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and the storage capacity of the special symbols in the main ROM 102 can be reduced, and the space for storing other information can be increased.

(6) In the above-described embodiment, a low-probability gaming state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively low and a non-time-saving gaming state in which it is relatively difficult to maintain the second starting prize opening 16 in an open state are combined. Only in the winning/failure lottery during the normal gaming state, it is determined whether the time saving award is appropriate or not, and it is possible to win the time saving award (determining the time saving symbols J1, J2, J3), and the probability of winning the jackpot is relative. during a high-probability gaming state, or during a time-saving gaming state in which the second starting prize opening 16 is relatively likely to be kept open (i.e., during a first low-probability time-saving gaming state, during a second low-probability time-saving gaming state, During the high probability time saving game state), in the lottery, there was no determination as to whether the time saving award was given, making it impossible to win the time saving award, but this is not limited to this. Even if there is, it may be determined whether the time saving grant is appropriate or not in the lottery.

Specifically, for example, even in a winning lottery during a first low probability time saving gaming state that combines a low probability gaming state and a first time saving gaming state (that is, during a gaming state in which the time saving gaming state is set), time saving is awarded. A determination may be made as to whether or not the above is correct, and settings may be made such that the winning of the time-saving award (time-saving symbols J1, J2, J3) can occur. Then, in the lottery during the first low-probability time-saving game state, it is determined whether the time-saving grant is appropriate or not, resulting in a time-saving grant win, and if the time-saving symbol is determined, the first time-saving game state is reset. At the same time, the number of time-savings associated with the determined time-saving symbol (10 times for time-saving symbol J1, 20 times for time-saving symbol J2, 1 time for time-saving symbol J3). You may also set it again (overwrite the current number of time reductions). For example, when the remaining number of time savings in the first low-probability time-saving game state is 5, if the time-saving award is won and the time-saving symbol J2 (number of time-savings 20 times) is determined, the first time-saving game state is In addition to being reset, "20 times" may be set again as the number of time saving times. In this case, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state will continue until the result of the lottery is derived 20 times without winning the jackpot again.
In addition, in the above case, instead of resetting the number of time savings associated with the time saving symbol, the number of time savings associated with the time saving symbol may be added to the remaining number of time savings at the time. For example, when the remaining number of time savings in the first low-probability time-saving game state is 5, if the time-saving award is won and the time-saving symbol J2 (number of time-savings 20 times) is determined, the first time-saving game state is At the same time as being reset, the remaining number of time reductions may be updated to "25 times (= remaining number of time reductions 5 times + number of time reductions defined in time saving symbol J2 20 times)". In this case, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state will continue until the result of the lottery is derived 25 times without winning the jackpot again.
In this case, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment are achieved, and the chances of setting a time-saving gaming state without winning a jackpot or playing a special game increase, so it is more innovative. It is possible to add gameplay and increase the interest of the players.

(7) In the above-described embodiment, the time-saving symbols that can be determined when a time-saving award is won include the time-saving symbol J1 in which the number of time-savings is determined to be 10 times, and the time-saving symbol in which the number of time-savings is determined to be 20 times. Although three types of time-saving symbols J2 and J3 in which the number of times of time-saving is determined to be one are provided, the present invention is not limited to these, and other time-saving symbols in which different number of times of time-saving are determined may be provided.
Specifically, in addition to these time-saving symbols, there are a time-saving symbol J4 in which the number of time-savers is set to 30, a time-saving symbol J5 in which the number of time-savers is set to 50, and a time-saving symbol J6 in which the number of time-savers is set to 10,000. etc. may be provided. Furthermore, only one type of time-saving symbol in which a predetermined number of times of time-saving is determined may be provided as the time-saving symbol that can be determined when a time-saving award is won.
In this case, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and it is possible to increase the variation of time-saving game states that can be set without involving winning a jackpot or executing a special game. , it is possible to provide more innovative gameplay features and increase the interest of the players.
Further, the number of time saving times to be set may be predetermined for each type of time saving symbol as described above, or may be predetermined for each type of time saving symbol and each set gaming state. For example, in the normal gaming state (non-time-saving gaming state), if the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, if the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, or if the time-saving symbol J3 is determined, the number of time-saving symbols will be 100. However, in the time-saving game state, if the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the number of time-savings is set to 100, and if the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, the number of time-savings is set to 50, and the time-saving number is set to 50. When the symbol J3 is determined, the number of time saving times may be set to 0 (that is, the time saving gaming state may be set to end at the same time as the time saving gaming state is set).
In this case, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and since it is possible to increase the variation of the number of time reductions that can be set, it is possible to provide a more innovative gaming experience, and it is possible for the player to can increase interest.
In addition, the pachinko machine will be able to win a time-saving award in both the winning lottery when a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15 and the second starting winning opening 16. If it has been set, the probability of winning the time saving award in the lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15 and the probability of winning the time saving award based on the entering of the gaming ball into the second starting winning hole 16. The probability of winning the time saving award in the winning lottery is different from the probability of winning the time saving award (for example, in the winning lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting winning hole 15, the probability of winning the time saving award is 1/100, and the probability of winning the time saving award is different from the probability of winning the time saving award in the winning lottery). In the lottery based on the entry of game balls into the number 16, it may be set so that the time saving award is won at 1/10.
In this case, the same effects as those of the above-mentioned embodiment are achieved, and since the degree of advantage regarding the setting of the time-saving gaming state changes for each starting winning hole into which the game ball enters, the player's interest increases. can be increased.
Also, in accordance with the type of the determined time-saving symbol, in the time-saving gaming state that is set based on the determination of the time-saving symbol, the normal symbol is won by lottery and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and then the movable piece 16b opens ( The regular opening time, which is the time until the second starting prize opening 16 becomes open, may be set to be different. For example, in the time-saving gaming state that is set based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J1, the opening time for the regular symbol is 0.5 seconds, and in the time-saving gaming state that is set based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J2, the regular symbol opening time is 0.5 seconds. In the time-saving gaming state, which is set based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J3, the normal pattern opening time may be set to be 1.5 seconds.
In this case, the same effects as in the above-described embodiment are achieved, and the advantage of the set time-saving gaming state changes for each determined time-saving symbol, thereby increasing the player's interest. be able to.

(8) In the above-described embodiment, it is possible to derive a time-saving grant win as a result of the determination in the lottery, and when a time-saving grant is won, a time-saving gaming state (first time-saving gaming state) is set. However, the winning of the time-saving award was not derived as a result of the judgment in the winning/failure drawing, but was determined based on the judgment result other than the jackpot winning (i.e., small winning winning or losing) in the winning/failure drawing. The special symbol obtained (that is, the small winning symbol or the losing symbol) is substituted as a time-saving symbol, and depending on the determined type of the above-mentioned special symbol, it is determined whether a time-saving gaming state can be set (appropriateness of time-saving granting). Good too.

For example, in the case of a loss in a win/fail lottery based on a win/fail random number, when the losing symbol Z1 is determined by the special symbol random number, the first time saving gaming state in which the number of time saving times is determined to be 20 is set, and the special symbol random number When the losing symbol Z2 is determined, the first time-saving gaming state may not be set. In addition, losing symbols that can be determined by special symbol random numbers are not limited to these, and include losing symbols in which a first time-saving gaming state with a different number of time-savings than the losing symbol Z1 is set (for example, a number of time-savings with a number of 50 times). A losing pattern Z3 in which a first time saving game state is set, a losing pattern Z4 in which a first time saving gaming state with a time saving number of 10000 times is set, etc.) may be provided.
It should be noted that, instead of determining the losing symbols through the process of determining the winning/losing lottery and special symbols, in the winning/losing lottery based on the winning/losing random numbers as in the above-mentioned modification (2), for example, the setting of the first time-saving gaming state and A loss corresponding to a loss pattern Z1 for which the number of time-savings is determined to be 20 times and a loss corresponding to a loss pattern Z2 for which it is determined that the first time-saving gaming state is not set are set to be derivable, and the loss symbols are determined by a lottery of success or failure. If there is a loss corresponding to Z1, the first time saving gaming state with 20 time saving times is set, and if the winning lottery results in a loss corresponding to losing symbol Z2, the first time saving gaming state is not set. You can also do this.

Also, for example, in the case where a small win is won by a win/fail lottery based on a win/fail random number, when the small win symbol Y1 is determined by the special symbol random number, the first time saving game state in which the number of time savers is set to 50 is activated. When the small winning symbol Y1 is set and the special symbol random number is determined, the first time saving game state may not be set. In addition, the small winning symbols that can be determined by the special symbol random numbers are not limited to these, but are small winning symbols in which a first time saving game state with a different number of time saving times than the small winning symbol Y1 is set (for example, the number of time saving times). A small winning symbol Y3 in which the first time saving game state is set 80 times, a small winning symbol Z4 in which the first time saving gaming state is set 10000 times, etc.) may be provided.
In addition, instead of determining the small winning symbol through the process of determining the winning lottery and the special symbol, in the winning lottery based on the winning random number as in the above-mentioned modification (2), for example, the setting of the first time-saving gaming state is performed. It is possible to derive a small win corresponding to the small winning symbol Y1 in which the number of time saving times is set to 50, and a small winning winning corresponding to the small winning symbol Y2 in which it is determined that the first time saving gaming state is not set. , and if a small win corresponding to the small winning symbol Y1 is won by the lottery, the first time saving game state with 50 time saving times is set, and a small winning corresponding to the small winning symbol Y2 is determined by the lottery. The first time-saving gaming state may not be set if the player wins.
In this case, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and special symbols such as small winning symbols and losing symbols that have been conventionally adopted can be used without newly providing time-saving symbols as special symbols. Using this, it is possible to set a time-saving gaming state that does not involve winning a jackpot or executing a special game, and it becomes possible to simplify the development process of a pachinko machine.

(9) In the above-described embodiment, whether or not to set the time-saving gaming state is determined based on the determination result of whether or not the time-saving game is granted in a winning/failure lottery based on a winning/failing random number. The control of the decision is not limited to this.
For example, a time-saving symbol random number, which is a special random number for determining whether to set a time-saving gaming state, is provided separately from the winning/losing random number and special symbol random number, and the time-saving symbol random number, which is a special random number for determining whether or not to set the time-saving gaming state, is provided, and the time-saving symbol random number is set separately from the winning/losing lottery and the determination of the special symbol. It is set to perform a time-saving symbol lottery to determine whether or not to set a time-saving gaming state (first time-saving gaming state) based on the symbol random number, and based on the result of the time-saving symbol lottery, a time-saving gaming state (first time-saving gaming state) is set. It may also be possible to determine whether or not to set the time-saving gaming state and the number of time-saving times when setting the time-saving gaming state.
That is, a win/fail lottery is performed based on a win/fail random number, a special symbol is determined based on the result of the win/fail lottery, and a time-saving symbol lottery is performed based on a time-saving symbol random number to determine whether or not a time-saving gaming state can be set (described later). It can be set to determine the time-saving symbol).

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 or the second starting winning hole 16, along with the above-mentioned first special pattern random number and second special pattern random number, the above-mentioned random number dedicated to the time-saving pattern lottery is drawn. A certain time-saving symbol random number is obtained within a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535), and based on the obtained time-saving symbol random number, the type of the time-saving symbol is determined as to whether or not a time-saving gaming state can be set. Set to perform time-saving symbol lottery.
More specifically, a time-saving symbol random number determination table is provided for determining the type of time-saving symbol in the time-saving symbol lottery. This time saving symbol random number determination table may be provided for each type of starting winning hole into which the game ball enters (first starting winning hole 15, second starting winning hole 16). When the set gaming state is the normal gaming state, the above-mentioned time-saving symbol lottery is performed with reference to a predetermined time-saving symbol random number determination table to determine the type of time-saving symbol.

The time-saving symbols include time-saving winning symbols that are determined to win a time-saving award (that is, to set a time-saving gaming state), and time-saving symbols that are determined to not win a time-saving award (that is, not to set a time-saving gaming state). A winning symbol can be provided. In addition, as time-saving winning symbols, there are multiple types of time-saving winning symbols with different number of time-savings determined (for example, time-saving winning symbol JA1 with 10 time-savings, JA2 with 20 time-savings, etc.) can be provided.
When any of the time-saving winning symbols is determined by the time-saving symbol lottery, for example, a first time-saving gaming state (first low probability time-saving gaming state) is set, and the time-saving winning symbol is selected according to the determined time-saving winning symbol. The number of time saving times is set. As a result, the first low-probability time-saving game state continues until the result of the winning lottery is derived the set number of times without winning a jackpot. On the other hand, if a time-saving non-winning symbol is determined, the normal gaming state remains.
In addition, if the set gaming state is other than the normal gaming state (first low probability time saving gaming state, second low probability time saving gaming state, high probability time saving gaming state), the above mentioned time saving symbol lottery will be performed. Alternatively, it may be set to forcibly determine the time-saving non-winning symbols. As a result, the time-saving gaming state will not be newly set in any gaming state other than the normal gaming state.

In addition, as described above, when the type of time-saving symbol is determined by the time-saving symbol lottery based on the time-saving symbol random number, the time-saving symbol lottery and the time-saving symbol are determined by the winning lottery, special symbol, etc. in the above-mentioned embodiment. It may be set to perform the same control as the control related to.
For example, the obtained time-saving pattern random number is the same as the first special pattern random number and second special pattern random number that are obtained when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 and the second starting winning hole 16. It may be stored in a reservation storage area and set so that it can be reserved up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4 pieces) similarly to the first special figure random number and the second special figure random number.
In addition, when a time-saving symbol is determined as described above, a predetermined display device (a time-saving symbol display device) different from the first special symbol display device 30 and the second special symbol display device 31 is used similarly to the special symbol. It may be set so that a variable display of time-saving symbols (hereinafter also referred to as variation of time-saving symbols) is performed in . The variable display of the time-saving symbols may be set to start at the same timing as the variable display of the special symbols, or may be set to have the same variable time as the variable display of the special symbols. Further, when the variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the time-saving symbol are started at the same timing, the time-saving symbol lottery may be set to be performed at the start of the variable display.

In addition, when a time-saving winning symbol is determined in the above-mentioned time-saving symbol lottery, if you lose in the winning lottery executed in conjunction with the time-saving symbol lottery, after the fluctuation of the special symbol based on the winning lottery has stopped. A time-saving game state (first low probability time-saving game state) may be set (at the start of the next special symbol variation). In addition, when a small hit is won in the win/fail lottery executed in conjunction with the time-saving symbol drawing, after the small winning game based on the winning of the small winning ends (the first special after the small winning game ends) (at the start of symbol fluctuation), a time-saving gaming state may be set.

On the other hand, if a time-saving winning symbol is determined in the above-mentioned time-saving symbol lottery, and if a jackpot is won in the win/fail lottery executed in conjunction with the time-saving symbol lottery, the time-saving winning symbol will not be determined. The time-saving gaming state based on the winning of the jackpot is not set, and after the special game based on the jackpot winning ends (at the time when the first special symbol fluctuation starts after the special game ends), the jackpot determined based on the jackpot winning. The gaming state may be set according to the type of symbol. In other words, if the determination of the time-saving winning symbol and the determination of the jackpot symbol overlap (jackpot winning), even if the determination of the time-saving winning symbol is invalidated and the gaming state is set based on the determination of the jackpot symbol. good. If the setting of the gaming state based on the determination of time-saving winning symbols is given priority over the special game, the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot may change, and the special game will be terminated after confirming whether or not there is any such change. It is necessary to set the subsequent gaming state, and the process of setting the gaming state may become complicated, but by doing as described above, it is possible to appropriately prevent such a situation from occurring.

Further, the variable pattern command, the mode of the variable presentation, the mode of the pre-reading presentation, etc. may be determined based on the results of the determination of the special symbol and the determination of the time-saving symbol.
Specifically, if the result of the lottery is a small win or a loss, and a time-saving winning symbol is determined, the result of the lottery is a small win or a loss, and a time-saving non-winning symbol is determined. is determined, and when the result of the lottery is a jackpot (when a time-saving non-winning symbol is determined), the variable pattern command and the mode of variable performance are determined respectively. Good too. For example, if the result of the lottery is a small win or a loss, and a time-saving winning symbol is determined, or if the result of the lottery is a jackpot, the result of the lottery is a small win or a loss. It may be set so that the determination rate of a fluctuation pattern command associated with a long fluctuation time is higher than that in the case of winning or losing a time-saving non-winning symbol. It may be set so that the determination ratio of the variable presentation mode or the look-ahead presentation mode that is set to have a high expectation of winning or winning the time-saving award may be set to be high.

Also, even if it is set to determine the type of time-saving symbol by a time-saving symbol lottery based on a time-saving symbol random number, whether or not the time-saving symbol lottery is performed in a gaming state other than the normal gaming state to set the time-saving gaming state. It may also be possible to decide whether Various controls in this case are the same as those in (6) above, so explanations will be omitted.
In addition, in the time-saving symbol lottery based on the time-saving symbol random number, it is not decided whether or not to set the time-saving gaming state and the number of time-saving games, but in the time-saving symbol lottery based on the time-saving symbol random number, it is determined only whether the time-saving gaming state can be set. However, when it is decided to set the time-saving gaming state, a lottery may be performed to determine the number of time-savings based on another random number (random number for determining the number of time-savings) different from the above-mentioned time-saving symbol random number. .

Moreover, the above-mentioned time-saving symbol lottery may be set to be performed using other random numbers instead of using the time-saving symbol random numbers.
For example, instead of using a random number of 1 to determine both the jackpot and the small win as in the above-described embodiment, A random number for determining a jackpot, a random number for determining a small win, a random number for determining a small win, and a random number for determining a loss, used only for determining whether or not a small win will be won. By making a judgment for each time, the judgment result of jackpot winning, small winning winning, or losing is derived, and the above-mentioned time-saving symbol lottery is performed based on one of these random numbers to save time. It may also be possible to determine whether or not the gaming state can be set and the number of time reductions.

Also, as in the above-described embodiment, the special symbol random number of 1 is not used to determine the jackpot symbol, the small prize symbol, or the losing symbol, but the jackpot symbol is used only to determine the type of the jackpot symbol in the case of winning a jackpot. The symbol determination random number, the small winning symbol determining random number that is used only to determine the type of small winning symbol in the case of winning a small hit, and the losing symbol determining random number that is used only to determine the type of losing symbol in the case of a loss. The type of jackpot symbol, the type of small prize symbol, and the type of loss symbol are determined based on any random number according to the determination result of jackpot winning, small winning winning, or losing. It is also possible to perform a time-saving symbol lottery based on any one of them to determine whether or not to set the time-saving gaming state and the number of time-saving games.

In addition, as in the above-described embodiment, in a pachinko machine P in which multiple levels of setting values are associated with settings related to ball payout, the lottery probability is set to be different depending on the setting values. Random numbers used in (e.g., win/fail random numbers, jackpot judgment random numbers, small hit judgment random numbers, loss judgment random numbers, etc.), or used in a lottery set so that the lottery probability is the same regardless of the setting value. A time saving symbol lottery may be performed based on any of the random numbers (for example, special symbol random numbers, etc.) to determine whether or not the time saving gaming state can be set and the number of time saving times. In addition, the time-saving symbol lottery is not performed based on the random numbers used in the lottery, where the lottery probability is set to differ depending on the setting value, and the lottery probability is set to be the same regardless of the setting value. The time-saving symbol lottery may be performed based only on the random numbers used in the lottery to determine whether or not the time-saving gaming state can be set and the number of time-saving times.

When set as described above, the same effects as those of the embodiment described above are achieved, and there are many control methods for setting the time-saving gaming state, so that the time-saving gaming state can be set according to the specifications of the pachinko machine. becomes possible.

(10) In the above-described embodiment, when a high probability gaming state is set, a special symbol (jackpot symbol , the high-probability gaming state ends and the low-probability gaming state is set, but the control of transition to the low-probability gaming state is not limited to this.
For example, after a high-probability gaming state is set, if a predetermined number of high-probability drawings (for example, 80, etc.) are held without winning a jackpot, the high-probability gaming state ends. (configured as a so-called ST type pachinko machine). In the pachinko machine set in this way, if a gaming state that is a combination of a high probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state can be set, the above-described embodiment mode is set during the gaming state. When the winning of the time-saving grant is determined by the lottery and the time-saving symbol is determined, as in the above-mentioned variation (8), the small winning symbol or the losing symbol is determined to set the time-saving gaming state. or when a time-saving winning symbol is determined by the time-saving symbol lottery as in the above-mentioned modification (9), the time-saving gaming state may be set based on the determination.
Furthermore, for example, a random number for a fall lottery to be used for a fall lottery to determine whether to end a high probability gaming state and set a low probability gaming state is provided, and the high probability gaming state is terminated by a fall lottery based on the fall lottery random number. However, when it is determined to set the low probability gaming state, the high probability gaming state may end. Then, when a falling lottery random number is provided, a time-saving symbol lottery like the above-mentioned modification example (9) may be performed based on the falling lottery random number to determine whether or not to set the time-saving gaming state. .
When set as described above, the same effects as those of the embodiment described above are achieved, and there are many control methods for setting the time-saving gaming state, so that the time-saving gaming state can be set according to the specifications of the pachinko machine. becomes possible.

(11) In the embodiment described above, the process of determining the result of the lottery is performed in the order of determining whether the jackpot is appropriate → determining whether the small win is appropriate → determining whether the time saving grant is appropriate. The order is not limited to this.
For example, the determination may be made in the order of determining whether the jackpot is appropriate → determining whether the time saving grant is appropriate → determining whether the small win is appropriate.
In addition, as in the above-mentioned modification (8), in the win/fail lottery, instead of deriving the determination result of winning the time-saving grant, the small winning symbol corresponds to the small winning symbol that is set to set the time-saving gaming state. (hereinafter also referred to as a small win with time saving), winning of a small win corresponding to a small winning symbol that does not set a time saving gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as a small win without time saving), In a pachinko machine where the time-saving gaming state is set when a small win with a bonus is won, and the time-saving gaming state is not set when a small win with no time saving is won, for example, determining whether the jackpot is correct → Judgment is made in the following order: Judgment of the validity of the small win with time saving → Judgment of the propriety of the small win without time saving, Judgment of the propriety of the jackpot → Judgment of the propriety of the small win without time saving → Judgment of the propriety of the small win with time saving. Good too.
In addition, as in the above-mentioned modification (8), in the lottery, instead of deriving the determination result of winning the time-saving grant, the losing symbol corresponding to the losing symbol for which the time-saving gaming state is set (hereinafter referred to as , a loss with a time saver), and a loss corresponding to a losing symbol for which it is specified that a time saver gaming state is not set (hereinafter also referred to as a loss without a time saver), and when a loss with a time saver occurs, the time saver gaming state is set. In a pachinko machine where is set and the time-saving gaming state is not set in the case of a loss with no time-saving, for example, the order of determining whether a jackpot is correct → determining whether a small win is correct → determining whether a loss with a time-saving is determined, and the jackpot is determined. The determination may be made in the following order: determination of success or failure of winning with time saving → determination of success or failure of small win.
In addition, in a pachinko machine that is set to determine whether to end a high-probability gaming state by a fall lottery, the fall lottery → win/fail lottery (judgment of jackpot, small win, time saving, etc.) The lottery process may be performed in the order of (judgment).

In addition, as in the above-mentioned modification (9), in pachinko machines that are set to determine whether or not the time-saving gaming state can be set by a time-saving symbol lottery, and in which setting values for multiple stages are not determined, the time-saving symbol lottery The lottery process may be performed in the order of → success/failure lottery, or the lottery process may be performed in the order of success/failure lottery → time-saving symbol lottery. In addition, in pachinko machines that are set to determine whether or not the time-saving gaming state can be set by a time-saving symbol lottery, and in which multiple levels of setting values are determined, the time-saving symbol lottery (for any setting value, the lottery probability The lottery process may be performed in the order of (a lottery set so that the numbers are the same) → a win/fail lottery (a lottery whose lottery probabilities are set to be different depending on the set value).
In addition, in a pachinko machine that is set to determine whether or not to set a time-saving gaming state by a time-saving symbol lottery, and to determine whether or not to end a high-probability gaming state by a fall lottery, and in which setting values for multiple stages are not determined. The lottery process may be performed in the order of falling lottery → time-saving symbol lottery → success/failure lottery, or the lottery process may be performed in the order of falling lottery → success/failure lottery → time-saving symbol lottery. In addition, pachinko machines that are set to determine whether or not to set a time-saving gaming state by a time-saving symbol lottery, and determine whether or not to end a high-probability gaming state by a falling lottery, and which have multiple levels of setting values. In this case, the falling lottery (the lottery set so that the lottery probability is the same regardless of the setting value) → the time-saving symbol lottery (the lottery set so that the lottery probability is the same regardless of the setting value) The lottery process may be performed in the following order: success/failure lottery (a lottery in which the lottery probability is set to vary depending on a set value).

When set as described above, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and a lottery can be held to determine whether or not the time-saving gaming state can be set at a timing that corresponds to the specifications of the pachinko machine.

(12) In the above-described embodiment, the special game is executed when the result of the lottery is a jackpot, but the trigger for executing the special game is not limited to this. do not have.
For example, a small prize that is executed not only when the result of a winning lottery is a jackpot win, but also when the winning lottery result is a predetermined small winning symbol (when a predetermined small winning symbol is determined). In the winning game, a specified large prize opening with a special area into which the game ball can enter is opened, and the game ball that enters the specified large prize opening during the small winning game enters the special area. It may also be configured so that a special game is executed even when the game is played (configured as a pachinko machine that mixes one type and two types). In addition, after the special game executed based on the winning of the above-mentioned small hit ends, the game state (non-time-saving gaming state, time-saving gaming state) corresponding to the small winning symbol determined at the time of winning the above-mentioned small winning occurs. You may also set it to migrate.

Also in the pachinko machine set as described above (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed pachinko machine), as in the above embodiments and modified examples, it is possible to determine whether or not to provide time saving (as in the above embodiments and modifications). Win/fail lottery of the above-mentioned modification (2)), determination of small winning symbols and losing symbols for which it is determined whether a time-saving gaming state can be set (process of determining the win/fail lottery and special symbols of the above-mentioned modification (8)) , the determination of the time-saving winning symbol or the time-saving non-winning symbol (the time-saving symbol lottery of the above-mentioned modification example (9)), etc. (hereinafter, these determinations and decisions are collectively referred to as the time-saving granting determination process). However, the time-saving game state may be set without involving the winning of a jackpot and the execution of a special game.
In addition, for example, when performing the above-mentioned time-saving symbol lottery on a so-called 1 type and 2 type mixed pachinko machine, the time-saving symbol lottery determines that a time-saving gaming state is set (a time-saving symbol that is set to set a time-saving gaming state) (time-saving winning symbol)) is determined and it becomes a loss (the losing symbol is determined) by the winning lottery, after the fluctuation of the special symbol based on the winning lottery stops, the result of the above-mentioned time-saving symbol lottery is determined. When it is decided to set the time-saving gaming state according to the above-mentioned time-saving symbol lottery, and when the small winning is won by the win/fail lottery (the small winning symbol is determined), the above-mentioned The time-saving gaming state is not set according to the result of the time-saving symbol lottery, and after the small-winning game and special game based on the winning of the small winning, the type of the small winning symbol determined based on the winning of the small winning. A corresponding gaming state may be set.
Specifically, the time-saving symbol (time-saving winning symbol) associated with setting the first time-saving gaming state (the number of time-savings is 20 times) is determined by the above-mentioned time-saving symbol lottery, and a small win is awarded in the winning/failure lottery. If you win a small winning game and a small winning symbol is determined to be associated with setting the second time saving game state (the number of time saving times is 100 times) after the small winning game and special game end, the small winning game and special game After the game ends, the first time-saving game state may not be set, but the second time-saving game state may be set.
In this case, in addition to achieving the same effects as the above-described embodiment, it is possible to install a lottery function that determines whether or not to set the time-saving gaming state in pachinko machines with various specifications, and it also allows small winnings to be achieved. When the winning of the game and the determination of the setting of the time-saving gaming state overlap, it is possible to appropriately prevent the occurrence of a situation where the setting process of the time-saving gaming state becomes complicated.

(13) When multiple types of decision results are provided as the decision results that can be determined by the above-mentioned time-saving award decision processing, it is made easy to maintain the second starting prize opening 16 in an open state for each decision result. You may set a time-saving gaming state with different processing contents.
For example, as in the above-mentioned embodiment, a setting is made to determine a time-saving symbol that is determined to set a time-saving gaming state through the winning/failure lottery and special symbol determination processing, or in the above-mentioned modification example (9). ), when it is set to determine the time-saving symbol (time-saving winning symbol) which is determined to set the time-saving gaming state by time-saving symbol lottery, the type of time-saving symbol (time-saving winning symbol) that can be determined. As such, although the probability of winning in the lottery of symbols and normal symbols that are set to set the above-mentioned first time-saving gaming state is higher than in the non-time-saving gaming state, the fluctuating time of the normal symbol and the second starting prize opening The opening time of 16 is the same as the non-time-saving gaming state. Although the variation time of the normal symbol is longer than that of the non-time-saving gaming state, which is a symbol that is set to set the 3rd time-saving gaming state, it is possible to win in the drawing of the normal symbol. The probability that the opening time of the second starting prize opening 16 is the same as the non-time saving gaming state. Even if a symbol etc. is provided that stipulates that the fifth time-saving gaming state is set, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol are the same as the non-time-saving gaming state, although it is longer than the state. good. In addition to these, any two of the probability of winning in the lottery of normal symbols, the fluctuation time of normal symbols, and the opening time of the second starting prize opening 16 will be higher (or longer) than in the non-time saving gaming state. However, a symbol may be provided in which it is determined that the other one is a time-saving gaming state that is the same as the non-time-saving gaming state.
In addition, similar settings can be made in the case where it is possible to derive the result of winning the time-saving grant corresponding to the predetermined time-saving symbol in the winning lottery as in the above-mentioned modification (2). For example, in a winning/failure lottery, a time-saving award corresponding to a time-saving symbol that is set to set the above-mentioned third time-saving gaming state, a winning of a time-saving award that corresponds to a time-saving symbol that is set to set the above-mentioned 4th time-saving gaming state, etc. The setting may be such that it is possible to derive a result such as winning a time-saving award.

In addition, as in the above-mentioned modification example (8), when setting is made to determine whether or not the time-saving gaming state can be set based on the small winning symbol or the losing symbol determined in the process of win/fail lottery and special symbol determination process. , a small winning symbol Y1 (or losing symbol Z1) that is defined to set the above-mentioned first time-saving gaming state, and a small winning symbol Y3 (or losing symbol) that is defined to set the above-mentioned third time-saving gaming state. Z3), the small winning symbol Y4 (or losing symbol Z4) that is set to set the above-mentioned fourth time-saving gaming state, and the small winning symbol Y5 (or A loss pattern Z5) or the like may be provided. In addition to these, any two of the probability of winning in the lottery of normal symbols, the fluctuation time of normal symbols, and the opening time of the second starting prize opening 16 will be higher (or longer) than in the non-time saving gaming state. However, the other one may be provided with a small winning symbol (or a losing symbol) that is determined to set a time-saving gaming state that is the same as the non-time-saving gaming state.
In addition, as in the above-mentioned modification example (8), in the winning/fail lottery, it is determined that a small win corresponding to a small winning symbol for which a time-saving gaming state is set or a time-saving gaming state is set. Similar settings can be made when it is possible to derive the result of a loss corresponding to a loss symbol. For example, in a win/fail lottery, a small win corresponding to the small winning symbol Y3 (or a loss corresponding to the losing symbol Z3) for which it is determined that the third time saving gaming state described above is set, the fourth time saving gaming state described above The setting may be made such that it is possible to derive a result such as a small win win corresponding to the small win symbol Y4 (or a loss corresponding to the lose symbol Z4).

In the case of setting as described above, the same operation and effect as in the above-described embodiment is achieved, and in the time-saving game state that is set without involving jackpot winnings and execution of special games, the second starting prize opening 16 Since it is possible to increase the variation of the processing for making it easier to maintain the open state, it is possible to provide more innovative gameplay features and increase the interest of the players.

(14) The types and number of symbols (time-saving symbols, time-saving winning symbols, small winning symbols, losing symbols, etc.) that are determined to set the time-saving gaming state that can be determined by the above-mentioned time-saving granting determination process are determined for each gaming state. may be set differently.
For example, if there are predetermined types (for example, 5 types) of symbols that are set to set the time-saving gaming state (time-saving symbols, time-saving winning symbols, small winning symbols, losing symbols, etc.), in the normal gaming state, Although all types can be determined, it may be set so that any one or more types can be determined in a low probability time saving game state, or all types can be determined in a low probability time saving gaming state. , it may be set so that any one or more types can be determined in the normal gaming state.
Also, for example, although all types can be determined in a specific time-saving game state (for example, the first time-saving game state), in a time-saving game state other than the specific one (for example, the third time-saving game state), any one or more types can be determined. It may be set so that the type of the data can be determined.
When set as described above, the same effects as in the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and the rate at which time-saving gaming states are set and the types of time-saving gaming states that can be set can be changed for each gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to provide more innovative gameplay features and increase the interest of the players.

(15) If it is set to determine whether or not the time-saving gaming state can be set based on the type of the small winning symbol or losing symbol, the fluctuation pattern is determined according to the determined type of the small winning symbol or losing symbol. You can do it like this.
Even in this case, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment are achieved, and when the time-saving gaming state is set without winning a jackpot or executing a special game, a variable production with a rich variety can be achieved. can be executed.

(16) If it is set to determine whether or not the time-saving gaming state can be set based on the type of the small winning symbol or the losing symbol, within a predetermined period (for example, from the predetermined starting point until the 100th winning/losing lottery is conducted) The time-saving gaming state is set according to the number of times a small winning symbol is determined to set a time-saving gaming state and the number of losing symbols are determined to be setting a time-saving gaming state. You may also do so.
For example, if the small winning symbol Y1 (the small winning symbol that is determined to set the first time saving game state with the number of time saving times of 20 times) is determined a predetermined number of times (for example, twice, etc.) within the above-mentioned predetermined period, , a time-saving game state determined for the small winning symbol Y1 may be set. Also, for example, if the losing symbol Z1 (the small winning symbol that is determined to set the first time-saving gaming state of 50 time-saving times) is determined a predetermined number of times (for example, three times, etc.) within the above-mentioned predetermined period. In addition, a time-saving gaming state determined for the losing symbol Z1 may be set.
In this case as well, the same effects as those of the above-mentioned embodiments are achieved, and the conditions under which the time-saving gaming state is set can be varied widely, making it possible to provide more innovative gaming features.

(17) In a so-called 1 type and 2 type mixed pachinko machine, if the time-saving gaming state is set based on the type of small winning symbol, the small winning symbol for which the time-saving gaming state is set is set. When a game ball enters a special area provided in a specified large winning opening during a small winning game based on the decision, and when a gaming ball does not enter a special area provided in a specified large winning opening during the small winning game. The number of time saving times in the time saving game state set after the small winning game may be the same or may be different.
For example, if a small winning symbol Y1 is determined to set the first time saving game state of 20 time saving times, during the small winning game based on the determination of the small winning symbol Y1, the game ball is placed in the special area. When the game ball enters the special area, after the small winning game and the special game are finished, the first time saving game state with 20 time saving times is set, and even when the game ball does not enter the special area, after the small winning game ends, the first time saving game state is set. The first time-saving game state may be set 20 times.
For example, when the above-mentioned small winning symbol Y1 is determined, when the game ball enters the special area during the small winning game based on the determination of the small winning symbol Y1, after the small winning game and the special game are finished, Even if the first time saving gaming state with 20 time saving times is set and the game ball does not enter the special area, the first time saving gaming state with 5 time saving times is set after the end of the small winning game. good.
In this case as well, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and different time-saving game states can be set depending on whether or not the game ball can be placed in the special area, providing a rich variety of playability. It can be done.

(18) When setting a time-saving gaming state when a small win is won in a win/fail lottery (when the small win symbol is determined), the time saving gaming state is set from the winning of the small win (determination of the small win symbol). Any timing until the end of the small winning game based on the winning of the small winning (for example, when winning the small winning, when the fluctuation of the small winning symbol starts, when the fluctuation of the small winning symbol ends, the small winning game based on the small winning symbol) The time-saving game state may be set at the start of a winning game, during the small winning game, at the end of the small winning game (when the first special symbol fluctuation starts after the small winning game ends, etc.).
Similarly, when setting a time-saving gaming state when there is a loss in a winning/failure lottery (when a losing symbol is determined), the time-saving gaming state is set based on the losing symbol from the time when the losing symbol is determined (when the losing symbol is determined). The time can be shortened at any timing until the end of the fluctuation (for example, when the losing lottery result is derived, when the fluctuation of the losing symbol starts, when the fluctuation of the losing symbol ends (when the fluctuation of the next special symbol starts), etc.) A gaming state may also be set.
Even when set in this way, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and it is possible to increase the variation of the transition to the time-saving gaming state, thereby increasing the variation of the gameplay. .

(19) If it is set to determine whether or not the time-saving gaming state can be set based on the type of the small winning symbol or losing symbol, the number of time saving times in the time-saving gaming state corresponds to the type of the small winning symbol or losing symbol. A predetermined number of time savings may be set, or a lottery may be held to determine the number of time savings when transitioning to the time saving gaming state, and the number of time savings determined by the lottery may be set.
Even in this case, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and it is possible to increase the variation of the method of determining the number of time reductions, and it is possible to determine the number of time reductions according to the specifications of the pachinko machine. becomes.

(20) If it is set to determine whether or not to set the time-saving game state based on the type of the small winning symbol or losing symbol, the time-saving game is set according to the type of the determined small winning symbol or losing symbol. The state performance (difficulty level of maintaining the second starting winning port 16 in the open state) may be different.
For example, when a small winning symbol Y1 (or a losing symbol Z1) is determined, the second starting prize opening 16 is more likely to be kept open than in the normal gaming state (the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is high). time-saving gaming state A is set, and the small winning symbol Y3 (or the losing time) is set. When the symbol Z3) is determined, a time-saving game state B may be set in which the second starting prize opening 16 is more easily maintained in the open state than the time-saving game state A.
Further, the performance of the time-saving gaming state that is set may be different depending on the type of the small winning symbol or the losing symbol and the gaming state that is set.
For example, if the small winning symbol Y1 (or losing symbol Z1) is determined in the normal gaming state, the above-mentioned time-saving gaming state A is set, but the small winning symbol Y1 (or losing symbol Z1) is ) is determined, the above-mentioned time-saving gaming state B may be set.
Even in the case described above, the same effects as those of the above-mentioned embodiment can be achieved, and it is possible to increase the variation of performance of the time-saving gaming state that is set, and it is possible to provide more innovative gaming characteristics. Become.

(21) When a time-saving gaming state is set based on the determination of a time-saving symbol, a time-saving winning symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol for which it is determined that a time-saving gaming state is to be set, an upper limit for the number of times of time-saving is set. (In other words, the number of time-saving games is infinite) and the time-saving gaming state may be ended on the condition of winning the jackpot, or a lottery may be used to determine the time-saving ending symbol that is set to end the time-saving gaming state. (Lottery of time-saving ending symbol) may be performed, and the time-saving gaming state may be ended on the condition that the time-saving ending symbol is determined by the lottery. In addition, the time-saving gaming state is terminated on the condition that the time-saving gaming state is set and a time-saving symbol, a time-saving winning symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol is determined for which the number of time-saving times is determined, and a new time-saving gaming is started based on the determination. You may set (overwrite) the status and the number of time reductions.
Even in this case, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and the variation of the end conditions of the time-saving game state can be increased, making it possible to provide more innovative gameplay.

(22) When the number of consecutive time-saving settings reaches a predetermined upper limit, it is determined that the next gaming state cannot be set as a time-saving gaming state (a non-time-saving gaming state is forcibly set). In a pachinko machine equipped with a time-saving limiter (hereinafter referred to as a pachinko machine equipped with a time-saving limiter), a time-saving symbol, a time-saving winning symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol that is specified to set a time-saving gaming state is stopped and displayed in the normal gaming state. In this case, the above-mentioned continuous time saving setting number may or may not be updated based on the stop display.
In addition, in the time-saving gaming state, even if a time-saving symbol, a time-saving winning symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol that is set to set the time-saving gaming state is stopped and displayed, the above-mentioned continuous The time saving setting number of times may or may not be updated.
In addition, time-saving symbols, time-saving winning symbols, which are determined to set the time-saving gaming state when determined during the normal gaming state, but not to set the time-saving gaming state when determined during the time-saving gaming state, Even when a small winning symbol or a losing symbol is stopped and displayed during the time-saving game state, the above-mentioned continuous time-saving set number may or may not be updated based on the stopped display.
Even in the case described above, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and the difficulty level of reaching the upper limit number of consecutive time reduction settings can be changed, making it possible to provide more innovative gameplay. Become.

(23) In a pachinko machine equipped with a time-saving limiter, the performance of the time-saving gaming state ( One or more of the winning probability of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting prize opening 16, and the number of time reductions), the remaining number of consecutive time reduction settings until the set number of consecutive time reductions reaches the predetermined upper limit number of times. It may be made to differ depending on the number of times remaining, or it may be made to be the same regardless of the remaining number of times.
In this case as well, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and it is possible to increase the variation of time-saving gaming states set in a pachinko machine equipped with a time-saving limiter, resulting in more innovative gaming characteristics. can be granted.

(24) A pachinko machine configured such that a falling lottery is carried out and a time-saving gaming state is set by determining a time-saving symbol, a time-saving winning symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol that is determined to set a time-saving gaming state. In the machine, when it is decided to end the high probability gaming state by falling lottery, and a time-saving symbol, a time-saving winning symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol is determined to set a time-saving gaming state, the said As the time saving number of time saving gaming states set based on the determination of the symbol, the number of time saving times determined according to the gaming state before the above-mentioned determination by the falling lottery and the type of determined symbol is set. Alternatively, a predetermined number of time reductions may be set depending on the gaming state before the above-described determination by the falling lottery and the type of determined symbol.
In this case as well, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and it is possible to increase the variation of the number of time-savings set in the time-saving game state, and it is possible to provide more innovative gaming characteristics. Become.

(25) If a time-saving symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol is determined to set a time-saving gaming state while a look-ahead effect that notifies the result of the lottery is being executed, if a time-saving symbol, small winning symbol, or losing symbol is determined to set a time-saving gaming state, the execution The pre-read effect may be continued, or the pre-read effect may be stopped without continuing.
In addition, when a time-saving symbol, a small winning symbol, or a pending symbol that determines a losing symbol is stored, a specific effect (pre-read effect, other (e.g., a predetermined performance that is executed during a variable performance based on the suspension of The specific performance may be continued or may be stopped without continuing.
Note that the same applies to pachinko machines that are set to determine whether or not to set the time-saving gaming state by the above-mentioned time-saving symbol lottery, and are set to execute a look-ahead effect that notifies the result of the time-saving symbol lottery. The control may be performed.
Even in this case, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiments are achieved, and the time-saving game state is determined to be set appropriately according to the situation of determining the time-saving symbol, the small winning symbol, or the losing symbol. This makes it possible to perform a variety of performances.

(26) In a pachinko machine that can set the gaming state after the end of a special game based on winning a jackpot to a high-probability gaming state, the gaming state after the end of a special game based on winning a jackpot during a low-probability gaming state is set to a high-probability gaming state. The probability A1 that the game state will be set to the probability game state, and the probability A2 that the game state will be set to the high probability game state after the end of the special game based on winning the jackpot during the high probability game state are as follows: They may be set to the same value or may be set to different values.
In addition, the probabilities A1 and A2 mentioned above may be set to the same value regardless of the type of special figure random number (first special figure random number, second special figure random number) used for the lottery. Alternatively, it may be set to a different value depending on the type of special figure random number. In addition, the probabilities A1 and A2 described above may be set to have the same value regardless of the type of special symbol determined when winning a jackpot, or may be set to have the same value depending on the type of special symbol. It may be set to a different value. Further, the value may be set to be different depending on the type of special symbol random number used in the winning lottery and the type of special symbol determined when winning a jackpot.
When set in this way, there is a probability that a high probability game state will be set from a low probability game state through the execution of a special game, and a high probability game state will be set again from a high probability game state through the execution of a special game. There are many variations in the probabilities that are set, and the gameplay that can be provided to players can also be varied.

(27) In a pachinko machine that can end a high-probability gaming state and set a low-probability gaming state by falling lottery, the decision probability B for ending the high-probability gaming state and setting a low-probability gaming state is one value. Only one value may be provided, or a plurality of values may be provided.
If only one value is set, the falling lottery will always be performed using that value, and if multiple values are set, depending on the situation (for example, a special lottery after a high probability gaming state is set). The falling lottery may be performed using any value (depending on the number of variations in the symbol, the type of starting winning hole into which the game ball entered, etc.).
In addition, the decision probability B has the same value regardless of the set gaming state (high probability time saving gaming state, high probability non time saving gaming state which is a combination of high probability gaming state and non time saving gaming state). You can also set it as follows. In addition, the decision probability B may be set to be the same value regardless of the type of special figure random number (first special figure random number, second special figure random number) used for the winning lottery. You may set it to a different value depending on the type of special figure random number. Further, the decision probability B may be set to be the same value regardless of the type of special symbol (losing symbol) determined in the case of a loss, or may be set to be the same value depending on the type of special symbol. It may be set to a value. Further, it may be set to a different value depending on the set gaming state, the type of special symbol random number used for winning or losing lottery, and the type of special symbol determined in the case of a loss.
When set in this way, there will be a wide variety of variations in the probability that a high probability gaming state will end and a low probability gaming state will be set, and the gameplay that can be provided to players will also be rich in variation. can.

(28) A pachinko machine (hereinafter referred to as a pachinko machine equipped with a probability change limiter) that is set so that a low probability game state is forcibly set after the end of a special game when the number of consecutive high probability settings reaches a predetermined upper limit. In a pachinko machine (referred to as a pachinko machine), only one value or a plurality of values may be provided as the upper limit number of times. If only one value is set, the above setting is performed when the number of consecutive high accuracy settings reaches the relevant value, and if multiple values are set, the number of consecutive high accuracy settings is changed depending on the situation. The above-mentioned setting may be performed upon reaching any value corresponding to (for example, the number of times the game state has shifted from a low-probability gaming state to a high-probability gaming state).
Similarly, in a pachinko machine equipped with a time-saving limiter, only one value or a plurality of values may be provided as the upper limit number of times. If only one value is set, the above setting is performed when the number of continuous time reduction settings reaches the value, and if multiple values are set, the number of continuous time reduction settings is changed depending on the situation. The above-mentioned setting may be performed when any value is reached (for example, depending on the number of times the game mode is shifted from a non-time-saving gaming state to a time-saving gaming state).
When set in this way, there is a wide variety of variations in the upper limit of the number of continuous high accuracy settings and the number of continuous time reduction settings, and the gaming experience that can be provided to the player can also be rich in variation.

(29) In the above-described embodiment, the time-saving gaming state is set if the time-saving grant is won as a result of determining whether the time-saving grant is appropriate or not in the winning/failure lottery during the normal gaming state. The trigger for setting the gaming state is not limited to this.
For example, the number of times the special symbol changes (the number of times the lottery result is derived in a win/fail lottery) is counted, and when the count value reaches a predetermined number of times LN, the gaming state is other than the time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state, etc.). In the case of a high probability non-time saving game state), a time saving game state in which the number of time saving times becomes a specific time saving number TN may be set without winning a jackpot or executing a special game.
When set in this way, even if the jackpot is not won, the time-saving gaming state will be set if the number of changes in the special symbol reaches the time-saving activation number LN, so there are variations in which the time-saving gaming state can be set. This increases the player's interest.

(30) In a pachinko machine set as in the above modification example (29), the above count value is (a) at the time of power-on (at the time of RAM clearing), (b) the number of times the special symbol changes during the normal gaming state. When the number of time-saving activations LN is reached, or the number of variations of the special symbol during the normal gaming state reaches the number of time-saving activations LN, after that, a lottery for the specific time-saving number TN is held without winning the jackpot. (c) At the time of winning the jackpot or at the end of the special game based on winning the jackpot, (d) Setting the time-saving gaming state. In a pachinko machine that sets a time-saving gaming state by determining a time-saving symbol, a time-saving winning symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol, when the time-saving gaming state is set, (e) a setting value is set. In a pachinko machine, the RAM may be cleared at one or more of the RAM clearing times that are performed by changing the setting value. That is, counting of the above-mentioned count value may be started from the time points (a) to (e). Note that the clearing at the time point (c) may be set to always be executed.
Furthermore, the above-mentioned count value may be cleared at other times different from (a) to (e).
In addition, the above-mentioned count value may be always counted regardless of which gaming state is set, or may be set to always count during a state advantageous to the player (for example, during a high probability gaming state, to save time). The count may not be counted during the gaming state, etc.).
In addition, as for the timing of counting the above-mentioned count value, when there is a loss in the lottery (when a losing symbol is determined), from the time when it becomes a loss (the losing symbol is determined) Any timing until the end of the fluctuation based on the result (for example, when the losing lottery result is derived, when the fluctuation of the losing symbol starts, when the fluctuation of the losing symbol ends, the stop display after the fluctuation of the losing symbol ends) When time has elapsed (when the next special symbol starts changing), etc.), or when a jackpot is won in the lottery (when the jackpot symbol is determined), any of the above points may be selected. Alternatively, it may be the end point of a special game based on winning a jackpot.
Further, the timing at which the time-saving gaming state is set may be set to be the same as the timing at which the above-mentioned count value is counted.
Further, the above-mentioned count value may be, for example, in the normal gaming state, counting the fluctuation of the special symbol based on the first special symbol random number mainly obtained during the normal gaming state. However, not only the variation of the special symbol based on the first special symbol random number but also the variation of the special symbol based on the second special symbol random number may be counted.
When set in this way, there are many variations in the timing at which the time-saving gaming state is set, and it is possible to increase the player's interest.

(31) In the pachinko machine set as in the above modification (29), the number of time-saving activations LN is determined in relation to the probability of winning a jackpot in the lottery, and is within a range that does not increase the gambling quality too much. Value (for example, if the probability of winning a jackpot in a lottery is 1/P, P x activation lower limit coefficient (for example, 2.5, etc.) ≦ Number of time saving activations LN ≦ P x activation upper limit coefficient (for example, 3.0 etc.)). Alternatively, the value may be set to an appropriate value depending on the gaming specifications of the pachinko machine, regardless of the probability of winning a jackpot. Further, as the time saving activation number LN, only one value or a plurality of values may be provided.
If you set multiple levels of setting values that are associated with settings related to ball dispensing, you may set a different number of time saving activations LN for each setting value, or you can set the same time saving activation number LN for each setting value. The number of times LN (time saving activation number LN determined based on the probability of winning a jackpot at any set value (for example, the lowest probability of winning a jackpot)) may be set.
When set in this way, it is possible to prevent the gambling nature based on the setting of the time-saving gaming state from becoming too high, and it is possible to increase the variation of the timing at which the time-saving gaming state is set.

(32) In a pachinko machine set as in the above modification (29), the specific time reduction number TN is determined in relation to the probability of winning a jackpot in the winning/failure lottery, and is within a range where the gambling quality does not become too high. Value (for example, if the probability of winning a jackpot in a lottery is 1/P, P x specific lower limit coefficient (for example, 0.4, etc.) ≦Specific time saving number TN≦P x specific upper limit coefficient (for example, 3.8 etc.)). Alternatively, the value may be set to an appropriate value depending on the gaming specifications of the pachinko machine, regardless of the probability of winning a jackpot. Moreover, only one value or a plurality of values may be provided as the specific time reduction number LN.
In addition, the number of time-saving gaming states that are set based on winning a jackpot, and the number of time-saving gaming states that are set based on the determination of a symbol that is set to set a time-saving gaming state, regardless of winning a jackpot. The number of time reductions may also be set to a value within the above range.
In addition, if multiple levels of setting values are provided that are associated with settings related to ball dispensing, a different specific time reduction number TN may be set for each setting value, or the same number of times TN may be set for each setting value. A specific time saving number TN (specific time saving number TN determined based on the probability of winning a jackpot at any set value (for example, the lowest probability of winning a jackpot)) may be set.
In addition, the time-saving gaming state that is set based on the count value of the number of changes of the special symbol reaching the number of time-saving activations LN is based on the winning of the jackpot or the determination of the symbol for which the time-saving gaming state is set. The game may be set to end by satisfying the same time-saving ending conditions as the time-saving gaming state set. For example, the above-mentioned time-saving gaming state may be set to end when a jackpot is won or when a win/fail lottery is performed a specific number of times TN without winning a jackpot.
In addition, as a condition for the time-saving gaming state to end, for example, the total of the number of variations of the special symbol based on the first special symbol random number and the number of variations of the special symbol based on the second special symbol random number reaches the specific number of time-savings TN1; And, if multiple patterns are provided in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol based on the second special symbol random number reaches the specific time saving number TN2, both the specific time saving number TN1 and TN2 will fall within the above range. Alternatively, only either the specific time saving number TN1 or TN2 may fall within the above range.
When set in this way, it is possible to prevent the gambling nature based on the setting of the time-saving gaming state from becoming too high, and it is possible to increase the variation of the timing at which the set time-saving gaming state ends.

(33) In the pachinko machine set as in the above modification (29), the second time-saving game state is set based on the count value of the number of variations of the special symbol reaching the number of time-saving activations LN. A plurality of time-saving gaming states having different processing contents for making it easy to maintain the starting prize opening 16 in an open state may be provided, and any one of the time-saving gaming states may be set depending on the situation.
Specifically, the first time-saving game state in the above-described embodiment, the third time-saving game state in the above-described modification (13), the fourth time-saving game state, the fifth time-saving game state, etc. are provided, and, for example, the time-saving activation The type of jackpot symbol when the final jackpot was won before the number of times LN was reached, the type of the small winning symbol when the last small hit was won before the number LN was reached, the time saving was activated. When the time-saving gaming state is set before the number of times LN is reached, one of the time-saving gaming states is set depending on the type of jackpot symbol, small winning symbol, losing symbol, time-saving symbol, or time-saving winning symbol. It's okay.
When set in this way, the variation of the time-saving game state that is set based on the count value of the number of changes of the special symbol reaching the time-saving activation number LN becomes abundant, and it is possible to increase the player's interest. .

(34) In a pachinko machine in which the time-saving gaming state is set based on the count value of the number of changes of special symbols reaching the number of time-saving activations LN as in the above-mentioned modification (29), the normal gaming state The time-saving gaming state is also set based on the determination of a symbol (time-saving symbol, time-saving winning symbol, small winning symbol, or losing symbol) that is set to set the time-saving gaming state in medium (low probability gaming state). You can also do this.
In the pachinko machine set in this way, a symbol that is set to set the time-saving gaming state is not determined during the time-saving gaming state, but the symbol is determined to set the time-saving gaming state only during the non-time-saving gaming state. It may be possible to determine a symbol in which a time-saving gaming state is set, or it may be possible to determine a symbol in which a time-saving gaming state is set even during a time-saving gaming state.
Also, if the above-mentioned count value reaches the number of time saving activations LN during the normal gaming state (during the low-probability gaming state), and at the same time, the above-mentioned symbol is determined during the normal gaming state (during the low-probability gaming state) (i.e. , if the setting conditions for a plurality of time-saving gaming states are met at the same time), one of the time-saving gaming states may be set.
In addition, the above-mentioned count value is set to be counted not only during the normal gaming state but also during the low probability time saving gaming state and the high probability time saving gaming state. When the count value reaches the number of time saving activation times LN during the game, the time saving gaming state may be set again. In this case, when the time-saving gaming state is reset, the number of time-savings corresponding to the reset time-saving gaming state (i.e., the specific number of time-savings TN) is set again as the number of time-savings. Alternatively, the number of time reductions corresponding to the reset time saving gaming state may be added to the remaining number of time reductions at the time. Further, when the above-mentioned count value reaches the number of time-saving activations LN, after the time-saving gaming state set at that time ends, the time-saving gaming state based on the arrival may be set.
In this case, it is possible to increase the variety of time-saving gaming states that can be set, and to increase the player's interest.

(35) Even in so-called 1 type and 2 type mixed pachinko machines, the time-saving gaming state is set based on the count value of the number of changes of the special symbol reaching the number of time-saving activation times LN, as in the above-mentioned modification example (29). It is also possible to do so.
Further, the above-mentioned count value may not be cleared based on a small winning.
In addition, in the so-called 1 type 2 mixed pachinko machine set as described above, a special game is executed when the result of the lottery is a jackpot, and the result of the lottery is a predetermined small win. In a small winning game that is executed when a winner is won, if a special game is set to be executed when a game ball enters a special area of a specific large prize opening, the above-mentioned modification example (31) or ( 32), the probability P used to determine the number of time-saving activations LN and the specific number of time-savings TN includes the probability of winning the above-mentioned jackpot, the probability of winning the predetermined small win mentioned above (during the non-time-saving gaming state). (probability of winning a small hit in a winning/failure drawing based on the special drawing random numbers that are mainly obtained), or the total probability of winning the jackpot mentioned above and the probability of winning a predetermined small winning mentioned above. Good too.
In addition, in the so-called 1 type 2 type mixed pachinko machine set as described above, there is no jackpot winning as a result of the winning lottery, but when the winning lottery results in a predetermined small winning. If the special game is set to be executed only when the game ball enters the special area of the specific large prize opening in the small winning game to be executed, as in the above-mentioned variations (31) and (32). The probability P used to determine the number of time-saving activations LN and the specific number of time-savings TN is the probability of winning the predetermined small hit mentioned above (in the winning/failure lottery based on special drawing random numbers mainly obtained during the non-time-saving gaming state). The probability of winning a small hit) or the probability of winning a predetermined small win and the game ball entering the special area (probability of a special game being executed via winning a predetermined small win) May be used.
In addition, in the case of a small winning, the time saving activation number LN may be updated depending on the type of small winning symbol determined based on the winning, or may not be updated. .
In addition, in so-called 1 type and 2 type mixed pachinko machines, a time-saving gaming state is set based on the count value of the number of changes of special symbols reaching the number of time-saving activation times LN, and a time-saving gaming state is set during the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state). If the time-saving gaming state is also set based on the determination of a time-saving symbol, a time-saving winning symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol for which the time-saving gaming state is set in (medium), the above-mentioned count value When the above-mentioned symbol is determined at the same time as the time saving activation number LN is reached (that is, when the setting conditions of multiple time saving gaming states are met at the same time), one of the time saving gaming states is set. Good too.
In this case, it is possible to increase the variety of time-saving game states that can be set in a pachinko machine that mixes one type and two types of pachinko, and it is possible to increase the interest of the players.

(36) Pachinko machines also have a time-saving gaming state that is set after the end of a special game based on the determination of a jackpot symbol that is set as a time-saving gaming state (i.e., a jackpot winning state). and the time-saving game state set through the execution of the special game (hereinafter also referred to as the first time-saving), the number of changes in the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of the winning/failure lottery is derived) reaches the predetermined number of time-saving activations LN. (i.e., a time-saving gaming state that is set without winning a jackpot or executing a special game, hereinafter also referred to as a second time-saving gaming state), and the fact that the time-saving gaming state is set. Set based on the determination of prescribed symbols (the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, time-saving winning symbols, small winning symbols that are defined to set a time-saving gaming state, losing symbols that are defined to set a time-saving gaming state, etc.) All of the time-saving game states (that is, the time-saving game states that are set without winning the jackpot and executing the special game, hereinafter also referred to as the third time-saving game) may be provided.
By doing so, there is a wide variety of time-saving gaming states that can be set, so it is possible to increase the player's interest.

(37) In addition, in the above-mentioned first time saving, there are settings such that the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is higher than in the normal gaming state (non-time saving gaming state), a setting where the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened, and , you may make it set so that the opening time of the 2nd starting prize opening 16 becomes long. In addition, in the second time saving mentioned above, the probability of winning in the drawing of normal symbols is the same as in the normal gaming state (non-time saving gaming state), and You may also make settings such that the variation time of the symbols is shortened and the opening time of the second starting prize opening 16 is lengthened. Also, in the third time saving mentioned above, the probability of winning in the drawing of normal symbols is the same as in the normal gaming state (non-time saving gaming state), and You may also make settings such that the variation time of the symbols is shortened and the opening time of the second starting prize opening 16 is lengthened.
In addition, only in the first time saving among the first time saving, second time saving, and third time saving, settings are made such that the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is higher than in the normal gaming state (non-time saving gaming state). It's okay.
By doing so, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of various time-saving gaming states, and it is possible to increase the player's interest.

(38) In addition, when a pachinko machine is equipped with a first time saver, a second time saver, and a third time saver, when a jackpot symbol is determined to set the time saver gaming state during the first time saver, ( 1a) Control may be adopted in which the first time saving is ended and a new first time saving is set after the special game ends. In addition, when the number of changes in the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of the winning/failure lottery is derived) reaches the predetermined number of time saving activations LN during the first time saving, (2a) the first time saving is ended and a new second time saving is started. (2b) Continue the first time reduction; (2c) End the first time reduction if the number of time reductions when setting the second time reduction is greater than the remaining number of time reductions in the first time reduction. , or setting a new second time reduction, any one of (2a) to (2c) may be adopted. In addition, symbols that are set to set a time-saving gaming state during the first time-saving (the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, time-saving winning symbols, small winning symbols that are set to set a time-saving gaming state, and setting a time-saving gaming state) (3a) End the first time reduction and set a new third time reduction, (3b) Continue the first time reduction, (3c) Third time reduction. Among (3a) to (3c), the first time reduction is terminated and a third time reduction is newly set if the number of time reductions when the number of time reductions is set is greater than the remaining number of time reductions in the first time reduction. Either control may be adopted.

Furthermore, when a jackpot symbol is determined to set a time saving game state during the second time saving, (4a) the second time saving is ended and a first time saving is newly set after the special game ends; This control may be adopted. In addition, when the number of changes in the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of the winning/failure lottery is derived) reaches the predetermined number of time saving activations LN during the second time saving, (5a) the second time saving is ended and a new second time saving is started. Any one of the controls (5a) to (5b) may be adopted, such as setting the time reduction or (5b) continuing the second time reduction. In addition, symbols that are set to set a time-saving gaming state during the second time-saving (the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, time-saving winning symbols, small winning symbols that are set to set a time-saving gaming state, and setting a time-saving gaming state) (6a) End the second time reduction and set a new third time reduction, (6b) Continue the second time reduction, (6c) Third time reduction. Among (6a) to (6c), the second time reduction is ended and a third time reduction is newly set if the number of time reductions when the number of time reductions is set is greater than the remaining number of time reductions in the second time reduction. Either control may be adopted.

Furthermore, when a jackpot symbol is determined to set a time saving game state during the third time saving, (7a) the third time saving is ended and a new first time saving is set after the special game ends; This control may be adopted. In addition, when the number of changes in the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of the winning/failure lottery is derived) reaches the predetermined number of time saving activations LN during the third time saving, (8a) the third time saving is ended and a new second (8b) Continue the third time reduction; (8c) End the third time reduction if the number of time reductions when setting the second time reduction is greater than the remaining number of time reductions in the third time reduction. , or setting a new second time reduction, any one of (8a) to (8c) may be adopted. In addition, symbols that are set to set a time-saving gaming state during the third time-saving (the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, time-saving winning symbols, small winning symbols that are set to set a time-saving gaming state, and setting a time-saving gaming state) (9a) End the third time reduction and set a new third time reduction, (9b) Continue the third time reduction, (9c) Third time reduction. Among (9a) to (9c), the third time reduction is ended and a new third time reduction is set if the number of time reductions when the number of time reductions is set is greater than the remaining number of time reductions in the third time reduction. Either control may be adopted.

In addition, as control when various decisions are made in the above-mentioned 1st time reduction, 2nd time reduction, and 3rd time reduction, you may apply it in combination suitably based on the above-mentioned content.
For example, the following control may be performed.
During the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state, non-time saving gaming state), when a jackpot symbol is determined to set the time saving gaming state, the first time saving is set after the end of the special game, and the special symbol When the number of fluctuations (the number of times the lottery result of the win/fail lottery is derived) reaches the predetermined number of time saving activation times LN, the second time saving is set and the symbol that is set to set the time saving gaming state (the above-mentioned time saving When a symbol, a time-saving winning symbol, a small winning symbol prescribed to set a time-saving game state, a losing symbol prescribed to set a time-saving game state, etc.) is determined, a third time-saving symbol is set.
During the first time saving, when a jackpot symbol is determined to set a time saving gaming state, the first time saving is ended, a new first time saving is set after the special game ends, and the number of changes of the special symbol is determined. When (the number of times the lottery result of the winning/failure lottery is derived) reaches a predetermined number of time saving activation times LN, it is determined that the first time saving is continued without setting the second time saving, and a time saving gaming state is set. When a symbol (the above-mentioned time-saving symbol, time-saving winning symbol, small winning symbol that is set to set a time-saving gaming state, losing symbol that is defined to set a time-saving gaming state, etc.) is determined, the third time-saving symbol is determined. Continue the first time reduction without setting.
During the second time reduction, when a jackpot symbol is determined to set a time reduction gaming state, the second time reduction is ended, a new first time reduction is set after the end of the special game, and the number of changes in the special symbol is determined. When (the number of times the lottery results of the winning/failure lottery are derived) reaches the predetermined number of time saving activation times LN, the currently set second time saving is continued without setting a new second time saving, and the time saving game state is entered. (such as the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, time-saving winning symbols, small winning symbols that are designed to set a time-saving gaming state, losing symbols that are designed to set a time-saving gaming state, etc.) When it is determined, the second time reduction is continued without setting the third time reduction.
During the third time reduction, when a jackpot symbol is determined to set a time reduction game state, the third time reduction is ended, and after the special game is over, a new first time reduction is set, and the number of changes in the special symbol is determined. When (the number of times the lottery results of the winning/failure lottery are derived) reaches a predetermined number of time saving activations LN, the third time saving is terminated, a second time saving is newly set, and a time saving gaming state is set. When a symbol (the above-mentioned time-saving symbol, time-saving winning symbol, small winning symbol that is set to set a time-saving gaming state, losing symbol that is set to set a time-saving gaming state, etc.) is determined, a new number of winning symbols is determined. The currently set 3rd time reduction is continued without setting the 3rd time reduction.
When a jackpot symbol is determined to set a time-saving game state during a high-probability time-saving game state or a high-probability non-time-saving game state (that is, during a high-probability game state), after the special game ends, When the first time saver is set and the number of times the special symbol changes (the number of times the lottery result of the winning/fail lottery is derived) reaches a predetermined time saver activation number LN, the second time saver is not set and a time saver gaming state is set. A symbol that has been determined has been determined (such as the above-mentioned time-saving symbol, time-saving winning symbol, small winning symbol that is designated to set a time-saving gaming state, losing symbol that is designated to set a time-saving gaming state, etc.) Sometimes, the third time reduction is not set.
By doing as described above, there are many variations in the settings of the time-saving gaming state, so it is possible to increase the player's interest.

As mentioned in (31) above, if a pachinko machine is provided with a second time reduction and a setting value that is associated with settings related to ball dispensing, the same time reduction will occur regardless of which setting value is used. The number of activations LN may be set.
By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the degree of advantage between each setting value changes excessively due to the setting of the second time saving.
In addition, the main control board 100 is configured to count the number of times the special symbol changes (the number of times the lottery results of the winning/failure lottery are derived) in order to determine whether the number of time saving activations LN has been reached. Counting is always performed during low probability gaming states (low probability non-time saving gaming states, low probability time saving gaming states) and is not performed during high probability gaming states (high probability non time saving gaming states, high probability time saving gaming states). You can do it like this. That is, during the low probability gaming state, the above-mentioned counting may always be performed regardless of whether or not the time saving gaming state is set.
By doing so, the second time saving can be reliably set only during the low probability gaming state.

In addition, as the end conditions for the second time reduction, (10a) winning the jackpot is set, and (10b) the number of fluctuations based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15 and the second starting winning. (10c) The total number of fluctuations based on the entry of game balls into the opening 16 reaches the time saving number, (10c) The number of fluctuations based on the entry of game balls into the second starting prize opening 16 reaches a specific number. , (10d) The number of small winnings must reach a predetermined number of times. Any one or more of (10a) to (10c) may be set.
For example, the following contents can be set as the end conditions for the first time reduction, the second time reduction, and the third time reduction.
Specifically, in a pachinko machine, the jackpot symbol XA1 (in the variable performance, the first stop symbol, the second stop symbol, and the third stop symbol are all "7") and jackpot symbol XA2 (in the variable production, the first stop symbol, the second stop symbol, and the third stop symbol are all other than "7"), and the time-saving game The time-saving symbol JD1 that is determined to set the state (in a variable production, the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol are the same odd number symbols other than "7", and the third stop symbol is "7") The time-saving gaming state is set when the number of changes in the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of the win/fail lottery is derived) reaches a predetermined number of times LN (for example, 1000 times), and in the win/fail lottery, the time-saving gaming state is set. It is assumed that it is possible to win a small prize.
In this pachinko machine, the first time reduction set after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol The game ends when the total number of variations based on the ball entering and the number of variations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting prize opening 16 reaches 100 times (time saving number), and the game enters the second starting winning opening 16. It can be set to end when the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering reaches 10 times (a specific number of times), and to end when the number of small winnings reaches 2 times (a predetermined number of times).
In addition, the first time reduction set after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol The process ends when the total number of fluctuations based on the number of fluctuations based on the number of fluctuations based on the number of fluctuations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting prize opening 16 reaches 50 times (time saving number), and the number of fluctuations based on the number of fluctuations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting prize opening 16. It can be set to end when the number of fluctuations based on the ball reaches 4 times (a specific number of times), and to end when the number of small winnings reaches 1 time (a predetermined number of times).
In addition, the second time reduction, which is set when the number of changes in the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of the win/fail lottery is derived) reaches a predetermined number of time reduction activation times LN, is set to end based on the winning of the jackpot. At the same time, the total number of fluctuations based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15 and the number of fluctuations based on the entering of the gaming ball into the second starting winning opening 16 reached 600 times (time saving number). It ends when the number of fluctuations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting prize opening 16 reaches 50 times (specific number of times), and the number of small winnings reaches 10 times (predetermined number of times). It can be set to end when the destination is reached.
In addition, the third time saving, which is set when the time saving symbol JD1 is determined, is set to end based on the winning of the jackpot, and the number of changes based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting prize opening 15. And it ends when the total number of fluctuations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning hole 16 reaches 60 times (time saving number), and it is based on the entering of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16. It can be set to end when the number of fluctuations reaches 8 times (a specific number of times) and ends when the number of small winnings reaches 3 times (a predetermined number of times).
By doing as described above, it is possible to increase the variety of endings of the time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to provide various gaming features.

In addition, regarding the second time reduction, if the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is set to be the same as in the normal gaming state (non-time reduction gaming state), the second starting prize opening 16 will be opened during the second time reduction. In order to easily maintain this state, it is necessary to set the above-mentioned probability of winning during the normal gaming state to a certain degree. In this case, the movable piece 16b is designed to be able to protrude and retract from the game board 11, and when the movable piece 16b protrudes from the game board 11, the movable piece 16b guides the game ball to the second starting prize opening 16. On the other hand, when the movable piece 16b is immersed in the game board 11, the game ball is not guided to the second starting prize opening 16 and the ball enters the second starting winning opening 16. By configuring the ball so that it does not enter the starting prize opening 16, and by setting the projecting time (opening time) of the movable piece 16b to be shorter during the normal gaming state than during the second time reduction, In the case of winning in the drawing of normal symbols, the rate of entry of game balls into the second starting prize opening 16 can be lowered than in the case of winning in the drawing of normal symbols during the second time reduction. can.

Moreover, the number of times that the second time saving can be set may be only one time between winning a jackpot and winning the next jackpot. Specifically, after winning the jackpot (the end of the special game), the second time reduction is set when the number of changes in the special symbol (the number of times the lottery results of the winning/failure lottery are derived) reaches a predetermined number of time saving activations LN. After that, even if the number of variations of the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of a win/fail lottery is derived) reaches the number of times LN of time saving activation without winning a jackpot, the second time saving may not be set.
By doing this, it is possible to prevent the time-saving gaming state from being set too much and the gambling nature from becoming too high.

In addition, as described above, the main control board 100 controls, during the low probability gaming state (low probability non-time saving gaming state, low probability time saving gaming state), to determine whether the number of time saving activations LN has been reached. The number of times the special symbol changes (the number of times the lottery result of the win/fail lottery is derived) is counted, but after winning the jackpot (the end of the special game), the number of times the special symbol changes (the number of times the lottery result of the win/fail lottery is derived) is reduced in time. After the second time reduction is set due to reaching the activation number LN, the above-mentioned counting may be stopped.
By doing so, the processing load on the main control board 100 can be reduced.

In addition, symbols that are set to set a time-saving gaming state during the first time saving or second time saving (the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, time-saving winning symbols, small winning symbols that are set to set a time-saving gaming state, time-saving symbols) Even if the first time reduction or the second time reduction is set to continue without setting the third time reduction when a losing symbol, etc. for which a gaming state is set is determined, the first time reduction or the second time reduction is set. , Set the time-saving gaming state based on the final lottery of the first time saving or the second time saving (the winning lottery just before the number of changes of the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of the winning lottery is derived) reaches the number of time saving times). A symbol that has been determined has been determined (such as the above-mentioned time-saving symbol, time-saving winning symbol, small winning symbol that is designated to set a time-saving gaming state, losing symbol that is designated to set a time-saving gaming state, etc.) Sometimes, a third time reduction may be set.
By doing so, it is possible to increase the continuity of the time-saving gaming state and increase the player's interest.
In addition, in the case of setting as described above, the final lottery of the first time saving or the second time saving (the winning lottery just before the number of changes of the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of the winning lottery is derived) reaches the number of time saving) ), symbols that are set to set a time-saving gaming state (the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, time-saving winning symbols, small winning symbols that are set to set a time-saving gaming state, and symbols that are set to set a time-saving gaming state) When a losing symbol (such as a losing symbol, etc.) is determined, the first time saving or second time saving is completed with the end of the special symbol variation in the final round, and a non-time saving gaming state is set, and the non-time saving gaming state is set. After that, a stop display of a symbol that is determined to set the above-mentioned time-saving gaming state may be performed, and after the stop display is performed, a third time-saving game may be set. In addition, in conjunction with the above-mentioned setting of the non-time-saving gaming state, the transmission of the external signal (time-saving signal) that is sent to the outside of the pachinko machine in the time-saving gaming state and indicating that it is in the time-saving gaming state is terminated, and the third The external signal may be transmitted again in accordance with the time reduction setting.
By doing so, it is possible to reliably execute the end of the time-saving gaming state and control the new settings, and it is also possible to reliably notify the outside of the pachinko machine of the switching of the time-saving gaming state.

In addition, if you win a small hit by winning the winning lottery at the time when the number of variations of the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of the winning lottery is derived) reaches the predetermined number of time saving activation times LN, you will receive a small prize based on the winning of the small winning. It may be set so that both the winning game and the setting of the second time saving when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches the number of time saving activation times LN are executed.
In addition, when set in this way, the second time saving is (a) from the winning of the small win until the small win symbol is stopped and displayed and the start of the small win game, and (b) from the start of the small win game to the end. It may be set at any timing up to (c) after the end of the small winning game.
By doing this, in the case where a small win and the fulfillment of the conditions for setting the second time reduction overlap, there are many variations in the timing at which the second time reduction is set, so it is rich in variation. It becomes possible to add more gameplay.

In addition, if the second time reduction and the third time reduction are installed, the advantage may be set to be the same for both the second time reduction and the third time reduction (in other words, it is possible to set it so that the advantage is the same in the lottery of normal symbols. You may set the probability that the normal symbol will be the same, the variation time of the normal symbol, and the opening time of the second starting winning hole 16 to be the same), or you may set the advantage to be different (the normal symbol lottery Any one or more of the probability of winning, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the opening time of the second starting prize opening 16 may be set differently). For example, a setting may be made in which the second time reduction is more advantageous than the third time reduction (a setting that increases the probability of winning in the drawing of normal symbols, a setting that shortens the fluctuation time of normal symbols, and a setting that increases the probability of winning in the lottery of normal symbols, and (You may perform any one or more of the settings that lengthen the opening time of the starting prize opening 16).
By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the advantages of the second time saving and the third time saving, and it is possible to increase the player's interest.
In addition, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of the win/fail lottery is derived) reaches the predetermined number of times LN of time-saving activation, symbols that are set to set a time-saving gaming state (the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, time-saving When a winning symbol, a small winning symbol that is set to set a time saving gaming state, a losing symbol that is set to a time saving gaming state, etc.) is determined, the second time saving is given priority over the third time saving. You may also set it.
By doing so, even if the conditions for setting the second time reduction and the third time reduction overlap, the second time reduction can be reliably set.

(39) Also, regarding the first time reduction, second time reduction, and third time reduction, the change of special symbols based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting prize opening 15 and the change of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16. Simultaneously change the special symbols based on the ball entering (that is, both the reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15 and the holding based on the entering of the gaming ball into the second starting winning hole 16) It is also installed in a pachinko machine (hereinafter also referred to as a simultaneous play machine) that is set to perform so-called simultaneous play control, which processes both holds at the same time when the above is stored. 38) may be configured.
When the simultaneous spinning machine is equipped with a first time saver, a second time saver, and a third time saver, based on the entry of the game ball into either the first start winning opening 15 or the second starting winning opening 16. Symbols that are designed to set a time-saving gaming state (the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, time-saving winning symbols, small winning symbols that are designed to set a time-saving gaming state, losing symbols that are designed to set a time-saving gaming state) etc.) is determined, and during the variation of the special symbol based on the determination, the number of variations of the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of the win/fail lottery is derived) is predetermined based on the entry of the game ball into either one of the other balls. When the number of time-saving activations LN is reached, during the variation of the special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into either one of the above-mentioned ones, the number of changes of the special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the other one of the above-mentioned ( A second time reduction is set when the number of times the lottery result of the winning/failure lottery is drawn reaches the number of time reduction activation times LN, and after the second time reduction is set, a game ball is determined based on the entry of the game ball into one of the above-mentioned balls. Although the symbols for which the third time saving game state is set are displayed in a stopped state, the third time saving game state may be controlled not to be set.
In addition, a symbol that is determined to set a time-saving gaming state based on the entry of a game ball into either the first starting winning hole 15 or the second starting winning hole 16 (the above-mentioned time-saving symbol, time-saving winning symbol , a small winning symbol that is set to set a time-saving gaming state, a losing symbol that is set to set a time-saving gaming state, etc.), and while the special symbol is changing based on the decision, either one of the winning symbols is decided. When the jackpot symbol is determined based on the game ball entering the game ball (the jackpot has been won), during the fluctuation of the special symbol based on the game ball entering the game ball into either one of the above, A time-saving game in which a first time-save is set based on the jackpot symbol being determined based on the entry of the game ball into one of the above-mentioned balls after setting the first time-save. Although the symbols for which the state is set are displayed in a stopped state, the third time saving may be controlled not to be set.
By doing this, even if the conditions for setting the first time reduction or the second time reduction are met in the simultaneous turning machine, and the conditions for setting the third time reduction are met simultaneously, It is possible to reliably set the first time reduction or the second time reduction.

(40) In the above embodiment, after the above-mentioned consecutive jackpot number condition (the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number), the determination ratio of the fluctuation time is set to be longer than before the consecutive jackpot number condition is satisfied. By increasing the amount, the number of special games executed per unit time (number of jackpot wins per unit time) was reduced, but in order to reduce the number of special games executed per unit time. The control method by the main CPU 101 is not limited to this. A specific example will be described below.
As mentioned above, continuous jackpots mean winning a jackpot in the normal gaming state and moving to at least one of the time-saving gaming state or the high probability gaming state, and then continuing without shifting to the normal gaming state. This refers to the jackpot that was won.

(Specific example 1)
For example, when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3 times, etc.), in the variations executed after this, (A) the variation time of the special symbol variation executed before this The determination ratio may be set to be high for long fluctuation times. In addition, in the special game to be executed after this, (B) an opening time may be set that is longer than the opening time in the special game executed before this, or (C) (D) The ending time may be set to be longer than the ending time of the special game that was being played, or (D) the interval time may be set to be longer than the ending time of the special game that was being played before. (E) A longer opening time may be set than the opening time of the big prize opening 18 in the special game that was executed before this.

(Specific example 2)
For example, when the total number of rounds executed during a continuous jackpot reaches a predetermined number (for example, 20 times, etc.), the above-mentioned (A) to (E) will be applied in fluctuations and special games that will be executed thereafter. You can also set it as follows.
(Specific example 3)
For example, if the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 3 times, etc.) and the total number of rounds executed during the consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 20 times, etc.), In the fluctuations and special games to be played, settings may be made as shown in (A) to (E) above.

(Specific example 4)
For example, when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3 times, etc.), and the jackpot symbol determined in the jackpot after reaching the predetermined number or after reaching the predetermined number, the jackpot symbol is a specific symbol (during a special game). If the number of rounds to be executed is relatively large (10 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.), the fluctuations related to the winning of the jackpot and the fluctuations to be performed thereafter, In the special game based on the winning of the jackpot and the special game to be executed thereafter, the above-mentioned (A) to (E) may be set.
(Specific example 5)
For example, during a continuous jackpot, the total number of rounds executed reaches a predetermined number (for example, 20 times, etc.), and the jackpot symbol determined at the time of winning the jackpot after reaching the predetermined number is a specific symbol (during a special game). If the number of rounds executed is relatively large (10 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.) (such as set jackpot symbols, etc.), in the fluctuations related to winning the jackpot and the fluctuations executed after that, , the above-mentioned (A) to (E) may be set in a special game based on the winning of the jackpot or a special game to be executed thereafter.

(Specific example 6)
For example, during a continuous jackpot, if the number of fluctuations from the end of a predetermined special game to winning the next jackpot is less than a certain number of times (for example, 10 times), the fluctuations related to the winning of the jackpot or this In the fluctuations to be executed thereafter, and in the special game based on the winning of the jackpot and the special game to be executed after this, the above-mentioned (A) to (E) may be set.
(Specific example 7)
For example, during a continuous jackpot, the number of fluctuations from the end of a predetermined special game to winning the next jackpot is less than a certain number of times (for example, 10 times, etc.), and the decision is made when the next jackpot is won. If the jackpot symbol that has been awarded is a specific symbol (such as a jackpot symbol that is set to have a relatively large number of rounds executed during the special game (10 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.)), The above-mentioned (A) to (E) may be set in a variation or a variation executed thereafter, or in a special game based on the winning of the jackpot or a special game executed thereafter.

(Specific example 8)
For example, when the total number of prize balls paid out during consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3000 balls, etc.), the above-mentioned (A) to (E ) may also be set.
(Specific example 9)
For example, the total number of prize balls paid out during consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3000, etc.), and the jackpot symbol determined in the jackpot after reaching the predetermined number is a specific symbol (during a special game). If the number of rounds executed is relatively large (10 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.), the fluctuations related to winning the jackpot and the fluctuations executed after that, , the above-mentioned (A) to (E) may be set in a special game based on the winning of the jackpot or a special game to be executed thereafter.

(Specific example 10)
For example, when the difference between the number of prize balls paid out during a continuous jackpot and the number of fired balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1,500 balls, etc.), the above-mentioned fluctuations and special games that will be executed from then on will be It may be set as shown in (A) to (E).
(Specific example 11)
For example, the difference between the number of prize balls paid out during consecutive jackpots and the number of balls fired reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1,500, etc.), and the jackpot symbol determined in the jackpot after reaching the predetermined number is specified. (Jackpot symbols with a relatively large number of rounds executed during the special game (10 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.)), changes related to winning the jackpot and subsequent executions. In the fluctuations to be made, or in the special game based on the winning of the jackpot or the special game to be executed thereafter, settings may be made as described in (A) to (E) above.

(Specific example 12)
For example, the fluctuation pattern determined at the time of winning a predetermined jackpot during a continuous jackpot is a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time (3 seconds, 6 seconds, etc.)) In this case, the settings may be set as in (A) above in the variations to be executed after this, or the above-mentioned changes may be set in the special game based on the winning of the jackpot or the special game to be executed after this. It may be set as shown in (B) to (E).
(Specific example 13)
For example, when the first special figure random number and the second special figure random number are stored, before the fluctuation based on the first special figure random number and the second special figure random number start, the first special figure random number and the second special figure random number are Pre-judgment processing is set to be executed to perform various judgments regarding winning/failure drawings and special symbol determination regarding random numbers (determination of whether or not to win a jackpot, determination of the type of special symbol to be determined, etc.), During consecutive jackpots, if the judgment result from the preliminary judgment process is the predetermined content (for example, the pending items stored at the end of the special game include those that win the jackpot, etc.), In the variations and special games to be executed after this, settings as described in (A) to (E) above may be made.

(Specific example 14)
For example, when the total elapsed time during a continuous jackpot reaches a predetermined time (for example, 15 minutes, etc.), in the fluctuations and special games that will be executed from then on, as in (A) to (E) above, May be set.
(Specific example 15)
For example, if the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3 times, etc.) and the total elapsed time during the consecutive jackpots is less than or equal to the predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes, etc.), then For fluctuations and special games, settings may be made as shown in (A) to (E) above.

(Specific example 16)
For example, when the total execution time of special games during a continuous jackpot reaches a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes, etc.), the above-mentioned (A) to (E) are You can also set it like this.
(Specific example 17)
For example, if the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3 times, etc.) and the total execution time of special games during the consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes, etc.), then The variations and special games to be executed may be set as shown in (A) to (E) above.

Even when the setting is made as described above, the number of special games executed per unit time (the number of jackpot wins per unit time) can be reduced, as in the above-described embodiment. This prevents the occurrence of situations where the gambling nature becomes extremely high, such as when a large number of special games are executed in a concentrated manner over a short period of time, and the number of prize balls won by the player increases rapidly. Can be appropriately prevented.

Furthermore, the various conditions in Specific Examples 1 to 17 described above can be set in combination with each other as long as no contradiction occurs. Further, regarding the settings (A) to (E) described above when various conditions are satisfied, only one or a plurality of settings may be set.

The main control board 100 is also provided with a counter (consisting of a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103) for counting the number of consecutive jackpots, and the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number based on the count value of the counter. It may be determined whether or not. Then, when the various conditions in Specific Examples 1 to 17 described above are satisfied, any one or more of the settings (A) to (E) described above may be set.
In addition, since the game ball enters the second start winning hole 16 during the high probability time saving game state, the continuous jackpot is a jackpot won mainly based on the second special drawing random number. Therefore, the above-mentioned counter counts the number of successive jackpots based on the second special drawing random number, and resets the count value of the counter when a jackpot is won based on the first special drawing random number. If the number of successive jackpots is set as follows and the number of consecutive jackpots won based on the second special random number reaches a predetermined number, it is determined that the conditions regarding the number of consecutive jackpots in specific examples 1 to 17 described above are satisfied. You may also do so. In other words, if you win a jackpot based on the first special drawing random number, it will be treated as if the continuous jackpot has been interrupted, and if you do not win a jackpot continuously based on the second special drawing random number, the above-mentioned specific examples 1- The conditions regarding the number of consecutive jackpots in 17 may be set so as not to be satisfied.
If you win a jackpot based on the second special random number, it is decided to execute a special game in which the number of game balls that can be acquired is relatively larger than if you win a jackpot based on the first special random number. There is a high possibility that the number of prize balls won by a player will increase rapidly in a short period of time. When set as described above, only the jackpot based on the second special drawing random number is subject to the condition regarding the number of consecutive jackpots, so the settings (A) to (E) described above will be made excessively. The situation can be prevented.

Further, when the various conditions in Specific Examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, (A) regarding the variable time and at least one of (B) to (E) regarding the various times during the special game are set in combination. Sometimes, after the various conditions are met, both the variable time and the various times during the special game are longer than before the various conditions are met, but the rate of change in the variable time is greater than the rate of change of the various times during the special game. may be set to be larger.
For example, when the conditions in Example 1 are met and (A) and (B) are set in combination, the variation time of the special symbol variation is 3 seconds before the number of consecutive jackpots reaches the predetermined number. or 6 seconds are likely to be determined, and after the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number, the fluctuation time of the special symbol will be 13 seconds or 15 seconds (2.5 times to 5 times the fluctuation time before reaching the predetermined number) In addition, the opening time during the special game is 10 seconds before the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number, and after the number of consecutive jackpots reaches the predetermined number, The opening time during the game may be set to be 15 seconds (changed to 1.5 times the opening time before reaching the predetermined number of times).

In addition, when the various conditions in Examples 1 to 17 are satisfied and (A) regarding the fluctuation time is set, after the various conditions are satisfied, the fluctuation pattern becomes less reachable than before the various conditions are satisfied. Although both the fluctuation time and the fluctuation time of fluctuations that become a reach fluctuation pattern become longer, the rate of change of the fluctuation time of fluctuations that become a reach fluctuation pattern is higher than the rate of change of the fluctuation time of fluctuations that become a fluctuation pattern without reach. It may be set so that it becomes larger, or it may be set so that the rate of change in the variation time of the variation that becomes the no-reach variation pattern is greater than the rate of change of the variation time of the variation that becomes the reach variation pattern. .
For example, if (A) is set when the conditions in Example 2 are met, before the total number of rounds executed during consecutive jackpots reaches the predetermined number, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes the no-reach fluctuation pattern is 3. seconds or 6 seconds are likely to be determined, and after the total number of rounds executed during a continuous jackpot reaches a predetermined number, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes a no-reach fluctuation pattern is 13 seconds or 15 seconds (before reaching the predetermined number) In addition, before the total number of rounds executed during a continuous jackpot reaches a predetermined number, the fluctuation of the fluctuation becomes a reach fluctuation pattern. 20 seconds or 30 seconds is easily determined as the time, and after the total number of rounds executed during consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes the reach fluctuation pattern is 180 seconds or 240 seconds (when the predetermined number of rounds is reached). The setting may be made so that the change (6 to 12 times the change time before reaching the change) is easily determined.
In addition, when (A) is set when the conditions in Specific Example 8 are met, before the total number of prize balls paid out during consecutive jackpots reaches the predetermined number, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation becomes a no-reach fluctuation pattern. 3 seconds or 6 seconds are likely to be determined as the maximum number of balls, and after the total number of prize balls paid out during consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number, 13 seconds or 15 seconds (predetermined In addition, before the total number of prize balls paid out during consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number, the reach fluctuation 20 seconds or 30 seconds is likely to be determined as the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes the pattern, and after the total number of rounds executed during consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes the reach fluctuation pattern is set to 40 seconds or 30 seconds. It may be set so that 45 seconds (varies approximately 1.3 to 2.25 times the variation time before reaching the predetermined number) is easily determined.
In addition, if the various conditions in Specific Examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, at least one of (B) to (E) regarding various times during special games is set without setting (A) regarding variable time. By doing so, after the various conditions are met, although the variable time does not change, the execution time of the special game (opening time, ending time, interval time, opening time of the big prize opening 18) may be made longer. . In addition, in this case, for example, the opening time after satisfying various conditions is longer than other times (ending time, interval time, opening time of the big prize opening 18) after satisfying the conditions. It may be set to be longer, or it may be set so that the rate of change in the opening time before and after satisfying various conditions is greater than the rate of change in other times.

Furthermore, if the various conditions in the above specific examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, other settings may be made instead of the settings as in (A) to (E) above. For example, if various conditions are met, in the regular symbol game to be executed after this, (F) the determination ratio of the fluctuation time longer than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation of the regular symbol that was executed before this will be higher. (G) The opening time may be set to be shorter than the opening time of the movable piece 16b of the second starting prize opening 16 before this.
Also, for example, if various conditions are met, after the end of the subsequent special game, (H) the number of time reductions set after the end of the previous special game is set to be smaller than the number of time reductions set after the end of the previous special game. It's okay.
By setting in this way, the frequency of game balls entering the second starting prize opening 16 is reduced, and the chances of winning or losing lottery are also reduced, so the number of special games executed per unit time (per unit time The number of jackpot wins) can be reduced.

For example, if various conditions are met, in the special game to be executed after this, (I) a mode in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than in the previous special game (for example, 0.5 seconds) The grand prize opening 18 may be set to open and close in a manner such as repeating opening and closing for 1.0 seconds a predetermined number of times.
When set in this way, the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the special game is reduced, and the total number of prize balls per unit time can be reduced. As a result, even if a large number of special games are executed in a concentrated manner over a short period of time, the number of prize balls that the player obtains can be reduced, resulting in an extremely high level of gambling. It is possible to appropriately prevent such situations from occurring.

Also, for example, if various conditions are met, when the special symbol changes from now on, (J) when both the first special symbol random number and the second special symbol random number are stored, the second special symbol It may be set so that the first special figure random number is processed in priority to the random number.
When set in this way, when a jackpot is won based on the first special drawing random number than when a jackpot is won based on the second special drawing random number, it is decided to execute a special game with a smaller number of rounds. Since the percentage of winning balls is high, the expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the special game decreases, and the expected value of the total number of prize balls per unit time can be reduced. As a result, even if a large number of special games are executed in a concentrated manner over a short period of time, the number of prize balls that the player obtains can be reduced, resulting in an extremely high level of gambling. It is possible to appropriately prevent such situations from occurring.

Further, as for the settings (F) to (J), like (A) to (E), only one of them may be set, or a plurality of settings may be set. Further, it may be set in combination with at least one of (A) to (E).
In addition, in the settings (A) to (G), when the various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, various times become longer, but while the predetermined time is , and other times may be set to be shorter. For example, when the various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, the determination ratio of the variation time longer than the variation time of the special symbol variation executed before this is set to be higher ((A) The ending time may be set shorter than the ending time of the special game that was previously executed (setting (C)).
In this case, after the various conditions in Examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, the time from the start of the fluctuation until the end of the special game becomes too long, and the interests of the players are extremely hindered. It is possible to prevent such situations from occurring.

In addition, when the various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, and the settings of (A) to (E) are made and various times are made to be longer, specific effects are executed within the longer period. The frequency may be set to be high.
For example, when various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, the setting is made so that the determination ratio of the variation time longer than the variation time of the previously executed special symbol variation is set (Setting (A) ), when a long variation time is determined, it may be set so that the frequency of execution of a suggestive effect (specific effect) indicating the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot in the corresponding variation may be increased. Further, it may be set so that the frequency of execution of a special effect (specific effect) indicating content unrelated to the result of the winning lottery may be increased.

In addition, when various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, an opening time that is longer than the opening time of the special game that was executed before this is set (setting of (B)), If the ending time is set to be longer than the ending time of the special game that was executed before this (setting of (C)), the ending time will be stored at that point until the opening time or ending time has passed. It may be set to increase the frequency of execution of a look-ahead effect (specific effect) that suggests that there is something that can be determined to be a jackpot among the pending games.
Note that there is no particular limitation on the degree of change in the execution frequency of a specific performance. For example, a specific effect may not be executed before the above conditions are met, but the specific effect may be set to be executed after the above conditions are met; Before the various conditions were met, specific effects were executed at a predetermined execution rate, but after the various conditions described above were met, the specific effects were executed at a higher rate than the above-mentioned predetermined execution rate. You may also set it so that it is executed.
In this case, as described above, while appropriately preventing the occurrence of a situation where gambling becomes extremely high, it is also possible to prevent players' interest from decreasing due to the lengthening of various time periods. can be prevented.

In addition, if one or more of (A) to (J) are set when the various conditions in Specific Examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, the corresponding The setting may be canceled (that is, the setting may be returned to the setting before satisfying the various conditions described above).
Note that the predetermined end conditions include, for example, that a change has been made a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times) due to settings made after satisfying the various conditions described above, and that changes have been made after satisfying the various conditions described above. Depending on the settings, the special game has been played a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) (the jackpot has been won a predetermined number of times), or it has been determined that the continuous jackpot has been interrupted (for example, when the regular game is played after the special game ends) It is possible to set the following information: the jackpot symbol for which the state is set has been determined, the normal gaming state has been set, a predetermined number of changes have been made since the normal gaming state was set, etc. .
In this case, the setting for preventing a situation where gambling becomes high continues for a long time, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

In addition, if various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17 are satisfied and one or more of (A) to (J) are set, at least one of the time-saving gaming state or the high-probability time-saving gaming state is Even when the game is continuing (that is, during a continuous jackpot), if certain conditions are met (for example, a special game with a relatively large number of game balls that can be acquired is When the associated jackpot symbol ).
In this case, the setting for preventing a situation where gambling becomes high continues for a long time, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

In addition, if the various conditions in Specific Examples 1 to 17 are met, specific external information may be transferred to the outside of the pachinko machine P (for example, a pachinko machine such as a hall computer) in order to transmit the settings made based on this. Alternatively, in order to notify that the above settings have been made, a predetermined display (for example, a specific It may also be possible to display a mark image, display a warning message such as "Game progress time is changing", or light a lamp in a predetermined manner.
Furthermore, when the various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, history information indicating that fact may be stored in the main RAM 103 of the main control board 100 or the sub RAM 303 of the sub control board 300. In this case, it is possible to understand the frequency and period during which settings are made to prevent situations where gambling becomes high, which can be used to develop pachinko machines that are less prone to situations where gambling becomes high. can.

In addition, the pachinko machine P is provided with a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables 114 in which the length of the fluctuation time that can be determined and the determination ratio of the fluctuation time are set to be different, and a jackpot is achieved in a state where various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17 are not satisfied. When a player wins a jackpot, after the special game based on the jackpot ends, a variation pattern (variation time) is determined by referring to a different variation pattern table 114 based on the jackpot symbol determined at the time of winning the jackpot. Assume that it has been set.
Even with these settings, if you win the jackpot while meeting the various conditions mentioned above and setting one or more of (A) to (J), No matter which jackpot symbol is determined at the time of winning the jackpot, the variation pattern (variation time) may be determined by referring to the common variation pattern table 114.
Specifically, for example, if you win a jackpot and jackpot symbol When a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined by referring to the first fluctuation pattern table 114 in which the determination ratio is set high, and a jackpot is won without satisfying the various conditions described above, and jackpot symbol X2 is determined. After the special game based on the jackpot ends, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined by referring to the second fluctuation pattern table 114 in which the determination ratio of relatively short fluctuation time is set high. It is assumed that it was set to . When the settings are set in this way, even if you win a jackpot with the above conditions met and either jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is determined, after the special game based on the jackpot ends, The variation pattern (variation time) is determined by referring to the third variation pattern table 114 in which the determination ratio of variation times longer than the variation time that can be determined by the first variation pattern table 114 is set higher. It's okay.

Further, the pachinko machine P may be provided with a variation pattern table 114 as described below. The variation pattern table 114 will be specifically explained below. In this case, we do not take into account the time-saving award winnings (determining the time-saving symbols), and the winning of the small hit is not determined in the lottery, but is determined when the game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16. An example will be explained in which there are two types of jackpot symbols, X1 and X2, and one type of losing symbol, Y2.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 59 to 60, refer to the case where a game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16 when various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17 are not satisfied during a high probability time saving gaming state. When the various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17 are satisfied and one or more of the above-mentioned settings (A) to (J) are performed, the second Tables D1, D2, and D3 may be provided to be referred to when a game ball enters the starting winning hole 16.

As shown in FIG. 59, according to table C, when the losing symbol Y2 is determined, regardless of the current second special symbol pending number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 49, "3 seconds When the fluctuation pattern command "C0H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "Fluctuation" (fluctuation pattern in which the entire fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds) is determined, and the fluctuation pattern random number is 50 to 124, When the fluctuation pattern command "C1H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "Fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the entire fluctuation time is set to 5 seconds) is determined, and the fluctuation pattern random number is 125 to 224, When the fluctuation pattern command "C2H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "Fluctuation" (fluctuation pattern in which the entire fluctuation time is set to 10 seconds) is determined, and the fluctuation pattern random number is 225 to 249, the fluctuation pattern "15 seconds" is determined. A variation pattern command "C3H" associated with a variation pattern of "Fluctuation" (a variation pattern in which the entire variation time is set to 15 seconds) is determined.
In addition, when the jackpot symbol X1 or When the fluctuation pattern command "D0H" associated with the fluctuation pattern set to 30 seconds is determined, and the fluctuation pattern random number is between 50 and 124, the fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds fluctuation" (the entire fluctuation time is set to 60 seconds) is determined. When the fluctuation pattern command "D1H" associated with the fluctuation pattern set to seconds) is determined, and the fluctuation pattern random number is 125 to 174, the fluctuation pattern of "100 seconds fluctuation" (the entire fluctuation time is 10 seconds) is determined. When the fluctuation pattern command "D2H" associated with the fluctuation pattern set for "120 seconds fluctuation" (the entire fluctuation time is 120 seconds) is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is between 175 and 249. A variation pattern command "D3H" associated with the set variation pattern) is determined.

As shown in FIG. 60(a), according to the table D1, when the losing symbol Y2 is determined, regardless of the current second special symbol pending number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 12, " When the fluctuation pattern command "C0H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "3 seconds fluctuation" is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is between 13 and 25, the fluctuation pattern command associated with the fluctuation pattern of "5 seconds fluctuation" is issued. When "C1H" is determined and the variation pattern random number is between 26 and 50, the variation pattern command "50 seconds variation" (variation pattern in which the entire variation time is set to 50 seconds) is associated with "C4H" is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is 51 to 150, the fluctuation pattern command "C5H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds fluctuation" is determined, and the fluctuation pattern random number is 225 to 249. At this time, a variation pattern command "C6H" associated with a variation pattern of "100 seconds variation" is determined.
In addition, when jackpot symbol X1 or When the fluctuation pattern command "D1H" is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is 50 to 124, the fluctuation pattern command "D2H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "100 seconds fluctuation" is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is 125. ~174, the fluctuation pattern command "D4H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "150 seconds fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the entire fluctuation time is set to 150 seconds) is determined, and the fluctuation pattern random number is 175 ~ 249, a variation pattern command "D5H" associated with a variation pattern of "200 second variation" (a variation pattern in which the entire variation time is set to 200 seconds) is determined.

As shown in FIG. 60(b), according to table D2, when the losing symbol Y2 is determined, regardless of the current number of second special symbols pending, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 24, " When the fluctuation pattern command "C4H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "50 seconds fluctuation" is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is between 25 and 74, the fluctuation pattern command associated with the fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds fluctuation" is issued. When "C5H" is determined and the variation pattern random number is between 75 and 149, the variation pattern command "70 seconds variation" (variation pattern in which the entire variation time is set to 70 seconds) is associated with the variation pattern command "C7H" is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is between 150 and 249, a fluctuation pattern command "C6H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "100 second fluctuation" is determined.
In addition, when jackpot symbol X1 or When the fluctuation pattern command "D1H" is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is 50 to 124, the fluctuation pattern command "D2H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "100 seconds fluctuation" is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is 125. ~174, the fluctuation pattern command "D4H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "150 seconds fluctuation" is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is between 175 and 249, the fluctuation pattern of "200 seconds fluctuation" is determined. A variation pattern command "D5H" with which "D5H" is associated is determined.

As shown in FIG. 60(c), according to table D3, when the losing symbol Y2 is determined, regardless of the current second special symbol pending number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 249, " A variation pattern command "C5H" associated with a variation pattern of "60 seconds variation" is determined.
In addition, when jackpot symbol X1 or When the fluctuation pattern command "D1H" is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is 50 to 124, the fluctuation pattern command "D2H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "100 seconds fluctuation" is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is 125. ~174, the fluctuation pattern command "D4H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "150 seconds fluctuation" is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is between 175 and 249, the fluctuation pattern of "200 seconds fluctuation" is determined. A variation pattern command "D5H" with which "D5H" is associated is determined.

If the game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16 during the high-probability time-saving gaming state when the various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17 are not satisfied, table C is referred to and the fluctuation pattern ( In other words, when the various conditions of Examples 1 to 17 are satisfied and one or more of the above-mentioned (A) to (J) are set during the high probability time saving gaming state. In addition, when a game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16, the fluctuation pattern may be determined by referring to the fluctuation pattern table 114 of table D1, table D2, or table D3.
In addition, when various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17 are satisfied and one or more of the above-mentioned settings (A) to (J) are performed during the high probability time saving gaming state, the second starting prize opening 16 When a game ball enters the game ball, the variable pattern table 114 to be referred to may be switched by satisfying a predetermined switching condition. Specifically, the variable pattern table 115 to be referred to may be switched from table D1 to table D2 to table D3 depending on the number of consecutive jackpots. Furthermore, depending on the number of fluctuations, the referenced fluctuation pattern table 114 may be switched from table D3 to table D2 to table D1.

(Other gameplay features that apply time-saving gaming state settings)
Next, an example of another gaming feature in which control is applied to set a time-saving gaming state without winning a jackpot or executing a special game will be described. Note that the following description will focus on configurations and controls that are different from those of the above-described embodiments, and descriptions of similar configurations and controls will be omitted unless necessary.
(Other application example 1)
(Overview of configuration and control)
Although not particularly illustrated, the configuration of the game board 11 (game area 12) of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 1, and the installed devices and members are almost the same as those in the above-described embodiment. .

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 1, a normal gaming state (a gaming state that combines a low probability gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state), a second low probability time saving gaming state, similar to the above embodiment. (a game state that combines a low probability game state and a second time-saving game state) or a high-probability time-saving game state (a game state that combines a high-probability game state and a second time-saving game state) is set. It is supposed to be done.
As in the above-described embodiment, during the normal gaming state, the player is instructed to launch the game ball toward the first gaming area 12a, so as long as the game ball is launched in accordance with this instruction. In this case, the game ball can enter the first starting prize opening 15. On the other hand, during the second low-probability time-saving game state, during the high-probability time-saving game state, during the special game, and during the small winning game, the player is instructed to launch the game ball toward the second game area 12b. As long as the game ball is launched in accordance with this instruction, the game ball can pass through the gate 20, enter the second starting prize opening 16, and enter the grand prize opening 18 (see Figure 3). .

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 1, when a jackpot is won based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting prize opening 15, the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, When a jackpot is won based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning hole 16, a jackpot symbol X2 is determined. The probability of winning a jackpot during the normal gaming state is set to approximately 1/150, and the probability of winning a jackpot during the high probability time-saving gaming state is set to approximately 1/110.
Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, four round games are executed during the special game based on the determination, and a predetermined number (for example, one) of After the game ball cannot enter the specific area 57 and the special game ends, a normal game state is set. Additionally, approximately 400 game balls can be acquired during the special game.
On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, 10 round games are executed during the special game based on the determination, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57 in the specific round game. After the special game ends, a high probability time saving game state (the number of time saving times is 10,000 times) is set. Additionally, approximately 1000 game balls can be acquired during the special game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1, as in the above-described embodiment, the determination of whether or not the time-saving grant is appropriate in the lottery and the determination of the time-saving symbol in the case where the time-saving grant is won are not performed. . Instead of this, a second time-saving game state (the number of time-savings to be set is a predetermined There are a losing symbol Z1 in which it is determined that the number of times (10,000 times in this application example)) is set, and a losing symbol Z2 in which it is determined that the time-saving gaming state is not set. Then, in the normal gaming state, when a loss occurs and the losing symbol Z1 is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15, the above-mentioned second time-saving gaming state is set. That is, when the losing symbol Z1 is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15 during the normal gaming state, the subsequent gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the second low probability time saving gaming state. It is supposed to be done. On the other hand, when the losing symbol Z2 is determined, the gaming state remains the normal gaming state.
Note that the probability that a losing symbol Z1 will be determined when a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 is set to approximately 1/500.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1, if the game ball enters the second starting winning hole 16 and the game ball loses, the losing symbol Z1 is not determined. Also, even if a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15 during a gaming state other than the normal gaming state (second low probability time saving gaming state or high probability time saving gaming state) and a losing symbol Z1 is determined. , the setting of the second time-saving gaming state is not performed. That is, in the second low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state, even if the losing symbol Z1 is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting prize opening 15, the game state at the time is changed. This will not happen, and the time saving number of 10,000 times will not be reset. Note that the remaining number of time reductions at that point in time is updated (that is, 1 is subtracted).

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 1, the upper limit of the number of consecutive probability variation settings is set to five. In the pachinko machine P, as described above, when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, the high probability time-saving game state is set after the end of the special game based on the determination, so the jackpot symbol X2 is determined five times in a row. Then, after the special game based on the determination ends, the normal game state is forcibly set.

(Game performance of pachinko machine P according to other application example 1)
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 1, as described above, the normal gaming state (a gaming state that combines a low probability gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state), the second low probability time saving gaming state (a low probability gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state), Either a game state that combines the second time-saving game state) or a high-probability time-saving game state (a game state that combines the high-probability game state and the second time-saving game state) is set, and the game progresses. It has become.

When a player starts playing a game, the normal gaming state is often set. During this normal game state, as mentioned above, the game ball is directed to be launched toward the first game area 12a (so-called left-handed hitting), and as long as the game ball is launched in accordance with this instruction, the game ball will , there is a possibility that the ball will enter the first starting winning hole 15, and the ball will not enter the second starting winning hole 16. Then, a lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15, and when a jackpot is won, a jackpot symbol X1 is determined. When the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57 and the game state after the special game ends is set to the normal game state (see FIG. 61). That is, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1, during the normal gaming state, the high probability time-saving gaming state is not set through winning a jackpot or executing a special game.

Here, if a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15 during the normal gaming state, the result of the lottery will be a loss and a loss symbol Z1 may be determined (the probability of determination is approximately 1/500). There is. When the losing symbol Z1 is determined, the game state is set to the second low probability time saving game state without going through jackpot winning and special games, and this second low probability time saving gaming state is used to win the jackpot. This continues until the results of the lottery are derived 10,000 times without any problem.

During the second low-probability time-saving game state, the game ball is directed to be launched (right-handed) toward the second game area 12b, and as long as the game ball is launched in accordance with this instruction, the game ball is There is a possibility that the ball will enter the second starting winning hole 16, but the ball will not enter the first starting winning hole 15. Then, a lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning hole 16, and when a jackpot is won, a jackpot symbol X2 is determined. When the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57, and the gaming state after the special game ends is set to a high probability time saving game state, and the number of time saving times is set to 10,000 times. . That is, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1, if the player plays right as instructed during the second low probability time saving game state, the player wins the jackpot and shifts to the high probability time saving game state. (See Figure 61). Here, during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the second start prize opening 16 is kept in the open state much more easily than during the normal game state, so while suppressing the decrease in game balls as the game progresses, , you can almost certainly win the next jackpot and move to a high probability time-saving gaming state.

During the high-probability time-saving game state, as in the second low-probability time-saving game state, you are instructed to launch the game ball toward the second game area 12b (right-handed hit), and follow this instruction to launch the game ball. As long as there is a jackpot, a lottery will be held based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning hole 16, and if a jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X2 will be determined. Then, when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57, and the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability time-saving game state again, and the number of time-savings is 10,000. set to times. During the high-probability time-saving game state, as in the second low-probability time-saving game state, you can almost certainly win the next jackpot while suppressing the decrease in game balls, and the high-probability time-saving game state is set again. Ru.

In this way, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1, when the high probability time-saving gaming state is set, it is essentially possible to win the jackpot again during the gaming state, and to enter the high-probability time-saving gaming state again. Set. Therefore, once the high-probability time-saving gaming state is set, jackpot symbol X2 can be determined consecutively until jackpot symbol X2 is determined 5 times in a row (the number of consecutive probability changes reaches the upper limit ) The high-probability time-saving gaming state continues. Then, when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined five times in a row, the gaming state after the end of the special game based on the determination is set to the normal gaming state. That is, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 1, when the high probability time-saving game state is set, the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2 is executed five times in a row without transitioning to the normal game state. be done.

Here, for example, assume that the pachinko machine P is configured so that the high probability time-saving game state is set based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 (400 game balls that can be acquired during the special game). . Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined during the normal gaming state, the high probability time saving gaming state is set, and similarly to the above, when the high probability time saving gaming state is set, the jackpot occurs without transitioning to the normal gaming state. Symbols X2 can be determined consecutively.
However, in the pachinko machine P configured in this way, since the high probability time-saving gaming state is set based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1, the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 is also counted as the number of consecutive probability variations setting. Become. Then, after setting the high probability time-saving game state based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1, when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined four times in a row, the number of consecutive probability change settings reaches the upper limit, and the special game based on the determination The gaming state after the end is set to the normal gaming state. Therefore, the number of game balls that can be acquired between the time when the jackpot symbol 400 game balls that can be acquired in one special game based on the determination of jackpot symbol X2 x 1 time + 1000 game balls that can be acquired in one special game based on the determination of jackpot symbol X2 x 4 times).

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 1, as described above, the first low probability Since the high-probability time-saving gaming state is set based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2 during the probability time-saving gaming state, the normal gaming state is set after the jackpot symbol X2 is determined (the transition to the high-probability time-saving gaming state is determined). The number of game balls that can be obtained until the time is set is 5000 (=1000 game balls that can be obtained in one special game based on the determination of jackpot symbol X2 x 5 times).

In addition, for example, in a pachinko machine, if a jackpot is won based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting prize opening 15, either the first jackpot symbol or the second jackpot symbol is determined. When any jackpot symbol is determined, a high probability gaming state is always set provided that the number of consecutive probability changes has not reached the upper limit number of times, but the first jackpot When a symbol is determined, a time-saving game state is set after the end of a special game, and when a second jackpot symbol is determined, a non-time-saving game state is set after the end of a special game. In addition, in this pachinko machine P, if a jackpot is won and a jackpot symbol is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning hole 16, the number of consecutive probability changes has reached the upper limit number. The number of game balls that can be obtained during the special game when the high probability game state is always set and the game ball enters the second starting winning hole 16 results in a jackpot is It is assumed that the number of game balls is set to be greater than the number of game balls that can be acquired during a special game when a jackpot is achieved by entering the game ball into the starting winning hole 15. Furthermore, in this pachinko machine P, during the non-time-saving game state, a game ball is launched toward the first game area 12a in order to cause the game ball to enter the first starting prize opening 15, and during the time-saving game state, the game ball is launched toward the first game area 12a. It is assumed that the game ball is launched toward the second game area 12b in order to cause the game ball to enter the second starting prize opening 16.

In the pachinko machine configured as described above, when the second jackpot symbol is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15, after the special game based on the determination ends, the high winning symbol is Since the state shifts to a probability game state and a non-time-saving game state, the number of consecutive probability change settings increases, but a winning lottery based on the game ball entering the first starting winning hole 15 continues thereafter. Then, after that, when the first jackpot symbol is determined and the transition to the time-saving gaming state occurs, the number of consecutive probability variations has already increased, and by the time the number of consecutive probability variations has reached the upper limit, the number of consecutive probability variations has been increased. The number of times a jackpot can be won based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting winning hole 16 is reduced, which is disadvantageous for the player.

On the other hand, if the pachinko machine according to other application example 1 is set to shift to the time-saving game state based on the determination of a specific losing symbol that is not a jackpot symbol or a small winning symbol, the time-saving game The number of continuous probability change settings does not increase before shifting to the state, and the time saving game state is transferred with the number of continuous probability change settings being 0, so that the disadvantageous situation described above does not occur.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1, based on the determination of the predetermined jackpot symbol by the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15 during the normal gaming state, the second Rather than transitioning to a high probability time-saving game state in which a game ball enters the starting winning hole 16, a specific losing pattern (losing pattern Z1) due to the game ball entering the first starting winning hole 15 during the normal gaming state ), the game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16 via a low probability time saving gaming state (second low probability time saving gaming state) in which the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 16. Based on the determination of a predetermined jackpot symbol by , a transition is made to a high probability time saving gaming state.
Therefore, from the time when the jackpot symbol that determines the transition to the high-probability time-saving gaming state is determined until the end of the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the game ball is not allowed to enter the second starting prize opening 16. Based on this, game profits that can be awarded (for example, the number of rounds during a special game that is executed based on winning a jackpot, etc.) can be acquired, and novel gaming features that increase the player's interest can be provided.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 1, the time-saving gaming state is set by determining a specific losing symbol (losing symbol Z1) during the normal gaming state, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the time-saving gaming state may be set by determining a specific small winning symbol during the normal gaming state.
In addition, as in the above-described embodiment, in the normal gaming state, when the losing symbol Z1 for which the setting of the time-saving gaming state is determined is determined, the specific performance is more effective than when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined. It may be set so that the execution rate of (a look-ahead performance, a reach development performance that has high expectations from the player during a variable performance, etc.) is high.

(Other application example 2)
The pachinko machine P according to another application example 2 has almost the same configuration and control as the pachinko machine P according to other application example 1.
However, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 2, if the game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16 and the jackpot symbol 100 high probability time saving game states are set. Since the probability of determining the jackpot symbol X2 is set to approximately 1/110, which is the same as in other application example 1, it is not always possible to win the next jackpot during the high probability time-saving gaming state, but it is possible to win the jackpot. When the lottery is held 100 times, the normal gaming state is set.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 2, the upper limit of the number of consecutive probability changes is not particularly set, and the conditions for setting the low probability time-saving gaming state (winning a jackpot during the high-probability time-saving gaming state) The high-probability time-saving gaming state continues until the winning lottery is performed 100 times without any error.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 2, when the result of the lottery based on the entry of game balls into not only the first starting winning hole 15 but also the second starting winning hole 16 is a loss, Also, there is a losing symbol Z1 in which it is determined that the second time-saving gaming state (the number of time-saving games to be set is a predetermined number of times (in this application example, 10,000 times)) is set, or it is determined that the time-saving gaming state is not set. The losing symbol Z2 can be determined. Then, in the normal gaming state, even when a loss occurs and a losing symbol Z1 is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting prize opening 16, the above-mentioned second time-saving gaming state is set. That is, when the losing symbol Z1 is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting prize opening 16 during the normal gaming state, the subsequent gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the second low probability time saving gaming state. It looks like this. On the other hand, when the losing symbol Z2 is determined in the normal gaming state, the gaming state remains the normal gaming state.
Note that the probability that a losing symbol Z1 will be determined when a game ball enters the second starting winning hole 16 is set to approximately 1/7.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 2, in a game state other than the normal game state (second low probability time-saving game state or high probability time-saving game state), the game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16. Even if the losing symbol Z1 is determined based on the above, the second time saving gaming state is not reset. That is, in the second low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state, even if the losing symbol Z1 is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting prize opening 16, the game state at that time is changed. This will not happen, and the time saving number of 10,000 times will not be reset. Note that the remaining number of time reductions at that point in time is updated (that is, 1 is subtracted).

(Game performance of pachinko machine P according to other application example 2)
Regarding the flow of the game in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 2, from the normal game state, the second low probability time saving game state, to the high probability time saving game state, the pachinko machine P according to other application example 1 is the same as
In the pachinko machine P according to other application example 2, as described above, the number of time reductions in the high probability time reduction gaming state is set to 100, so if the winning lottery is performed 100 times without winning a jackpot, the high probability The probability time saving game state ends and the normal game state is set.
Here, during the high probability time saving game state, the game ball is always launched into the second game area 12b, and the game ball can pass through the gate 20. Then, when the high-probability time-saving gaming state ends and the normal gaming state is set, the second pending number is 4, which is the upper limit (that is, the second special drawing random number is the upper limit of 4 pending memory). ) is likely. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 2, as in the above-described embodiment, the second special figure random number is processed preferentially over the first special figure random number, so the above-mentioned Before the first special figure random numbers that are held and stored at the time when the normal gaming state of be exposed.

After the normal gaming state is set, the game ball is launched again toward the first gaming area 12a, and the game enters the high-probability time-saving gaming state with the aim of getting the gaming ball into the first starting prize opening 15. We will once again aim to transition to
However, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 2, the losing symbol Z1 is determined in a lottery based on up to four second special symbol random numbers that are stored on hold at the time when the above-mentioned normal game state is set. Then, a second low-probability time-saving game state with a time-saving count of 10,000 times is set, and after this, a high-probability time-saving game state is reset. That is, even if the high-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set, the losing symbol Z1 is determined based on the second special pattern random number that is pending at this point, and the game enters the second low-probability time-saving game state. By shifting, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the second starting winning hole 16, and when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined based on the entered ball, the state shifts to the high probability time-saving gaming state again.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 2, during the normal gaming state, a certain When a losing symbol (losing symbol Z1) is determined, it is possible to shift to a second low probability time saving gaming state without winning the jackpot or executing a special game, and then to a high probability time saving gaming state. There is.
As a result, when the high probability time saving game state ends and the normal gaming state is set, based on the second special figure random number that is stored and stored, the high probability time saving game is played without going through the jackpot winning and the execution of the special game. This makes it possible to re-transfer to the current state, and it becomes possible to provide novel gameplay that increases the player's interest.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 2, the time-saving game state may be set by determining a specific small winning symbol during the normal game state, similarly to the other application example 1.

(Other application example 3)
(Overview of configuration and control)
The pachinko machine P according to another application example 3 is a so-called 1 type 2 type pachinko machine, and is a pachinko machine that wins a jackpot or enters a special area described later during a small win game based on a small win win. A special game is executed when a ball enters the ball.

The configuration of the game board 11 of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 3, and the devices and members installed on the game board 11, other than the attacker device 17, are different from those of other application examples 1 and 2. They are the same.
Although not particularly illustrated, the attacker device 17 has the same structure as the specific area 57 instead of the specific area 57 provided in the above-described embodiment, other application example 1, and other application example 2. The internal structure is the same as that of the above-described embodiment, other application example 1, and other application example 2, except that some special areas have different functions.

Then, as in the above-described embodiment, other application example 1, and other application example 2, during a special game based on winning a jackpot or during a small winning game based on winning a small winning, the large winning opening 18 is opened, and the game ball can enter the big winning hole 18. However, during the special game, the distribution member 59 stays at the first position, and the game balls that enter the big prize opening 18 do not enter the special area, but all enter the general area 58. On the other hand, during a small winning game, the sorting member 59 remains at the second position, and the game balls that enter the big prize opening 18 do not enter the general area 58, but all enter the special area. It is supposed to be done.
In other words, the game ball can enter the special area only during the small winning game, and as a result, the game ball enters the special area during the small winning game based on the winning of the small winning, and the special game is executed. It is now possible to do so.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 3, as in the above-described embodiment, other application example 1, and other application example 2, the predetermined area (specific area 57 ) The game state after the end of the special game is not set depending on whether or not a predetermined number of game balls have entered the ball. The above-mentioned game state is set depending on the winning symbol.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 3, a normal gaming state that combines a low probability gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state, a low probability gaming state and a first time saving gaming state (the winning probability of normal symbols, the winning probability of normal symbols, A first low-probability time-saving gaming state that combines variable time and the opening time of the second starting prize opening 16 (same content as in the above embodiment), or a low-probability gaming state and a second time-saving gaming state (normal symbol winning) Any game state of a second low probability time-saving game state is set, which is a combination of the probability, the variation time of the normal symbol, and the opening time of the second starting prize opening 16 (same content as in the above-mentioned embodiment).
As in the above-described embodiment, during the normal game state and during the first low probability time-saving game state, the player is instructed to launch the game ball toward the first game area 12a. As long as the game ball is launched according to the above rules, the game ball can enter the first starting prize opening 15. On the other hand, during the second low probability time-saving game state, during the special game, and during the small winning game, the player is instructed to launch the game ball toward the second game area 12b, so the game ball is launched according to this instruction. As long as the game ball is in the position, the game ball can pass through the gate 20, enter the second starting prize opening 16, and enter the grand prize opening 18 (see FIG. 3).

Further, as shown in FIG. 62, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 3, if the game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15, it is possible to win a jackpot, The symbol X1 is determined. That is, during the normal game state or during the first low probability time saving game state (during left hitting), a special game is executed based on the jackpot winning (determination of the jackpot symbol X1).
Note that the probability of winning the jackpot when a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 is set to approximately 1/300 regardless of the gaming state. In addition, when a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15, the upper limit number of first special figure random number holds that can be stored (upper limit number of first hold numbers) is set to two. In addition, the upper limit number of reservations of the first special figure random number is not limited to this.

When the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, 10 round games are executed during the special game based on the determination, and approximately 1000 game balls can be obtained.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 51, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, if the number of consecutive time-saving settings described below has not reached the upper limit, the gaming state at the time of determination is the normal gaming state and the time-saving gaming state. (first low probability time saving game state), a second low probability time saving game state (the number of time saving times is 100) is set after the special game based on the determination is completed. On the other hand, if the number of consecutive time reduction settings has reached the upper limit number of times, the normal game state is set after the special game ends.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62, if the lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15 results in a loss, a losing symbol Z1 is determined. Then, when the losing symbol Z1 is determined, if the number of consecutive time saving settings has not reached the upper limit number of times, the gaming state at the time of the determination is the normal gaming state and the time saving gaming state (first low probability time saving gaming state). In either case, after the determination, the first low probability time saving game state (the number of time saving times is 100) is set. On the other hand, if the number of consecutive time reduction settings has reached the upper limit number of times, the normal gaming state is set after the determination.
That is, when the losing symbol Z1 is determined during the first low probability time saving game state and the number of continuous time saving settings has not reached the upper limit number of times, the first low probability time saving gaming state and the number of time saving times are reset. becomes.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 3, when the game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16, it is possible to win a jackpot or a small jackpot, and the jackpot When winning, a jackpot symbol X2 is determined, and when a small winning is won, a small winning symbol Y1 is determined. That is, during the second low-probability time-saving game state (while hitting right), it is based on whether the jackpot is won (the jackpot symbol X2 is determined) or the small win is won (the small win symbol Y1 is determined). A special game is executed through the small winning game that is executed.
As shown in FIG. 62, the probability of winning a jackpot when a game ball enters the second starting winning hole 16 is set to approximately 1/300, regardless of the gaming state, and The probability of winning a small hit when a game ball enters the winning hole 16 is set to approximately 299/300, regardless of the gaming state. That is, when a game ball enters the second starting winning hole 16, either a jackpot win or a small win is determined in the lottery, and no loss is determined. Therefore, in the pachinko machine P according to the third application example, when a game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16, a special game is always executed.
Further, when a game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16, the upper limit number of second special figure random numbers that can be stored (the upper limit number of second reserved numbers) is set to one. In addition, the upper limit number of reservations of the second special figure random number is not limited to this.

Then, in both cases where the jackpot symbol X2 is determined and the small win symbol Y1 is determined, 10 round games are executed during the special game based on the determination, and about 1000 game balls are played. It is now possible to obtain.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 62, when the jackpot symbol X2 or the small win symbol Y1 is determined, if the number of consecutive time saving settings has not reached the upper limit number, the gaming state at the time of determination is the second low probability. When the second low probability time saving gaming state (the number of time saving times is 100) is set after the end of the special game based on the decision while in the time saving gaming state, and the gaming state at the time of the decision was the normal gaming state. Then, after the special game ends based on the determination, the normal game state is set. On the other hand, if the number of consecutive time reduction settings has reached the upper limit number of times, the normal game state is set after the special game ends.
That is, when the jackpot symbol X2 or the small winning symbol Y1 is determined during the second low probability time saving game state and the number of consecutive time saving settings has not reached the upper limit number of times, the second low probability time saving gaming state and the number of time saving times are It will be reset.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 3, the upper limit of the number of consecutive time reduction settings is set to three. In the pachinko machine P, as described above, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined during the normal gaming state or the first low probability time saving gaming state, the second low probability time saving gaming state is set, and the second low probability time saving gaming state is set. When the losing symbol Z1 is determined during the low probability time saving gaming state, a first low probability time saving gaming state is set, and the jackpot symbol X2 or the small winning symbol Y1 is determined during the normal gaming state or the second low probability time saving gaming state. Since the second low probability time saving game state is then set, any of these decisions will be counted as the number of consecutive time saving settings. If these determinations are made three times in a row, the number of consecutive time saving settings will reach the upper limit, so after the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol or small winning symbol described above, the above-mentioned After the losing symbols are determined, the normal gaming state is forcibly set.

(Game performance of pachinko machine P according to other application example 3)
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 3, as described above, the normal gaming state (a gaming state that combines a low probability gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state), the first low probability time saving gaming state (a low probability gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state), Either the first time-saving game state (a game state that combines the first time-saving game state) or the second low-probability time-saving game state (a game state that combines the low-probability game state and the second time-saving game state) is set, and the game progresses. It looks like this.

(1) When a jackpot is won in the normal gaming state (when the number of consecutive time saving settings is 0) and the second low probability time saving gaming state is set. When the player starts playing, the normal gaming state is set. In the normal gaming state, the set number of consecutive time reductions is 0 (that is, the remaining number of times until the upper limit is reached is 3).
During the normal gaming state, as described above, the game ball is directed to be launched toward the first gaming area 12a (so-called left-handed hitting), and as long as the game ball is launched in accordance with this instruction, the game ball will: Since there is a possibility that the ball enters only the first starting winning hole 15, a lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15 during the game state. When the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the gaming state after the end of the special game based on the determination is set to the second low probability time-saving gaming state (see FIGS. 62 and 63).

Here, as described above, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined in the normal gaming state (when the number of consecutive time saving settings is 0), the second low probability time saving gaming state is set, so the jackpot symbol X1 is determined. Based on this, the number of continuous time reduction settings is 1 (2 times remaining until reaching the upper limit number of times).
In addition, during the second low probability time saving game state, as mentioned above, the instruction is to launch the game ball toward the second game area 12b (so-called right-handed hit), and as long as the game ball is launched in accordance with this instruction, Since there is a possibility that the game ball enters only into the second starting prize opening 16, a lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16 during the game state. In the hit/fail lottery, as described above, a lottery result of either a jackpot winning (determining the jackpot symbol X2) or a small winning winning (determining the small winning symbol Y1) is derived. Then, when the jackpot symbol X2 or the small winning symbol Y2 is determined during the second low probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state is reset after the special game based on the determination ends (FIG. 62, (See FIG. 63), the number of consecutive time reduction settings increases by one (the number remaining until reaching the upper limit number decreases by one). Therefore, after the second low probability time saving game state is set, the special game will be executed continuously until the number of consecutive time saving settings reaches the upper limit number of times.

Then, as described above, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined in the normal gaming state (when the number of consecutive time saving settings is 0) and the second low probability time saving gaming state is set, the jackpot symbol X1 is determined. Based on this, the number of consecutive time shortening settings is 1, so if the jackpot symbol X2 or the small win symbol Y1 is determined twice thereafter, the normal game state will be forcibly set after the special game based on the determination ends. .
In addition, as mentioned above, when a game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16, the upper limit number of second special figure random numbers that can be stored (upper limit number of second reserved number) is set to one. During the fluctuation based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2 or the small prize symbol Y1, a game ball enters the second start winning hole 16 and one second special symbol random number is stored pending. Therefore, even if the jackpot symbol X2 or the small win symbol Y1 is determined twice and the normal gaming state is forcibly set, the jackpot will be won one more time based on the second special random number stored in the memory at this point. The symbol X2 or the small winning symbol Y1 is determined, and a special game based on the determination is executed. In addition, if the jackpot symbol X2 or the small win symbol Y1 is determined in the normal gaming state, the gaming state after the special game based on the determination is set to the normal gaming state (see FIGS. 62 and 63). ), after the above-mentioned special game ends, the normal game state remains unchanged from before the execution of the special game.

In this way, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 3, if a jackpot is won in the normal gaming state where the number of consecutive time reduction settings is 0, the pachinko machine P will be able to The special game will be executed a total of two times (a total of three times if you include the special game executed based on the jackpot or small win based on the second special figure random number that has been stored on hold).

(2) When a jackpot is won in the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 1) and the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set.In contrast to (1), the first start in the normal gaming state If there is a loss in the lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the winning hole 15 and the losing symbol Z1 is determined, the gaming state after the determination is set to the first low probability time saving gaming state (FIG. 51, (See Figure 52). Then, based on the determination of the losing symbol Z1, the number of consecutive time reduction settings becomes one (two times remaining until reaching the upper limit number of times).
In this first low-probability time-saving game state (when the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 1), the game ball is continuously launched into the first game area 12a. Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15, the game state after the end of the special game based on the determination is set to the second low probability time-saving game state. (see FIGS. 62 and 63), based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1, the set number of consecutive time reductions is 2 times (1 time remaining until reaching the upper limit number of times).

Then, if the jackpot symbol X1 is determined in the first low-probability time-saving game state (when the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 1) and the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, then the jackpot symbol X2 or the small win When symbol Y1 is determined once, a normal game state is forcibly set after the special game based on the determination is completed.
That is, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 3, if a jackpot is won in the first low-probability time-saving game state in which the number of consecutive time-saving settings is one, the normal game state is set again. Until then, a special game will be executed once (two times in total if you include the special game executed based on the jackpot or small win based on the second special figure random number that has been stored on hold).

(3) When a jackpot is won in the first low-probability time-saving game state (the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 2) and the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, also based on the determination of the losing symbol Z1 during the normal game state. When the first low-probability time-saving game state (the number of consecutive million time-saving settings is 1) is set, if a losing symbol Z1 is further determined in the first low-probability time-saving game state, the game state after the determination is the 1 is reset to the low probability time saving gaming state (see FIGS. 62 and 63). Then, based on the determination of the losing symbol Z1, the number of consecutive time reduction settings becomes 2 (the remaining number of times until the upper limit is reached is 1).
Then, in this first low probability time saving game state (when the number of consecutive time saving settings is 2), when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting prize opening 15, the jackpot symbol Based on the determination of X1, the number of consecutive time reduction settings is 3 (the remaining number of times until reaching the upper limit is 0).
Then, even though the jackpot symbol X1 has been determined, the number of consecutive time-saving settings has reached the upper limit of three times, so after the special game based on the determination ends, a second low-probability time-saving game state is set. The normal gaming state is forcibly set.
That is, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 3, if a jackpot is won in the first low-probability time-saving game state in which the number of consecutive time-saving settings is two, the game is entered into the second starting prize opening 16. The normal game state is set again without executing the special game based on the ball entering the ball.

In addition, in the above-mentioned first low probability time saving game state (when the number of consecutive time saving settings is 2), when the losing symbol Z1 is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15, the losing symbol Based on the determination of symbol Z1, the number of consecutive time saving settings is 3 (the remaining number of times until reaching the upper limit is 0), so after the determination, the normal gaming state is forcibly set (Fig. 62, (See Figure 63). Then, the above-mentioned (1) to (3) are repeated.

In this way, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 3, in the normal game state or the first low probability time-saving game state, a specific losing symbol (losing symbol Z1) is generated without winning the jackpot or executing a special game. Based on the determination, the first low probability time saving game state is set, and the number of consecutive time saving settings is updated. Then, depending on the number of times the first low-probability time-saving game state is set in the normal game state or the first low-probability time-saving game state, at the time the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, the upper limit number of consecutive time-saving settings is set. The remaining number of times until reaching . As a result, during the second low-probability time-saving game state (until the normal game state is set again), the number of times the special game is executed in succession changes, creating a novelty that increases the player's interest. This makes it possible to provide more gameplay.

Note that it is not necessary to set it so that when a game ball enters the second starting winning hole 16, it will always result in a jackpot or small win, but it may be set so that it will result in a loss with a predetermined probability. .

(Other application example 4)
(Overview of configuration and control)
The pachinko machine P according to another application example 4 is also a so-called 1 type and 2 type mixed pachinko machine, and the configuration of the game board 11, the devices and members installed on the game board 11, the game state to be set, All the game areas 12 where game balls are launched during each game state are the same as in the third application example.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 64, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 4, it is possible to win a jackpot when a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15, as in other application example 3. Therefore, when a jackpot is won, a jackpot symbol X1 is determined. That is, during the normal game state or during the first low probability time saving game state (during left hitting), a special game is executed based on the jackpot winning (determination of the jackpot symbol X1).
Note that the probability of winning the jackpot when a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 is set to approximately 1/300, regardless of the gaming state. In addition, when a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15, the upper limit number of first special figure random numbers that can be stored (upper limit number of first reserved numbers) is set to two. In addition, the upper limit number of reservations of the first special figure random number is not limited to this.

When the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, four round games are executed during the special game based on the determination, and approximately 400 game balls can be obtained.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 64, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, if the number of consecutive time-saving settings described below has not reached the upper limit, the gaming state at the time of determination is the normal gaming state and the time-saving gaming state. (first low probability time saving game state), a second low probability time saving game state (the number of time saving times is 100) is set after the special game based on the determination is completed. On the other hand, if the number of consecutive time reduction settings has reached the upper limit number of times, the normal game state is set after the special game ends.

Further, as shown in FIG. 64, if the lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15 results in a loss, the losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined. The decision probability of the losing symbol Z1 is set to approximately 1/50, and the decision probability of the losing symbol Z2 is set to approximately 49/50.
Then, when the losing symbol Z1 is determined, if the number of consecutive time saving settings has not reached the upper limit number of times, the gaming state at the time of the determination is the normal gaming state and the time saving gaming state (first low probability time saving gaming state). In either case, after the determination, the first low probability time saving game state (the number of time saving times is 10000) is set. On the other hand, if the number of consecutive time reduction settings has reached the upper limit number of times, the normal gaming state is set after the determination.
That is, when the losing symbol Z1 is determined during the first low probability time saving game state and the number of continuous time saving settings has not reached the upper limit number of times, the first low probability time saving gaming state and the number of time saving times are reset. becomes.

On the other hand, when the losing symbol Z2 is determined, the time-saving gaming state is not set. That is, if the losing symbol Z2 is determined during the normal gaming state, the normal gaming state continues even after the determination, and if the losing symbol Z2 is determined during the first low probability time-saving gaming state, the corresponding Even after the determination, the first low probability time saving game state continues.

Further, as shown in FIG. 64, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 4, when the game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16, it is possible to win a jackpot or a small jackpot, and the jackpot When winning, a jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined, and when a small win is won, a small win symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined. In other words, during the second low-probability time-saving game state (while hitting right), it is difficult to determine whether the jackpot will be won (the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 will be determined) or the small win will be won (the small win symbol Y1 or Y2 will be determined). ) A special game is executed through a small winning game executed based on.

As shown in FIG. 64, the probability of winning a jackpot when a game ball enters the second starting winning hole 16 is set to approximately 1/300, regardless of the gaming state. The probability of winning a small hit when a game ball enters the winning hole 16 is set to approximately 299/300, regardless of the gaming state. That is, when a game ball enters the second starting winning hole 16, either a jackpot win or a small win is determined in the lottery, and no loss is determined. Therefore, in the pachinko machine P according to the third application example, when a game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16, a special game is always executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 64, the determination probability of the jackpot symbol X2 and the determination probability of the jackpot symbol X3 at the time of winning the jackpot are both 1/2. Similarly, when a small win is won, the determination probability of the small win symbol Y1 and the determination probability of the small win symbol Y2 are both 1/2.
Further, when a game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16, the upper limit number of second special figure random numbers that can be stored (the upper limit number of second reserved numbers) is set to two. In addition, the upper limit number of reservations of the second special figure random number is not limited to this.

Then, when the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined, and when the small win symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, four round games are executed during the special game based on the determination, and approximately 400 It is now possible to obtain a number of game balls.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 64, when the jackpot symbol X2 or the small win symbol Y1 is determined, if the number of consecutive time saving settings has not reached the upper limit number of times, the gaming state at the time of the determination is the normal gaming state. In any of the second low-probability time-saving game states, the second low-probability time-saving game state (the number of time-savings is 100) is set after the end of the special game based on the determination. On the other hand, if the number of consecutive time reduction settings has reached the upper limit number of times, the normal game state is set after the special game ends.
That is, when the jackpot symbol X2 or the small win symbol Y1 is determined during the normal game state or the second low probability time saving game state and the number of consecutive time saving settings has not reached the upper limit number of times, the second low probability time saving game is executed. The state and the number of time saving times will be set (reset during the second low probability time saving game state).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 64, when the jackpot symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined, if the number of consecutive time saving settings has not reached the upper limit number, the gaming state at the time of the determination is the first one. 2. When in the low probability time saving gaming state, a second low probability time saving gaming state (the number of time saving times is 100 times) is set after the special game based on the decision is completed, and the gaming state at the time of the decision is the normal gaming state. When a special game ends based on the determination, a normal game state is set. On the other hand, if the number of consecutive time reduction settings has reached the upper limit number of times, the normal game state is set after the special game ends.
That is, when the jackpot symbol X3 or the small winning symbol Y2 is determined during the second low probability time saving game state and the number of continuous time saving settings has not reached the upper limit number of times, the second low probability time saving gaming state and the number of time saving times are It will be reset.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 4, the upper limit of the number of consecutive time reduction settings is set to three. In the pachinko machine P, as described above, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined during the normal gaming state or the first low probability time saving gaming state, the second low probability time saving gaming state is set, and the second low probability time saving gaming state is set. When the losing symbol Z1 is determined during the low probability time saving gaming state, a first low probability time saving gaming state is set, and the jackpot symbol X2 or the small winning symbol Y1 is determined during the normal gaming state or the second low probability time saving gaming state. If so, a second low probability time saving gaming state is set, and when a jackpot symbol X3 or a small winning symbol Y2 is determined during the second low probability time saving gaming state, a second low probability time saving gaming state is set. Any one of these decisions will be counted as the number of consecutive time reduction settings. If these determinations are made three times in a row, the number of consecutive time saving settings will reach the upper limit, so after the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol or small winning symbol described above, the above-mentioned After the losing symbols are determined, the normal gaming state is forcibly set.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 4, the upper limit of the number of regular symbols reserved is set to 0, and the regular symbols are not reserved due to the game ball passing through the gate 20. The second low-probability time-saving gaming state set as described above ends at the start of the fluctuation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting prize opening 16, and after that, the normal gaming state is set. ing.
Here, for example, when transitioning from the normal game state or the first low probability time saving game state to the second low probability time saving game state through the execution of a special game, the second special figure random number is not stored and stored. 2. A low probability time saving gaming state may be set. In this case, when the game ball passes through the gate 20, the second starting prize opening 16 is opened, and the first gaming ball enters the second starting winning opening 16 which is currently open. When the fluctuation is started based on this, the second low probability time saving game state ends. However, since the second starting prize opening 16 is still open at the time of the start of fluctuation, if a game ball enters the second starting winning opening 16 during this time, the second special random number will reach the upper limit of two. It will be stored on hold.

In addition, as mentioned above, based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning hole 16, the winning of the jackpot or small winning is guaranteed, so after the special game based on the winning ends, the second special random number A second low-probability time-saving game state may be set in a state where the game is suspended and stored. In this case, as soon as the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set, a governing lottery (the lottery result is a jackpot or a small jackpot) is performed based on the second special random number that has been stored and fluctuations are started. Therefore, after the second low probability time saving game state is set, the second low probability time saving game state ends immediately. Therefore, even if the game ball passes through the gate 20 after the above-mentioned special game ends, since the second low probability time saving game state has already ended, it is extremely difficult for the second starting prize opening 16 to remain in the open state. , the game ball will not enter the second starting prize opening 16.

In addition, when a winning/fail lottery is performed based on the last second special figure random number that was held and stored, the second low probability time-saving gaming state is set again in a state where the second special figure random number is not held and stored. . In this case, the same processing as described above will be performed.

(Game performance of pachinko machine P according to other application example 4)
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 4, a normal gaming state (a gaming state that combines a low probability gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state), a first low probability time saving gaming state (a low probability gaming state and a first time saving gaming state), Either the game state (a game state that combines the states) or the second low-probability time-saving game state (the game state that combines the low-probability game state and the second time-saving game state) is set, and the game begins to progress. There is.

(1) When a jackpot is won in the normal gaming state (when the number of consecutive time saving settings is 0) and the second low probability time saving gaming state is set. When the player starts playing, the normal gaming state is set. In the normal gaming state, the set number of consecutive time reductions is 0 (that is, the remaining number of times until the upper limit is reached is 3).
During the normal gaming state, as described above, the game ball is directed to be launched toward the first gaming area 12a (so-called left-handed hitting), and as long as the game ball is launched in accordance with this instruction, the game ball will: Since there is a possibility that the ball enters only the first starting winning hole 15, a lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15 during the game state. When the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the gaming state after the end of the special game based on the determination is set to the second low probability time-saving gaming state (see FIGS. 64 and 65).

Here, as described above, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined in the normal gaming state (when the number of consecutive time saving settings is 0), the second low probability time saving gaming state is set, so the jackpot symbol X1 is determined. Based on this, the number of consecutive time reduction settings is 1 (2 times remaining until reaching the upper limit number of times).
In addition, during the second low probability time-saving game state, as described above, the instruction is to launch the game ball toward the second game area 12b (so-called right-handed hit), and as long as the game ball is launched in accordance with this instruction, Since there is a possibility that the game ball enters only the second starting prize opening 16, a lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16 during the game state.
In addition, when the 2nd low probability time-saving game state is set as mentioned above, the 2nd special figure random number is not held and stored. Therefore, after the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set, the second starting winning hole 16 is opened, and a winning lottery is performed based on the entry of the first game ball into the second starting winning hole 16 that is currently open. Further, based on the entry of the second to third game balls into the second starting winning hole 16, the second special pattern random number is stored on hold up to the upper limit of two.

In the above-mentioned lottery, as described above, the jackpot symbol X2 is determined based on the jackpot winning, the jackpot symbol X3 is determined based on the jackpot winning, the small winning symbol Y1 is determined based on the small winning winning, or the small winning symbol One of the lottery results for determining the small winning symbol Y2 based on the winning result is derived. During the second low-probability time-saving game state, even if any of the above-mentioned symbols is determined, the second low-probability time-saving game state is reset after the special game based on the determination ends (Fig. 53, 54), the number of continuous time reduction settings increases by one (the number remaining until reaching the upper limit number decreases by one). Therefore, after the second low probability time saving game state is set, the special game will be executed continuously until the number of consecutive time saving settings reaches the upper limit number of times.

Then, as described above, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined in the normal gaming state (when the number of consecutive time saving settings is 0) and the second low probability time saving gaming state is set, the jackpot symbol X1 is determined. Based on this, the number of continuous time shortening settings is one time, so if either jackpot symbol X2, jackpot symbol X3, small prize symbol Y1 or small prize symbol Y2 is determined twice, the special game ends based on the determination. After that, the normal gaming state is forcibly set. Furthermore, since the normal gaming state is forcibly set, the number of consecutive time reduction settings is reset to 0 times.

Here, as mentioned above, when the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, in addition to the second special random number used for the first winning lottery and fluctuation, two second special random numbers are reserved. be remembered. Therefore, at the time when the above-mentioned symbols are determined twice and the normal gaming state is forcibly set, the remaining one second special symbol random number is stored in abeyance.
Then, a lottery is performed based on the last second special symbol random number that has been stored, and one of the jackpot symbol X2, the jackpot symbol X3, the small winning symbol Y1, or the small winning symbol Y2 is determined. . Here, since the normal gaming state is set at the time of the lottery, when the jackpot symbol X2 or the small winning symbol Y1 is determined, the second low probability time-saving gaming state is set again (FIG. 53, (Refer to FIG. 54), the number of continuous time reduction settings is 1 (2 times remaining until reaching the upper limit number of times). On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined, the normal game state is set (see FIGS. 64 and 65).

Then, since the above-mentioned winning/failure lottery has been carried out, the second special random number is not stored in storage, so the second low probability time-saving game state is set based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2 or the small win symbol Y1. If so, the second starting prize opening 16 will be opened again, and a lottery and fluctuation will be performed based on the entry of the first game ball into the second starting prize opening 16 that is currently open. , Based on the entry of the second to third game balls into the second starting prize opening 16, the second special figure random number will be held and stored up to the upper limit of two.
As a result, the special game will be executed continuously until either the jackpot symbol X2, the jackpot symbol X3, the small prize symbol Y1 or the small prize symbol Y2 is determined twice.

On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined and the normal gaming state is set, the jackpot is won again from the normal gaming state (determination of the jackpot symbol X2), and the 2. The aim is to transition to a low probability time saving gaming state.

In this way, if you win a jackpot in the normal gaming state (when the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 0) and the second low probability time-saving gaming state is set, then when you transition to the normal gaming state, the remaining amount will be Unless the jackpot symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined based on the last second special symbol random number, the second low probability time-saving game state will be repeatedly set and the special game will continue to be executed continuously. .
For example, when the jackpot symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined when the game state shifts to the normal game state for the first time, the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 is changed to the determination of the above-mentioned jackpot symbol X3 or small win symbol Y2. A total of four special games will be executed up to the special game based on the above. Also, when the first transition to the normal gaming state, the jackpot symbol X2 or the small winning symbol Y1 is determined, and when the second transition to the normal gaming state, the jackpot symbol X2 or the small winning symbol Y2 is determined, A total of seven special games will be executed, from the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 to the special game based on the determination of the above-mentioned jackpot symbol X3 or small win symbol Y2.

(2) When a jackpot is won in the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 1) and the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set.In contrast to (1), the first start in the normal gaming state If there is a loss in the lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the winning hole 15 and the losing symbol Z1 is determined, the gaming state after the determination is set to the first low probability time saving gaming state (FIG. 64, (See Figure 65). Then, based on the determination of the losing symbol Z1, the number of consecutive time reduction settings becomes one (two times remaining until reaching the upper limit number of times).
In this first low-probability time-saving game state (when the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 1), the game ball is continuously launched into the first game area 12a. Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15, the gaming state after the end of the special game based on the determination is set to the second low probability time-saving gaming state. (See FIGS. 64 and 65), based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1, the set number of consecutive time reductions is 2 times (the remaining number of times until reaching the upper limit number is 1 time).
In addition, as in the case (1), after the second low probability time saving gaming state is set, the first game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16, and based on this, the winning lottery and the fluctuation are performed. Furthermore, based on the entry of the second to third game balls into the second starting winning hole 16, the second special pattern random numbers are stored pending up to the upper limit of two.

Then, as mentioned above, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined in the normal gaming state (when the number of consecutive time saving settings is 1) and the second low probability time saving gaming state is set, the jackpot symbol X1 is determined. Based on this, the number of consecutive time saving settings is 2 times, so if either jackpot symbol X2, jackpot symbol X3, small prize symbol Y1 or small prize symbol Y2 is determined once, the special game ends based on the determination. After that, the normal gaming state is forcibly set. Furthermore, since the normal gaming state is forcibly set, the number of consecutive time reduction settings is reset to 0 times.

(b) In the forcibly set normal gaming state, when the jackpot symbol X2 or the small win symbol Y1 is determined based on the second special symbol random number that was previously stored and stored. When the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, in addition to the second special figure random number used for the first win/fail lottery and fluctuation, two second special figure random numbers are held and stored. Therefore, at the time when the above-mentioned symbols are determined once and the normal gaming state is forcibly set, the remaining two second special symbol random numbers are held and stored.
Then, a lottery is performed based on the second special symbol random number which is the first of the two stored symbols, and the jackpot symbol X2, the jackpot symbol X3, the small winning symbol Y1, or the small winning symbol Y2 are drawn. One of these is determined. Here, since the normal gaming state is set at the time of the lottery, if the jackpot symbol The gaming state is set (see FIGS. 64 and 65), and the number of consecutive time reduction settings is 1 (2 times remaining until reaching the upper limit number of times).
At this point, the remaining one second special pattern random number is reserved and stored, so one of the above-mentioned symbols is determined based on this last one second special pattern random number, and the second special pattern random number is selected again. 2 Low probability time saving game state is set (see FIGS. 53 and 54), and the number of continuous time saving settings is 2 (one remaining until reaching the upper limit number of times).

Then, since the above-mentioned winning/failure lottery has been carried out, the second special random number is not stored in storage, so the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set based on the determination of one of the above-mentioned symbols. In this case, the second starting winning hole 16 is opened again, and a lottery and a fluctuation are performed based on the entry of the first game ball into the second starting winning hole 16 that is currently open. Based on the entry of the second to third game balls into the second starting prize opening 16, the second special pattern random number is stored in abeyance up to the upper limit of two.
As mentioned above, at this point, the set number of consecutive time reductions is 2 times (1 time remaining until reaching the upper limit number of times), so in the lottery based on the entry of the first game ball mentioned above, When either the jackpot symbol X2, the jackpot symbol X3, the small prize symbol Y1 or the small prize symbol Y2 is determined, the normal game state is forcibly set, resulting in the same situation as described above.

(b) In the forcibly set normal game state, when the jackpot symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined based on the second special symbol random number that has been previously stored.In contrast, as described above. The normal game state is forcibly set, and the jackpot symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined based on the second special pattern random number that was stored first of the two that had been stored at this point. If so, the normal gaming state is set again based on the determination (see FIGS. 64 and 65).
At this point, the remaining one second special pattern random number is held and stored, so if the jackpot symbol X2 or the small winning symbol Y1 is determined based on this last one second special symbol random number In this case, the second low-probability time-saving game state is set again (see FIGS. 64 and 65), resulting in the same situation as in (1) above.
On the other hand, if the jackpot symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined, the normal gaming state will continue to be set (see FIGS. 64 and 65), and in this case, the same situation as in (1) above will occur. becomes.

In this way, if you win a jackpot in the normal gaming state (when the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 1) and the second low probability time-saving gaming state is set, then when you transition to the normal gaming state, the remaining amount will be For both of the two second special random numbers, the second low probability time-saving game state is repeatedly set and the special game continues to be executed unless the jackpot symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined. Become.
For example, if the jackpot symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined for both the first and second second special symbol random numbers that were held and stored when the game state was shifted to the normal gaming state for the first time, A total of four special games will be executed, from the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 to the special game based on the determination of the above-mentioned jackpot symbol X3 or small win symbol Y2. In addition, the jackpot symbol X2 or the small winning symbol Y1 is determined based on the first second special pattern random number that was stored on hold when the game state shifts to the normal game state for the first time, and the state shifts to the normal game state for the second time. If the jackpot symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined for both the first and second second special random numbers that were held and stored at the time, the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 A total of seven special games will be executed up to the special game based on the determination of the above-mentioned jackpot symbol X3 or small win symbol Y2.
In addition, the jackpot symbol X2 or the small winning symbol Y1 is determined based on the first second special pattern random number that was stored on hold when the game state shifts to the normal game state for the first time, and the state shifts to the normal game state for the second time. The jackpot symbol X2 or the small winning symbol Y1 is determined based on the first second special symbol random number that was stored on hold at the time of the game, and the one that was stored on hold when the game status transitioned to the normal gaming state for the third time. If the jackpot symbol X3 or the small winning symbol Y2 is determined for both the number and the second second special symbol random number, the above-mentioned jackpot symbol X3 or small winning symbol Y2 is selected from the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1. A total of 10 special games will be executed up to the special game based on the decision.

(3) When a jackpot is won in the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 2) and the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set.Similar to the pachinko machine P according to other application example 3, If a jackpot is won in the first low-probability time-saving game state where the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 2, the special game based on the game ball entering the second starting prize opening 16 will not be executed. , the normal gaming state will be set again.
Also, in the above-mentioned first low probability time saving game state (when the number of consecutive time saving settings is 2), if the losing symbol Z1 is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15, other Similarly to the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 3, after the determination, the normal gaming state is forcibly set (see FIGS. 64 and 65), and the above (1) to (3) are repeated. Become.

In this way, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 4, in the normal game state or the first low probability time-saving game state, a specific losing symbol (losing symbol Z1) is generated without winning the jackpot or executing a special game. Based on the determination, the first low probability time saving game state is set, and the number of consecutive time saving settings is updated. In addition, when transitioning from the second low probability time-saving game state to the normal game state via the special game, a predetermined jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol X2 ) or the small winning symbol (small winning symbol Y1) is determined, the second low probability time saving game state is set again. Then, depending on the number of times the first low-probability time-saving game state is set in the normal game state or the first low-probability time-saving game state, at the time the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, the upper limit number of consecutive time-saving settings is set. The remaining number of times until reaching the normal game state changes, and it becomes possible to re-transfer to the second low probability time-saving game state depending on the lottery result at the time of transition to the normal game state, so the second low probability time-saving game During the state (until the normal game state is set again), the number of times the special game is executed continuously changes, making it possible to provide novel gameplay that increases the player's interest.

Note that it is not necessary to set it so that when a game ball enters the second starting winning hole 16, it will always result in a jackpot or small win, but it may be set so that it will result in a loss with a predetermined probability. .
In addition, when a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15 and a loss is determined, a specific loss pattern (loss pattern) in which the first time-saving gaming state (first low probability time-saving gaming state) is set The symbol Z1) may be determined.
Furthermore, when a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 and a jackpot is won, a jackpot symbol for which a normal gaming state is set may be determined.
In addition, a first time-saving gaming state (first low probability time-saving gaming state) is set based on the determination of a specific losing symbol (losing symbol Z1) based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting winning hole 15. Instead, a specific jackpot symbol or small prize symbol is provided in which the first time-saving gaming state is set when the game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15, and the specific jackpot symbol or small prize symbol is provided. The first time-saving gaming state may be set based on the determination.

(Other application example 5)
(Overview of configuration and control)
The pachinko machine P according to another application example 5 is also a so-called 1 type 2 type mixed pachinko machine. In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 5, as shown in FIG. 66, a regular figure start opening 70 into which a game ball can enter is provided at the lower center of the game area 12. Only game balls flowing down the first game area 12a can enter into this normal figure starting prize opening 70.

Further, at the lower left side of the normal figure starting opening 70, an entry device 80 into which a game ball can enter is provided. As shown in FIG. 66, this entrance device 80 includes a ball entrance 81 into which game balls can enter, an opening/closing door 82 (normal electric accessory) that opens and closes the ball entrance 81, and a ball entrance 81 that allows players to enter from the ball entrance 81. A first downstream passage 83 and a second downstream passage 84 through which a ball can flow down, and a second downstream passage 84 which can be displaced to a first position or a second position, and when the ball enters from the ball entry port 81 when it is in the first position. A distribution member 85 that distributes the game balls to the first downstream passage 83 and distributes the game balls that entered from the ball entry port 81 to the second downstream passage 84 when in the second position, and a game that flows down the first downstream passage 83. A first gate 86 through which a ball can pass, a second gate 87 through which a game ball flowing down the second flow path 84 can pass, and a game ball that has passed through the first gate 86 and the second gate 87 are placed on the game board 11. It is equipped with an outlet (not particularly shown) for discharging to the back side.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 66, in the center of the left part of the gaming area 12, there is a first starting prize opening 15 equipped with an opening/closing door 90 that can be opened and closed, and a second starting winning opening equipped with an opening/closing door 91 that can be opened and closed. 16 are arranged in parallel. Furthermore, an attacker device 17 having the same configuration as other application examples 3 and 4 is provided at the lower left part of the game area 12.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this other application example 5, similarly to other application examples 3 and 4, the normal game state, the first low probability time saving game state, or the second low probability time saving game state is set. Either one is set, but in either game state, the game ball is directed to be launched (left-handed) toward the first game area 12a.
Then, when the game ball flowing down the first gaming area 12a enters the normal pattern starting port 70, a drawing of a normal pattern is performed, and if the result of the drawing is a win, the opening/closing door 82 opens and the entry device 80 enters. The game ball can enter the ball opening 81, and the sorting member 85 stays at the first position or the second position, so that the game ball that enters the ball opening 81 is routed to the first downstream passage 83 or the second downstream passage 83. It is guided to the downstream passage 84. Which downstream path the game ball is guided to is determined in advance according to the set game state.

Further, when the game ball guided to the first downstream passage 83 passes through the first gate 86, the opening/closing door 90 opens (the second starting prize opening 16 is opened), and the game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16. It becomes possible. Then, when two game balls enter the second starting prize opening 16, the opening/closing door 90 is closed. In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 5, when a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15, the upper limit number of first special figure random number holds that can be stored (upper limit number of first hold numbers) is It is set to 1.
Further, when the game ball guided to the second downstream passage 84 passes through the second gate 87, the opening/closing door 91 opens (the first starting prize opening 15 is opened), and the game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16. It becomes possible. Then, when two game balls enter the second starting prize opening 16, the opening/closing door 91 is closed. In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 5, when a game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16, the upper limit number of second special figure random numbers that can be stored (the upper limit number of second reserved numbers) is It is set to 1.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 5, as shown in FIG. 67, the probability of winning in the lottery of normal symbols during the non-time saving gaming state (normal gaming state) is set to approximately 1/150. The opening time of the opening/closing door 82 in the event of a win is 1.8 seconds (=0.9 seconds x 2 times). Then, when a winning result occurs in the normal symbol lottery during the non-time-saving gaming state, the sorting member 85 stops at the second position, and as a result, the game ball that enters from the ball entrance 81 is transferred to the second gate 87. By passing through, the second starting prize opening 16 is opened.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 67, the probability of winning in the lottery of normal symbols during the first time-saving game state (during the first low-probability time-saving game state) is set to approximately 1/2, and the probability of winning is set to approximately 1/2. In this case, the opening time of the door 82 is 1.8 seconds (=0.9 seconds x 2 times). Then, when a winning result occurs in the normal symbol lottery during the first time-saving game state, the sorting member 85 stops at the first position, so that the game ball that enters from the ball entrance 81 is routed to the first gate. By passing through 86, the first starting prize opening 15 is opened.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 67, the probability of winning in the drawing of normal symbols during the second time-saving game state (second low-probability time-saving game state) is set to approximately 1/1.1, and the probability of winning is approximately 1/1.1. In this case, the opening time of the opening/closing door 82 is 1.8 seconds (=0.9 seconds x 2 times). Then, when a winning result occurs in the normal symbol lottery during the second time-saving game state, the sorting member 85 stops at the second position, so that the game ball that enters from the ball entrance 81 is routed to the second gate. By passing through 87, the second starting prize opening 16 is opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 67, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 5, similarly to other application examples 3 and 4, when a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15, It is possible to win a jackpot, and if a jackpot is won, a jackpot symbol X1 is determined, and if it is a loss, a losing symbol Z1 is determined. Note that the probability of winning the jackpot when a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 is set to approximately 1/300, regardless of the gaming state.
When the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, 10 round games are executed during the special game based on the determination, and approximately 1000 game balls can be obtained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 67, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, regardless of whether the gaming state at the time of determination is the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state (first low probability time-saving gaming state), After the special game based on the determination ends, a second low probability time saving game state (the number of time saving times is 100) is set.
In addition, when the losing symbol Z1 is determined, when the gaming state at the time of the determination is the normal gaming state, a second low probability time-saving gaming state (the number of time-savings is 100 times) is set after the determination. . On the other hand, when the gaming state at the time of the determination is the first low probability time-saving gaming state, the setting of the time-saving gaming state is not performed. That is, when the losing symbol Z1 is determined during the first low probability time saving gaming state, the first low probability time saving gaming state continues even after the determination.

Further, as shown in FIG. 67, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 5, when the game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16, it is possible to win a jackpot or a small jackpot, and the jackpot When winning, a jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined, when a small win is won, a small win symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, and when it is a loss, a losing symbol Z2 is determined.
When the game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16, either the jackpot is won (the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined) or the small win is won (the small win symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined). A special game is executed through a small winning game executed based on the above decision.

As shown in FIG. 67, the probability of winning a jackpot when a game ball enters the second starting winning hole 16 is set to approximately 1/300, regardless of the gaming state, and The probability of winning a small hit when a game ball enters the winning hole 16 is set to approximately 149/300, regardless of the gaming state. That is, when a game ball enters the second starting winning hole 16, the probability of winning a jackpot or a small jackpot and executing a special game is approximately 1/2.
Moreover, as shown in FIG. 67, the determination probability of the jackpot symbol X2 and the determination probability of the jackpot symbol X3 at the time of winning the jackpot are both 1/2. Similarly, when a small win is won, the determination probability of the small win symbol Y1 and the determination probability of the small win symbol Y2 are both 1/2.
Then, when the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined, and when the small win symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, 10 round games are executed during the special game based on the determination, and approximately 400 rounds are played. It is now possible to obtain a number of game balls.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 67, when the jackpot symbol X2 or the small win symbol Y1 is determined, if the gaming state at the time of the determination is the normal gaming state, after the special game based on the determination ends. When the second low-probability time-saving game state (the number of time-savings is 100) is set and the game state at the time of the determination is the second low-probability time-saving game state, the normal game state is entered after the special game based on the determination ends. is set.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 67, when the jackpot symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined, the gaming state at the time of the determination is either the normal gaming state or the second low probability time-saving gaming state. In this case, the second low probability time saving game state (the number of time saving times is 100) is set after the special game based on the determination ends. That is, when the jackpot symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined during the normal game state or the second low probability time saving game state, the second low probability time saving game state and the number of time saving times are set (second low probability time saving game (reset during the current state).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 67, when the losing symbol 999 times) is set. On the other hand, when the gaming state at the time of the determination is the second low probability time-saving gaming state, the setting of the time-saving gaming state is not performed. That is, when the losing symbol Z2 is determined during the second low probability time saving gaming state, the second low probability time saving gaming state continues even after the determination.

(Game performance of pachinko machine P according to other application example 5)
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 5, as described above, the normal gaming state (a gaming state that combines a low probability gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state), the first low probability time saving gaming state (a low probability gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state), Either the first time-saving game state (a game state that combines the first time-saving game state) or the second low-probability time-saving game state (a game state that combines the low-probability game state and the second time-saving game state) is set, and the game progresses. It looks like this.

Immediately after factory shipment or in the initial state after reset, a normal gaming state is set.
During the normal game state, a game ball can enter the normal pattern starting winning hole 70, and a lottery of normal symbols is performed based on the game ball entering the normal pattern starting winning hole 70. . When this normal symbol lottery is won, the opening/closing door 82 is opened and the game ball that enters the entry device 70 is allowed to pass through the second gate 87 as described above, and the game ball passes through the gate. The second starting prize opening 16 is opened. Then, when one game ball enters the opened second starting prize opening 16, the second starting winning opening 16 is closed, and a lottery is held based on the entered game ball. It will be held twice.
In this lottery, if a jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, and after the special game based on the determination ends, a second low probability time-saving game state (time-saving number of 100 times) is set (see FIGS. 67 and 68) ). On the other hand, when a loss occurs, the loss symbol Z1 is determined, and after the determination, a first low probability time saving game state (999 times of time saving) is set (see FIGS. 67 and 68).

(1) When the second low-probability time-saving game state is set During the second low-probability time-saving game state, the game ball can enter the regular game starting prize opening 70 as well as during the normal game state. When the game ball enters the normal pattern starting prize opening 70 and wins in the lottery of normal symbols, the opening/closing door 82 is opened and the game ball that enters the entry device 70 enters the second gate. 87, and when the game ball passes through the gate, the second starting prize opening 16 is opened. Then, when one game ball enters the opened second starting prize opening 16, the second starting winning opening 16 is closed, and one winning/failure lottery is performed based on the entered game ball.

In this lottery, if you win a jackpot, the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined, if you win a small win, the small win symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, and if you lose, the losing symbol Z2 is determined (see Figures 67 and 68) ). Then, when the jackpot symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined, the second low probability time-saving game state is set again after the special game based on the determination is completed (see FIGS. 67 and 68). On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol X2 or the small prize symbol Y1 is determined, the normal game state is set after the special game based on the determination is completed (see FIGS. 67 and 68). Further, when the losing symbol Z2 is determined, the second low probability time saving gaming state continues even after the determination (see FIGS. 67 and 68).

In addition, since the number of time-saving games in the second low-probability time-saving game state is set to 100, the second low-probability time-saving game state will end if the above-mentioned winning lottery is performed 100 times without winning a jackpot. Become. However, during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the second starting prize opening 16 is frequently opened, and in the lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16, it is possible to win a jackpot or a small winning. Since the probability of winning is set to approximately 1/2, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state will essentially continue until the player wins the jackpot or small jackpot again.
Then, when the second low probability time saving game state is set, unless the jackpot symbol X2 or the small winning symbol Y1 is determined in the above-mentioned winning lottery, the second low probability The probability time saving game state will be set repeatedly.

On the other hand, based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2 or the small prize symbol Y1, if the normal game state is set after the special game based on the determination has ended, as described above, the normal symbol will be won in the lottery and the A lottery is held based on the entry of game balls into the 2-start prize opening 16. Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the second low probability time saving gaming state (100 time saving times) is set again, and when the losing symbol Z1 is determined, the first low probability time saving gaming state is set. is set.

(2) When the first low-probability time-saving game state is set As described above, when the losing symbol Z1 is determined in the normal game state, the first low-probability time-saving game state is set.
During the first low-probability time-saving game state, the game ball can enter the normal pattern starting prize opening 70 as well as during the normal game state and the second low-probability time-saving game state, but the When a winning result is achieved in the normal symbol lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the normal pattern starting prize opening 70, the opening/closing door 82 is opened and the game ball entering the entry device 70 is allowed to pass through the first gate 86. When the game ball passes through the gate, the first starting prize opening 15 is opened. Then, when two game balls enter the opened first starting prize opening 15, the first starting winning opening 15 is closed, and a lottery is performed based on the game ball that entered first. The first special figure random number obtained based on the game ball that entered the ball after the fluctuation is performed is stored on hold. Moreover, when the variation in progress is completed, successive lottery and variation based on the first special symbol random number stored on hold are performed.

If a jackpot is won and jackpot symbol A low probability time saving game state is set (see FIGS. 67 and 68). The flow of the game after the second low probability time saving game state is set is the same as (1).
On the other hand, in the above-mentioned winning lottery, when a loss occurs and the losing symbol Z1 is determined, the time-saving gaming state is not set and the first low probability time-saving gaming state continues as it is. Furthermore, by performing the winning lottery once, the remaining number of time saving times in the first low probability time saving game state is decreased by 1.

Here, during the first low-probability time-saving game state, two game balls enter while the first starting prize opening 15 is opened due to the determination of a win in the drawing of normal symbols, so the first special pattern random number is The state in which one item is held and stored is maintained. Further, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 5, as described above, the number of time saving times in the first low probability time saving game state is set to 999 times, which is an odd number. Then, if the winning lottery is performed 999 times without winning a jackpot during the first low-probability time-saving game state, the first low-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set (see FIG. 68). , At this point, one first special figure random number is held and stored.
Then, a win/fail lottery is performed based on the first special random number that was stored on hold when the normal gaming state was set, and if a jackpot is won and jackpot symbol X1 is determined, a special lottery based on the determination is made. After the game ends, a second low probability time saving game state is set (see FIGS. 67 and 68). Furthermore, even if there is a loss in the above-mentioned winning/failure lottery and the losing symbol Z1 is determined, the second low probability time saving gaming state is set after the determination (see FIGS. 67 and 68).
In other words, after the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set, if the winning lottery is performed 999 times without winning a jackpot, the subsequent gaming state will always be the second low-probability time-saving gaming state that is highly advantageous for the player. The state will be set.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 5, when a winning lottery is performed a predetermined number of times without winning a jackpot in a predetermined gaming state (first low probability time-saving gaming state), the next In the lottery, whether a specific jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol X1) or a specific losing symbol (losing symbol Z1) is determined, the advantage for the player is A high specific gaming state (second low probability time saving gaming state) is set. As a result, it is possible to set an upper limit (so-called ceiling) on the number of winning/failure drawings before transitioning to a specific gaming state, and it is possible to provide novel gameplay that increases the player's interest.
In addition, in the case of a loss based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting prize opening 16, a loss pattern is set in which the first low probability time saving gaming state (999 times of time saving) is set. Although only Z2 was to be determined, it is not limited to this, for example, the losing symbol Z1 in which it is determined that a second low probability time saving game state (time saving number of 100 times) is set. may be determined.

Note that various settings and controls of the above-described embodiments, modifications, and other application examples may be combined with each other within a range that does not cause any contradiction.
Further, the special notification effect in the embodiment described above corresponds to the specific effect of the present invention. Further, the sub CPU 301 in the above-described embodiment corresponds to the effect execution means of the present invention. Furthermore, the period in which the number of time reductions is 10 in the above-described embodiment corresponds to the first stay period of the present invention. Further, the period in which the number of time reductions is 20 in the above-described embodiment corresponds to the second stay period of the present invention. Further, the first low probability time saving gaming state in the above-described embodiment corresponds to the advantageous state of the present invention. Further, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step 1115 in the above-described embodiment corresponds to the setting means of the present invention. Furthermore, the 21 second period during which the special notification effect in the above-described embodiment is executed corresponds to the first period of the present invention. Further, the period of 33 seconds during which the special notification effect in the above-described embodiment is executed corresponds to the second period of the present invention. Moreover, the pachinko machine P in the above-described embodiment corresponds to the gaming machine of the present invention. Further, the second starting winning hole 16 in the embodiment described above corresponds to the first area of the present invention. Moreover, the closed state of the second starting prize opening 16 in the above-described embodiment corresponds to the first state of the present invention. Moreover, the open state of the second starting prize opening 16 in the above-described embodiment corresponds to the second state of the present invention. Moreover, the big prize opening 18 in the above-mentioned embodiment corresponds to the second area of the present invention. Moreover, the state in which the big prize opening 18 in the above-mentioned embodiment is closed corresponds to the third state of the present invention. Moreover, the state in which the big prize opening 18 in the above-described embodiment is open corresponds to the fourth state of the present invention.

P Pachinko machine 100 Main control board 101 Main CPU
102 Main ROM
103 Main RAM
300 Sub control board 301 Sub CPU
302 Sub ROM
303 Sub RAM

Claims (1)

A first downstream area and a second downstream area that can be separated depending on the firing intensity of the game ball;
a first starting area into which only game balls flowing down the first downstream area can enter;
a second starting area in which only game balls flowing down the second downstream area can enter and can be displaced to a first state or a second state in which there is a higher possibility that game balls will enter than the first state;
A determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute an advantageous game advantageous to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting area or the second starting area;
a symbol determining means capable of determining a symbol associated with the result of the determination;
A production execution means capable of executing a specific production;
It can be set when the second starting area is relatively difficult to shift to the second state, or when the specific performance is executed, and the second starting area is relatively difficult to change to the second state. a setting means that can set any of the time-saving gaming states that are easy to change to the state ;
The time-saving game state includes a first time-saving game state in which the player can stay in a first stay period, and a second time-saving game state in which he can stay in a second stay period that is longer than the first stay period. have,
The specific performance includes a first specific performance that is executed in a first period, and a second specific performance that is performed in a second period that is longer than the first period,
During both the non-time-saving gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state, play the game mainly in the first downstream area,
The performance execution means is capable of executing the second specific performance when a specific symbol associated with not performing the advantageous game is determined during the non-time-saving gaming state,
The setting means is capable of setting the first time-saving game state when the first specific performance is executed, and is capable of setting the first time-saving gaming state when the second specific performance is executed. A gaming machine characterized in that a time-saving gaming state can be set.

Images